T HR Harvard Theological Review
103:1
JANUARY 2010 ISSN 0017-8160
HTR
Harvard Theological Review 103:1 ISSUED QUARTERLY BY THE FACULTY OF DIVINITY IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY
The Harvard Theological Review is partially funded by the foundation established under the will of Mildred Everett, daughter of Charles Carroll Everett, Bussey Professor of Theology in Harvard University (1869–1900) and Dean of the Faculty of Divinity (1878–1900). The scope of the Review embraces history and philosophy of religious thought in all traditions and periods—including the areas of Hebrew Bible, New Testament, Christianity, Jewish studies, theology, ethics, archaeology, and comparative religious studies. It seeks to publish compelling original research that contributes to the development of scholarly understanding and interpretation. EDITOR
François Bovon EDITORIAL BOARD
David D. Hall, Jon D. Levenson, Kevin Madigan, and Elisabeth Schüssler Fiorenza A S S O C I AT E E D I T O R S
Members of the Faculty of Divinity MANAGING EDITOR
Margaret Studier E D I T O R I A L A S S I S TA N T S
Cavan Concannon, Brian Doak, Sarah Eltantawi, Aryay Bennett Finkelstein, Katharine Reid Gerbner, Jonathan Kaplan, Piotr Malysz, John Robichaux, Bryan L. Wagoner P R O D U C T I O N S TA F F
Anne Browder, Rebecca Hancock, Christine Thomas, Richard Jude Thompson, John Whitley
Manuscripts and communications on editorial matters should be addressed to the Managing Editor, Harvard Theological Review, Harvard Divinity School, 45 Francis Avenue, Cambridge, MA 02138. An updated style sheet is available upon request (
[email protected]). For subscriptions (US): Subscription Coordinator, Cambridge University Press, 32 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10013-2473; tel: 800-872-7423 or 845-353-7500; fax: 845-353-4141. Email:
[email protected]. Annual subscription rates for Volume 103, 2010: Individuals, print only: US $55 in the U.S.A., Canada, and Mexico; £36 in UK, elsewhere. Institutions, print only: US $166 in the U.S.A., Canada, and Mexico; £99 in UK, elsewhere. Institutions, electronic only: US $152 in the U.S.A., Canada, and Mexico; £90 + VAT UK, elsewhere. Institutions, print and electronic: US $182 in the U.S.A., Canada, and Mexico; £109 in UK, elsewhere. Prices include surface postage and are payable in advance or on receipt of invoice; only personal check or credit card accepted for individual subscriptions (corporate check also accepted for institutional subscriptions). Website: journals.cambridge.org. For subscriptions outside the US: Journals Marketing Department, Cambridge University Press, The Edinburgh Building, Cambridge CB2 1BR, UK. Tel: +44 (0) 1223 326-070; fax: +44 (0) 1223 315052. Email:
[email protected]. VAT registration no: GB 214 1416 14. Payment in pounds sterling. Back issues of vols. 1 (1908) through 93 (2000) are available from the Periodicals Service Company, 11 Main St., Germantown, NY 12526; tel: (518) 537–4700, fax: (518) 537–5899. For more recent issues, contact the journal’s customer services at Cambridge University Press, 100 Brook Hill Drive, W. Nyack, NY 10994-2113; tel: 800-872-7423. The foreign language and transliteration fonts used in this journal are available from Linguist’s Software Inc., PO Box 580, Edmonds, WA 98020-0580 USA; tel: (425) 775–1130. Website: www.linguistsoftware.com. Typeset in the Harvard Theological Review OfÀces, Harvard Divinity School, Cambridge, Massachusetts Published by Cambridge University Press, New York, New York © Copyright by the President and Fellows of Harvard College, 2010
Married to an Unbeliever: Households, Hierarchies, and Holiness in 1 Corinthians 7:12–16* Caroline Johnson Hodge College of Holy Cross, Worcester
In his Advice to the Bride and Groom, Plutarch famously pronounces: “A married woman should therefore worship and recognize the gods whom her husband holds dear, and these alone. The door must be closed to strange cults and foreign superstitions. No god takes pleasure in cult performed furtively and in secret by a woman.”1 These comments represent a patriarchal ideology that the wife (along with the whole household) should follow the worship practices of the husband. It also suggests the possibility that this counsel was not always followed and that wives might bring their own gods into a marriage, attempting to maintain ritual practices in their honor, perhaps secretly. A number of early Christian sources tell us that sometimes whole households are baptized together. The typical pattern is that the head of the household, who is usually—but not always—a man, is won over by a particular teacher who is passing through town, and he and his whole household are baptized.2 This phenomenon is in keeping with the ideology Plutarch lays out. But what if a wife converted to Christianity and her husband did not? What options does she have? Does she *
Many thanks to colleagues and friends who have read and commented on drafts of this article: Denise Buell, Laura Nasrallah, Jennifer Knust, Shelly Rambo, Ann Braude, Carol Duncan, Fatima Sadiqi, Alex Cuffel, Katherine Shaner, Carly Daniel-Hughes, John Lanci, Mary Ebbott, Ellen Perry, David Karmon, Eugenia Lao. Sarah Bidgood was an invaluable research assistant. My thanks also to James Walters for inviting me to present an early version of this work for the Brown Lecture at Boston University, October 2007. 1 Advice to the Bride and Groom 140D (Moralia I.140D); ET: Plutarch’s Advice to the Bride and Groom and A Consolation to His Wife: English Translations, Commentary, Interpretive Essays and Bibliography (ed. Sarah B. Pomeroy; New York: Oxford, 1991) 7. 2 See Acts 11:14; 16:14–15, 31–34. HTR 103:1 (2010) 1–25
2
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
remain in the household? Does she leave it? If she stays, does she practice this new religion in secret, as Plutarch describes? Or does she somehow incorporate Christian practices into the traditional religious practices of the household?3 Unfortunately, but not surprisingly, we do not have information from the women themselves about this predicament. We do have evidence, however, that Christian authors — mostly men as far as we know—were concerned about this situation, our earliest being Paul.4 In the context of a discussion of marriage and sexual practices, Paul advises men and women married to “unbelievers”5: (12) To the rest I say (I and not the Lord): if a brother (ENHIPJSb has an unbelieving wife (E?TMWXSR) and she agrees to live with him (SMNOIMDR QIX© EYNXSYD), let him not leave her. (13) And if a woman has an unbelieving husband (E?TMWXSR) and he agrees to live with her, let her not leave her husband. (14) For the unbelieving husband is made holy (L.KMZEWXEM) by the wife and the unbelieving wife is made holy by the brother (ENHIPJ[D). Otherwise your children are unclean (ENOEZUEVXE); but now they are holy (E_KME). (15) If an unbelieving man separates, let him separate; neither a brother (ENHIPJSb) or a sister (ENHIPJL) is enslaved in cases such as these.
3 For recent discussion of the nature of “household” and “family” religious practices, see Jonathan Z. Smith, “Here, There, and Anywhere,” in his collection of essays, Relating Religion: Essays in the Study of Religion (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2004) 323–339, esp. 325–28; Stanley K. Stowers, “Theorizing Ancient Household Religion,” in Household and Family Religion in Antiquity (ed. John Bodel and Saul M. Olyan; Malden, Mass.: Blackwell Publishing, 2008) 5–19; Christopher A. Faraone, “Household Religion in Ancient Greece,” in Household and Family Religion in Antiquity, 210–28; Christiane Sourvinou-Inwood, “Further Aspects of Polis Religion,” in Oxford Readings in Greek Religion (ed. Richard Buxton; Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000) 38–55; Deborah Boedeker, “Domestic Religion in Classical Greece,” in Household and Family Religion, 229–47; John Bodel, “Cicero’s Minerva, Penates, and the Mother of the Lares: An Outline of Roman Domestic Religion,” in Household and Family Religion, 248–75. Some of the issues relating to the deÀnition of household religion are whether there is a distinction between family religion (related more to ancestors) and domus or SM@OSb religion (related more to the space of the house and the possessions in it), and whether household religion is only that which occurs in the space of the house or also that which occurs in spaces outside the house (such as during funerary processions or at rituals marking boundaries of property). 4 Later texts include: 1 Pet 3:1–2; Justin Martyr, Second Apology 2.1–6; Tertullian, Ad Uxorem 2. In addition, the stories in the Apocryphal Acts of the Apostles often revolve around the conÁict between a recently converted wife and her unbelieving husband. 5 TranslatingE?TMWXSb as “unbeliever” is not entirely satisfactory for two reasons: 1) it does not adequately express Àrst-century understandings of this term; and 2) it contributes to a common but anachronistic perception of Àrst-century Christianity as a religion primarily of “belief” over and against “acts” (especially in Paul). As I argue elsewhere, E?TMWXSb could also be translated “untrustworthy,” or “unfaithful” (see If Sons, then Heirs [New York: Oxford University Press, 2007] 82). See also Will Deming, Paul on Marriage and Celibacy: The Hellenistic Background of 1 Cor 7 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995) 144–48. In the context of marital relations, however, these translations (especially “unfaithful”) are misleading because they imply marital inÀdelity, which is not Paul’s topic here.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
3
God has called you in peace. (16) For how do you know, woman, if you will save your husband? Or how do you know, man, if you will save your wife? (1 Cor 7:12–16)
Paul’s advice presents a striking contrast to Plutarch’s. Instead of addressing wives alone, he addresses both spouses, as though this might be an issue for both men and women. And Paul is not imagining that the whole household has converted with the head of the household, as we see in other early Christian texts. Furthermore, instead of counseling adherence to the husband’s gods and rejection of “foreign” gods, Paul advises both spouses to stay with their unbelieving partners as long as the latter are willing, advice which implies a certain amount of toleration for the situation. Indeed, Paul seems to imagine that this sort of “mixed marriage” could work, at least for the short term.6 While many factors may account for these differences, one in particular stands out: in the context of the gentile audience in Corinth, Paul’s teachings do not represent traditional gods and practices (which Plutarch associates with the husband), but rather a new and foreign tradition, like those Plutarch warns against. Awareness of this situation may account for his toleration of these “mixed marriages,” and may prompt his advice that believers accommodate their spouses. Indeed, much of Paul’s letter is aimed at addressing this issue: his goal is to guide these gentile believers in their new lives as a people of the God of Israel while still interacting with neighbors. Thus 1 Corinthians is full of advice on various social practices, such as eating, marrying, having sex, and worshipping. 1 Cor 7:12–16 has received a good deal of attention from scholars, mostly focusing on Paul’s views of marriage (speciÀcally intermarriage), or on Paul’s notions of purity and holiness. My goal is to add an additional, related question, one 6
Paul’s apocalyptic outlook informs much of his advice, including in 1 Corinthians 7 (see vv. 26, 29, 31). A number of scholars argue that Paul is Àrmly opposed to mixed marriages (and tolerates them only when a person converts after marriage). The two passages typically cited as evidence for this are 1 Cor 7:39 (widows may remarry, “only in the Lord”) and 2 Cor 6:14–18 (“do not be mismatched with unbelievers ...”). For examples of this view, see two excellent studies: Christine Hayes, Gentile Impurities and Jewish Identities: Intermarriage and Conversion from the Bible to the Talmud (New York: Oxford University Press: 2002) 92–98, and Kathy L. Gaca, The Making of Fornication: Eros, Ethics and Political Reform in Greek Philosophy and Early Christianity (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2003) 146–52. I am not convinced the case is so clear in either 1 Cor 7:39 or 2 Cor 6:14–18. Regina Plunkett-Dowling argues that this 2 Corinthians passage is not about marriage but about those who have defected from Paul’s teachings (“Reading and Restoration: Paul’s Use of Scripture in 2 Corinthians 1–9,” [Ph.D. diss., Yale University, 2001] 121–73). I would also caution against the anachronistic assumption that there is an established, “Christian” view of marriage and intermarriage that Paul echoes (or even argues for). Later Christian authors will use these passages to argue for Christian endogamy (as Hayes and Gaca both discuss), but this is not a concern of Paul. For Paul, marriage is a stop-gap for uncontrollable desire rather than as an end in itself. Furthermore, Paul does not think in terms of “Christians” and “non-Christians,” but in terms of Jews, gentiles, and members of both groups who are in Christ. In 1 Corinthians Paul advises gentiles-in-Christ on how to be true to their calling as God’s people and still interact with those outside the INOOPLWMZE
4
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
that perhaps would have been on the minds of Paul’s readers: how would a believer and an unbeliever share a household? In the ancient world, marriage, religious practices, and children—the main topics of Paul’s passage—are inextricably bound together in the structure of the household. Agreeing to live together, as Paul puts it here, encompasses the whole range of responsibilities of a husband or wife in maintaining a household, including bearing and raising children, conducting business, producing goods, farming, and—important for our discussion—tending to the household cult. 7 Ancient listeners would have undoubtedly heard Paul’s advice in this context of the household and the various activities associated with it. Furthermore, despite Paul’s rhetoric of reciprocity, his comments have different implications and consequences for wives than for husbands. As the Plutarch quote above illustrates, the ideology of households, reÁecting the values of patriarchy, is such that the members of the household are expected to be loyal to the gods of the head of the household, who is often, although not always, a man. Because of the power dynamics of the household, the stakes are different for a wife, or any other subordinate member of the household, who is baptized into Christ apart from the head of the household. Such individuals face the tension of dual loyalties, to their new God and to the head of the household’s gods. In the following analysis, I will read 1 Cor 7:12–16 within the context of ancient households, with special attention to the implications for the lives of women and others in subordinate positions. My primary goal is not necessarily to understand Paul better, but to use his text to think through how members of the INOOPLWMZEM, not only in Corinth but throughout the empire, might have responded to and evaluated Paul’s comments (or perhaps what they did to prompt this advice in the Àrst place). To accomplish this, it is helpful to analyze this passage in the context of ancient households, both the physical spaces and the various hierarchies and social relationships that occurred there. This becomes especially relevant when we recognize that the household was a sacred space—at least parts of it were at certain times—and religious rituals were a part of daily activities. Furthermore, these ritual practices, in which all members of the household participated, were integral to power negotiations within the household. What are the implications for a subordinate member of the household who refuses to honor the gods of her husband and honors her own in their place? By tending to these questions within the larger context of the household, I hope to expose some of the possible stakes and options for women in this situation. To attain this perspective, I will present several snapshots of Roman-period households, based on archaeological and literary evidence. I want to call attention in particular to domestic religious practices, which would have been a part of daily 7
Cynthia B. Patterson argues that in Classical Athens, marriage is understood primarily as the establishment of a household. See Patterson’s “Marriage and the Married Woman in Athenian Law,” in Women’s History and Ancient History (ed. Sarah B. Pomeroy; Chapel Hill, N.C.: University of North Carolina Press, 1991) 47–72.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
5
life and would have involved women and slaves. I will then discuss household religious practices as a site for asserting power in the ancient world, on the part of both those higher in the household hierarchy and those in lower positions. This discussion of ancient households sets the context for an examination of 1 Cor 7:12–16, in which I will highlight some of Paul’s rhetorical aims and how these interact with discourses about and practices of ancient households. We will see how Paul’s advice here (to stay with unbelieving spouses) glosses over a variety of complicated issues that a mixed household might produce, especially for believing wives. Finally I will ask how “mixed marriages” and Paul’s advice about them might have been understood and evaluated by women.
Q Snapshots of Households If we were walking down the street in a city in the Roman empire in the year 50 C.E., we might catch an occasional glimpse of the activities inside the houses we passed, especially those of wealthier citizens.8 We could see through the front doorway, for example, into the atrium of the house, which served as a place to meet friends and business associates.9 The head of the household might be there, greeting guests and conducting business. We might see a slave standing guard in the doorway, or passing through the shadows on the far side of the atrium, on her or his way back and forth from the kitchen or work rooms, serving the various members of the family and the guests.10 We might also see the householder wife occupied with her various duties as household manager, coordinating the work in the house or receiving guests.11
8 In the following paragraphs, I draw from archaeological and literary evidence of household religious practices from different parts of the Roman empire. It is not my intention to offer a comprehensive discussion of households or domestic religious practices. There are many problems with such a task, including the variety of household practices in different places, and the relative lack of attention to households by scholars (in contrast to civic spaces and activities) until recently. Describing household practices in a place like Corinth, for example, is a complicated task. The material evidence from Corinth, a Roman colony with a long Greek history, yields a mix of Greek, Roman and foreign traditions, and scholars are just beginning to study this multiplicity. See Jorunn Økland, Women in Their Place: Paul and the Corinthian Discourse of Gender and Sanctuary Space (New York: T&T Clark, 2004) and the essays in Urban Religion in Roman Corinth: Interdisciplinary Approaches (ed. Daniel Schowalter and Steven J. Friesen; Harvard Theological Studies 53; Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard Divinity School, 2005). 9 For descriptions of this view into houses and the social ritual of the salutatio, see John R. Clarke, The Houses of Roman Italy 100 BC–AD 250: Ritual, Space, and Decoration (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1991) 1–12, and Andrew Wallace-Hadrill, Houses and Society in Pompeii and Herculaneum (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1994) 12. 10 Michele George, “Servus and domus: The Slave in the Roman House,” in Domestic Space in the Roman World: Pompeii and Beyond (ed. Ray Laurence and Andrew Wallace-Hadrill; Journal of Roman Archaeology Supplementary Series 22; Portsmouth, R.I.: 1997) 15–24. 11 Susan Treggiari, Roman Marriage: Iusti Coniuges From the Time of Cicero to the Time of Ulpian (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1991) 420–24.
6
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
Depending on the house, we might glimpse a shrine in the atrium or garden beyond, a mini-temple that mimics the architecture of the sanctuary down the street.12 Statuettes of the gods might be perched inside this structure, or might be painted on the side, perhaps including the genius, or personiÀcation of the head of the household.13 If it were his birthday, we would see the household members making offerings at this shrine, a rite that signals their allegiance to him and their membership in the household. Passing another house we might witness the family gathered around a shrine, while a mother and daughter place offerings of cakes, wine and incense to Juno in a niche in the wall. It is the daughter’s birthday, and the mother coaches her in her prayers to the goddess.14 Or perhaps a new bride makes offerings to a Àgure of Aphrodite, asking for fertility and healthy children.15 In rooms hidden from public view, such as kitchens or other service areas, slaves might tend their own shrines, located in a less decorated niche in the wall above the stove. In a space that free, elite members of the household would not have frequented, slave men and women may have honored the gods of their owners, or perhaps more likely, they honored their own gods, such as those from their homeland.16 12 George K. Boyce, “Corpus of the Lararia of Pompeii,” Memoirs of the American Academy in Rome, 24 (Rome: American Academy in Rome, 1937) 12–14 and passim. 13 Clarke, The Houses of Roman Italy, 9; Daniel P. Harmon, “The Family Festivals of Rome,” ANRW 2.16.2 (1978) 1595; David G. Orr, “Roman Domestic Religion: The Evidence of the Household Shrines,” ANRW 2.16.2 (1978) 1569–75. 14 Tibullus offers a glimpse of a celebration of a birthday of a daughter, Sulpicia: “Juno of the birthday, receive the holy piles of incense which the accomplished maid’s soft hand now offers you. Today she has bathed for you; most joyfully she has decked herself for you, to stand before your altar a sight for all to see. . . . She is making an offering to you, holy goddess, three times with cake and three times with wine, and the mother eagerly enjoins upon her child what she must pray for” (3.12.1–4, 14–15). ET: amended Catullus, Tibullus, Pervigilium Veneris (trans. John Percival Postgate and rev. by George Patrick Goold; Loeb Classical Library; Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1988) 331. 15 Charles K. Williams II discusses the Àgurines of Aphrodite and other deities found in Corinth: “Roman Corinth: The Final Years of Pagan Cult Facilities along East Theater Street,” in Urban Religion in Roman Corinth, 221–47. These statuettes seem to have been part of domestic religious practices, and Williams argues that those of Aphrodite related to concerns of families and especially wives, a theory that coheres with the use of similar Àgurines in Egypt and Pompeii (“Roman Corinth,” 245–46). 16 Bodel, “An Outline of Roman Domestic Religion,” 264–68; Pedar Foss, “Watchful Lares: Roman Household Organization and the Rituals of Cooking and Eating,” in Domestic Space in the Roman World: Pompeii and Beyond (ed. Ray Laurence and Andrew Wallace-Hadrill; Journal of Roman Archaeology Supplementary Series 22; Portsmouth, R.I.: 1997) 197–218; Michele George, “Repopulating the Roman House,” in The Roman Familiy in Italy: Status, Sentiment, Space (ed. Beryl Rawson and Paul Weaver; Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1997) 316–17. Others have argued, however, that family members may have come to the “service areas” to worship, so that the religious practices in the household was not necessarily segregated. For this view, see David L. Balch, “Rich Pompeian Houses, Shops for Rent, and the Huge Apartment Building in Herculaneum as Typical Spaces for Pauline House Churches,” JSNT 27 (2004) 39–40.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
7
Attached to these elite houses we might notice shop fronts along the street. People working here might be dependents in the elite households, and we might glimpse an image of a god on an interior wall or a votive statue on a shelf.17 Just down the street we might see a larger building with multiple families living in discrete living units inside, like apartments.18 We can imagine people in these rooms, even in cramped quarters, still honoring the gods with meal time offerings and prayers.19 As is clear from these snapshots, ancient households should not be cordoned off, as though they were private retreats from work and public life. Instead, Roman-period households accommodated domestic, commercial, political and social activities. People slept, dressed, cooked, ate, procreated and raised children in households. People worked in households, sometimes in shops attached to the physical space of the house, contributing to the economic production of the household. People conducted business in households, as exempliÀed by the ritual of the morning salutatio, in which clients would visit patrons in atria, often on view for passersby. People also entertained in households, inviting friends as well as business and political associates to dine in their houses. A wide range of people could populate an elite household: immediate family members, extended family and dependents, slaves, other workers, tenants, nurses, teachers, and so on. Representatives of various social strata thus occupied households together, in what Andrew Wallace-Hadrill has called “housefuls.”20 Crucial for all of these activities and all of these people was proper devotion to the gods who saw to their prosperity. From the evidence that survives, both literary and archaeological, we can say that domestic religious practices were often connected to meal rituals, perhaps involving small food offerings to the gods before or during meals.21 Statuettes of a variety of deities have been found in houses, as 17
For evidence of religious practices in workshops, shops, depots, and hotels in Ostia, see Jan Theo Bakker, Living and Working With the Gods: Studies of Evidence for Private Religion and its Material Environment in the City of Ostia (100–500 AD) (Dutch Monographs on Ancient History and Archaeology, 12; Amsterdam; J. C. Gieben, 1994) 56–95; John R. Clarke, Art in the Lives of Ordinary Romans: Visual Representation and Non-elite Viewers in Italy, 100 B.C.–A.D. 315 (Berkeley: University of California, 2003) 85–87. 18 Wallace-Hadrill, Houses and Society, 132–33; idem, “Domus and Insulae in Rome: Families and Housefuls,” in Early Christian Families in Context: An Interdisciplinary Dialogue (ed. David Balch and Carolyn Osiek; Grand Rapids, Mich.: Eerdmans, 2003) 3–18; Bakker, Living and Working with the Gods, 44–55. 19 Clarke, Houses of Roman Italy, 25–29; idem, Art in the Lives of Ordinary Romans, 75–78. On the living conditions of the poor in Roman cities, see C. Richard Whittaker, “The Poor in the City of Rome,” in Land, City, and Trade in the Roman Empire (Variorum Collected Studies, CS 408; Aldershot: Ashgate, 1993) art. VII, 8–12. 20 Wallace-Hadrill, Houses and Society, 103–16. Wallace-Hadrill gives Peter Laslett the credit for the distinction between household and houseful (92, 103): Household and Family in Past Time (ed. Peter Laslett and Richard Wall; Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1972). Also on the different status positions of household members see David Balch, “Rich Pompeian Houses,” 42. 21 Dale M. Martin, The Corinthian Body (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1995), 183; Andrew McGowan, Ascetic Eucharist: Food and Drink in Early Christian Ritual Meals (Oxford: Clarendon
8
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
have small shrines or niches which may have held these images.22 Rituals may have included everything from sacriÀces, to prayers, to gestures made upon entering or exiting through the door.23 The goal of this tour of an ancient street has not been to offer a comprehensive description of households or household religious practices. Indeed, our knowledge of household practices is far from complete, and our most plentiful evidence is that of the Roman elite on the Italian peninsula, even as we have some evidence from places like Corinth, Ephesus, and Egypt. If we want to consider places throughout the empire, such as Corinth or Carthage or Asia Minor, or any other places where 1 Corinthians was read, then we need to imagine multiple religious inÁuences, including indigenous traditions, foreign imports, and those imposed by Rome.24 We are aided in this by increasing attention to domestic archaeology and by the efforts of scholars who have begun to think about models that allow for this sort of multiplicity.25 Furthermore, our surviving evidence underrepresents poor housing, so, as with most of our sources from the ancient world, we have to imagine the poor back into the picture, living in insulae or apartments, small shops, rented rooms, or perhaps as dependents or workers in larger households.26 Instead, the goal of this tour of an ancient street has been to evoke images from Roman-period domestic activities in order to call attention to the household as a Press, 1999) 47; Martin Nilsson, Greek Folk Religion, 73–74; Stanley K. Stowers, “Theorizing Ancient Household Religion,” 11. My thanks to John Lanci for access to his unpublished paper, “Many Gods and Many Lords: Perspectives on Indigenous Religious Culture in Corinth,” in which he also makes this point (21–22). 22 Frankfurter, Religion in Roman Egypt, 131–42; Williams, “Roman Corinth,” 221–247; Ursula Quatember “Ego Lar Sum Familiaris: Private Frömmigkeit und Religionsausübung im Hanghaus 2 in Ephesos,” Forum Archaeologiae—Zeitschrift für klassische Archäologie 13.XII (1999) http://homepage. univie.ac.at/elisabeth.trinkl/forum/forum1299/13lar.htm; Maria Aurenhammer, “Sculptures of Gods and Heroes from Ephesos,” in Ephesos: Metropolis of Asia: An Interdisciplinary Approach to Its Archaeology, Religion and Culture (ed. Helmut Koester; Harvard Theological Studies 41; Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard Divinity School, 1995) 251–80; Thomas Fröhlich, Lararien- und Fassadenbilder in den Vesuvstädten. Untersuchunges zur ‘volkstümlichen’ pompejanischen Malerei (Mitteilungen des deutschen archaeologischen Instituts. Römische Abteilung, Ergänzungsheft 32; Mainz: Philipp von Zabern, 1991); George K. Boyce, “Corpus of the Lararia of Pompeii,” Memoirs of the American Academy in Rome, 24 (Rome: American Academy in Rome, 1937); David G. Orr, “Roman Domestic Religion: The Evidence of the Household Shrines,” ANRW 2.16.2 (1978) 1557–91. 23 Frankfurter, Religion in Roman Egypt, 136–138; Clarke, Art in the Lives of Ordinary Romans, 75–78. 24 Jorunn Økland includes a helpful discussion of the intersection and intermingling of Greek, Roman and other traditions in Corinth as a Roman colony (Women in Their Place, 74–77 and bibliography listed in her notes). 25 See Benjamin W. Millis, “The Social and Ethnic Origins of the Colonists in Early Roman Corinth,” in Corinth In Context: Comparative Perspectives on Religion and Society (ed. Steve J. Friesen, Daniel Schowalter and James Walters; Novum Testamentum Supplement 128; Leiden: Brill, forthcoming 2010). John Lanci discusses this issue as well in his unpublished paper, “Many Gods and Many Lords: Perspectives on Indigenous Religious Culture in Corinth.” 26 For an attempt to better understand the economic status of early believers, see Steven J. Friesen, “Poverty in Pauline Studies: Beyond the So-Called New Consensus,” JSNT 26 (2004) 323–61.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
9
context for reading 1 Cor 7:12–16.27 What are the implications of Paul’s advice for believers to stay with unbelievers, maintaining households together? We can see that many religious rituals are tied to daily activities (such as eating and drinking, coming and going) and are therefore not segregated from mundane tasks.28 Furthermore, household religious practices are local and often tied to the ancestors of the head of the household, or to those gods that are relevant to the speciÀc needs of a given household. Therefore, even as we Ànd broad similarities in household practices in different parts of the empire, domestic religious practices were various and adaptable, often accommodating a mix of deities.29 Finally, religious rituals are implicated in the power relations in the household, not only those perceived between divine and human, but also those among the various people living in the household. What are the consequences for subordinate members of the household if they refuse to worship the gods of the paterfamilias?
Q Mapping Power through Household Cult In recent work on Roman-period households, scholars have called attention to the household as an arena of power negotiation.30 Kate Cooper discusses the “spatial grammar” of the domus and calls it a “stage for the performance of authority by the dominus.”31 Kristina Sessa argues that the household was an “index of an individual’s public status” and was therefore subject to public scrutiny.32 These power dynamics might play out in a variety of ways, including the domestic cult. The connection between the authority of the head of household and the power of the gods was widespread in the Roman world. Indeed, the very notion of belonging to a household, whether as a slave or a family member, meant precisely that you tended to the gods who protected that household, the gods of the paterfamilias. In patrilocal marriages, such as were common in the Roman world, the bride moved into the household of her husband and took up the responsibility for worship of 27 Although I have included the evidence from Corinth in the material above, I am not focusing solely on Corinth because Paul was eventually read around the empire and believers adapted this advice to their particular situations. So while I am interested in imagining the responses of this Àrst audience, I am also thinking more broadly about how believers empire-wide may have reacted to this advice. 28 Jonathan Z. Smith remarks that the everyday-ness of domestic religion is one of the reasons it is not studied as carefully as civic, public religious traditions (“Here, There, and Anywhere,” 325). 29 Pedar Foss notes that there are more exceptions than patterns in the houses he studies in “Watchful Lares,” 217. See also John Bodel, “Cicero’s Minerva,” 251. 30 These scholars draw upon anthropological approaches to space such as those explored in Pierre Bourdieu. Bourdieu, “The Berber House,” in Rules and Meanings: The Anthropology of Everyday Knowledge (ed. Mary Douglas; New York: Penguin, 1973) 98–110; and Henri Lefebvre, The Production of Space (trans. Donald Nicholson-Smith; Oxford: Blackwell, 1991). 31 Kate Cooper, “Closely Watched Households: Visibility, Exposure and Private Power in the Roman Domus,” Past and Present 197 (2007) 9. 32 Kristina Sessa, “Christianity and the Cubiculum: Spiritual Politics and Domestic Space in Late Antique Rome,” JECS 15 (2007) 176.
10
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
the gods of her new household.33 Plutarch’s advice quoted at the beginning of this article illustrates this patriarchal ideology, as he admonishes wives to shun any gods but those of her husband. Not doing so amounts to a kind of “religious inÀdelity” not tolerated by Roman moralists.34 Notice that Plutarch invokes a spatial image of closing the door of the household against “foreign” gods, drawing a boundary between the physical space of the household, the wife’s obedience to her husband, and religious Àdelity to his gods on one side, and foreign superstitions on the other. An explicit example of this ideology put into practice is the cult of the genius of the paterfamilias, which might be described as his spirit or personiÀcation. The genius was honored by the household members on the birthday of the paterfamilias, an action that signaled allegiance to him.35 Augustus himself recognized the potential of this tradition when he reorganized the city of Rome around wards and neighborhoods that honored the Genius Augusti and the Lares Augusti.36 These changes transferred Augustus’s household cult to the city, Àtting for an emperor who was cast as the ultimate paterfamilias of the Roman empire. As the model of the household was useful to Augustus in the political arena, so it was useful to moralists and philosophers as a moral framework for discussions on a variety of issues: economic production and wealth-getting; proper comportment of men, women and slaves; health and healing; agriculture; leadership and management skills; and politics (the household as the model for the state).37 Authors of these discourses on “household management” are preoccupied with the proper distribution of power and status. Order, efÀciency, productivity and virtue depend upon each person knowing and occupying a speciÀc position in a larger hierarchy: some are meant to rule and some to be ruled.38 The household thus becomes a site 33 See Treggiari, Roman Marriage, 169; Clarke, Houses of Roman Italy, 10; Harmon, “Family Festivals,” 1599–1600. See Sarah Pomeroy’s important caution against conÁating Greek and Roman evidence, especially regarding the issue of whether brides left the gods of their natal households (presumably their fathers’) in order to pledge loyalty to their husbands’ gods (Families in Classical and Hellenistic Greece: Representations and Realities [Oxford: Clarendon, 1997] 70–71). 34 Jo Ann McNamara, “Gendering Virtue,” in Plutarch’s Advice, 154–55. See also Margaret Y. MacDonald, Early Christian Women and Pagan Tradition: The Power of the Hysterical Woman (Cambridge, U.K.: Cambridge University Press, 1996) 49–126. 35 Orr, “Roman Domestic Religion,” 1569–75; Harmon, “Family Festivals,” 1595. 36 Rolf A. Tybout, “Domestic Shrines and ‘Popular Painting’: Style and Social Context.” Journal of Roman Archaeology 9 (1996) 370; Mary Beard, John North and Simon Price, Religions of Rome. Volume I: A History (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998) 184–85. On the relationship between the imperial cult and households, see Ittai Gradel, Emperor Worship and Roman Religion (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 2002) 198–212. 37 For an introduction to the theme of household management, and for the text and an analysis of Xenophon’s Œconomicus, see Sarah B. Pomeroy, Xenophon: Œconomicus: A Social and Historical Commentary (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1994). Chapter Àve discusses the various subjects covered in household management discourses and chapter six traces the authors that follow this genre into the Roman period. See also David L. Balch, Let Wives Be Submissive: The Domestic Code in 1 Peter (Chico, Calif.: Scholars Press, 1981). 38 We Ànd this thinking in Plato (Laws III 690A–D) and Aristotle (Politics I 1260a 9–14). See Balch, Let Wives Be Submissive, 63–116, on the ways in which later moralists continue this thinking.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
11
for mapping out various levels of superiority and subordination, and discourses about households serve as a means of deploying elite values. There are several recurring and intersecting themes in discourses on household management: unity of the husband and wife, the subordination of the wife to the husband (often put in friendly terms by philosophers), order and stability, and reverence of the gods on the part of both husband and wife, which resulted in divine sanction of the marriage and prosperity of the household. We Ànd this cluster of themes expressed by Xenophon, a Àfth-century B.C.E. Greek philosopher whose work on this topic, Œconomicus, becomes the model for Roman-period writers such as Cicero, Philodemus and Columella.39 The model head of household in this text is Ischomachus, who explains to Socrates that when he married his wife, she knew hardly anything about managing the household and that it was his job to teach her (she was only fourteen, after all). Before doing so, Ischomachus describes how he sacriÀced to the gods and prayed for his success as a teacher and for her ability to learn (VII.6-7). When asked if his wife sacriÀced with him and offered prayers, Ischomachus replies, “Oh yes, very much so, and she vowed and prayed fervently to the gods that she might become the sort of woman that she ought to be” (VII.8).40 According to the view of this text, the husband and head of household is a teacher and the wife a student. She eagerly follows his lead in honoring the gods and submitting to his instruction. Authors of household management discourses consistently link the proper hierarchies and functioning of a uniÀed household with devotion to the gods, a rhetorical move that claims divine sanction for their version of a proper household.41 We Ànd an intriguing extension of this theme in Cato’s second-century-B.C.E. farming manual, De Agricultura, a treatise written for elite men who might acquire a country estate. Cato views religious practices as a way of distributing power and maintaining control of slaves in an elite household. Here Cato addresses the head male slave of the household and farm. One of his duties is to supervise the head female slave, who may be given to him (by their owner) as a wife (143). She must clean the hearth daily, and decorate it on holidays: “On the Kalends, Ides, and Nones, and whenever a holy day comes, she must hang a garland over the hearth, 39
Pomeroy, Xenophon, 69–73. Translation from Pomeroy, Xenophon, 139. 41 Similar elite values are expressed centuries after Xenophon by Hierocles, a second-century C.E. Stoic proponent of marriage, who argues that, “the beauty of a household consists in the yoking together of a husband and wife who are united to each other by fate, are consecrated to the gods who preside over weddings, births and hearths . . . who exercise appropriate rule over their household and servants, take care in rearing their children, and pay attention to the necessities of life.” (On Duties: On Marriage 4.22.21–24; Moral Exhortation, A Greco-Roman Sourcebook [trans. Abraham J. Malherbe, Philadelphia: Westminster Press, 1986] 102). Greek text of Hierocles (in Stobaeus): Ioannis Stobaei Anthologium (ed. Curt Wachsmuth and Otto Hense; 5 vols.; repr., Berlin: Weidmann, 1974). In this passage, Hierocles focuses less on gender hierarchy in order to foreground the notion of unity of the husband and wife—a unity determined by fate and consecrated by the gods—in all facets of household life. 40
12
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
and on those days pray to the household gods (Lari familiari) as opportunity offers” (143.2).42 Decorating the hearth and offering prayers to the Lares on speciÀc holy days are thus among the duties the slave performs.43 Cato is careful to point out, however, that the slave’s role in religious rituals is limited and distinct from the roles of the dominus and domina: “She must not engage in worship (rem divinam facere) herself or get others to engage in it for her without the orders of the dominus or domina. Let her remember that the dominus attends to the worship (rem divinam facere) for the whole household” (143.1). Anxiety over unsupervised worship surfaces here as Cato outlines the limitations on the slave woman’s freedom to perform religious rites. This passage offers a glimpse of the role of both a slave woman and the free wife of the paterfamilias: the slave woman performs religious duties connected to the hearth which she tends daily, and the domina is responsible for ordering and overseeing these duties. The dominus, though, the male head of household, is in charge of the rituals of the whole household; his authority trumps that of both women. According to Cato, autonomy with respect to religious practices reÁects the power structure of the household, which is shaped by gender and status. Cato’s instructions echo the prevailing ideology of the power of the paterfamilias in the Roman household, as well as the intertwined gender and status hierarchies that order the subordinate members of the household. Yet his instructions also betray a recognition of the potential for destabilizing this structure. Cato seems to recognize the possibility that the slave woman might initiate religious practices herself, or get others to do so, acts which mimic and undermine the authority of the head male slave over her or the domina and dominus over both of them. Indeed, although our archaeological evidence is not conclusive, several scholars have suggested that slaves did have access to their own shrines in kitchens and service areas and may therefore have been able to exercise at least limited autonomy in their worship practices.44 We can thus imagine in households a tension similar to what we see in Cato’s instructions to the vilicus and in Plutarch’s 42
ET amended from Marcus Porcius Cato “On Agriculture”; Marcus Terentius Varro “On Agriculture” (trans. William David Hooper and rev. Harrison Boyd Ash; Loeb Classical Library; Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1934) 123–25. 43 We Ànd other instances of husbands directing wives in matters of domestic cult in Roman comedy. In a scene from Plautus’s Trinummus, Callicles calls to his wife: “I want our Lar to be decorated with a garland. Wife, pray (venerare) so that the Lar may raise this dwelling up to be upright, happy, fortunate and prosperous for us” (lines 39-42). And in a passage from Rudens, the dominus orders his wife: “... prepare (adorna) things for me to make an offering (rem divinam faciam) to the household gods (Lares familiares) when I return home, since they have augmented our household. We have lambs and pigs for sacriÀce (sacri) at home” (lines 1206–1208). Translation of Rudens amended from Plautus in Five Volumes (trans. Paul Nixon; Loeb Classical Library; Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1932) 4:409. My thanks to Mandy Wall for these references. 44 Pedar Foss, “Watchful Lares,” 218; R. A. Tybout, “Domestic Shrines and ‘Popular Painting’: Style and Social Context,” Journal of Roman Archaeology 9 (1996) 367–70; Michele George, “Repopulating,” 316–17.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
13
warning to wives about foreign gods: not only was power imposed on others by the head of the household, but subordinate members could assent to and resist their place in the social hierarchy through religious rituals.45 In a discussion of Foucault’s notion of power, Elizabeth Castelli offers the following evaluation: “What is most helpful about this conceptualization of power, it seems to me, is that it creates the possibility of agency for the occupants of the subordinate position in a hierarchical relationship: that is, rather than theorizing the powerful and the powerless, it suggests that power is multiply Àgured in social relationships, and creates the possibility for thinking that the weight of the hierarchy might shift.”46 Catherine Bell develops precisely this notion in her study of ritual and proposes a complex understanding of ritual, or “ritualization,” as an arena in which power is asserted, accepted and resisted.47 Building upon Foucault’s notion of bodies as sites of power, Bell argues that ritualization, as action mediated by the body, becomes a process of power negotiation: “Ritualization is a strategic play of power, of domination and resistance, within the arena of the social body.”48 We might read the household rituals described above, ancient households in general, as well as the literature prescribing household behavior (including 1 Corinthians) in this context; power relationships are mapped out in each. We can imagine that through daily rituals, women and slaves found ways to resist or appropriate power in the household. Cato, Plutarch—and perhaps Paul—may be responding to this possibility.
Q Paul’s Rhetorical Aims in 1 Cor 7:12–16 Although Paul is not interested in productive, procreative households, many of the themes in 1 Corinthians overlap with those of household management, including gender roles, eating practices, and relationships among members that are both harmonious and properly hierarchical. 1 Corinthians might be called “INOOPLWMZE management.”49 Instead of constructing a productive and continuing household, Paul hopes to construct a community of gentiles who belong to the God of Israel. This is an enterprise that takes some work, in his view, as he attempts to shape idolatrous, gentile bodies into gentile-bodies-in-Christ. In this process of redeÀning, certain themes are crucial: self-control, bodily boundaries, and proper versus improper mixing. In 1 Cor 7:12–16, Paul’s famous and famously puzzling “mixed marriage” passage, the issue of how to manage contact with those outside the INOOPLWMZEis 45 Kate Cooper describes the importance of the reciprocal (if asymmetrical) power in the Roman household in “Closely Watched Households,” 7. 46 Elizabeth Castelli, “Interpretations of Power in 1 Corinthians,” Semeia 54 (1991) 203. 47 Catherine Bell, Ritual Theory, Ritual Practice (New York: Oxford University Press, 1992). 48 Bell, Ritual Theory, 204. 49 Jorunn Økland discusses the differences between “oikia space” and “ekklesia space” (Women in Their Place, 131–43).
14
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
negotiated within the context of household and family. This passage has received an enormous amount of attention from scholars. My goal in the discussion that follows is not to evaluate this body of scholarship or to offer a thorough analysis of the passage. Rather, I focus on how Paul attempts to deÀne and control household relationships. In this context, Paul’s use of purity language is striking, for he uses it to explain why “mixed marriages” work. Yet as I will show, this very language also yields readings that might allow subordinate members of the household to exercise some power of their own. Scholars have long debated how to interpret Paul’s purity language in 1 Cor 7:14, where he justiÀes his advice to stay with unbelieving spouses: “For the unbelieving husband is made holy (L.KMZEWXEM) by the wife and the unbelieving wife is made holy by the brother (ENHIPJ[D). Otherwise your children are unclean (ENOEZUEVXE); but now they are holy (E_KME).” His argument seems to be that the unbelieving partner is somehow made holy by the believing partner, a process which is proven through holiness of the children.50 This logic rests on the assumption that if one of the parents were not holy, the children would be unclean. Since the children are holy (which seems to be a given), both parents must be holy also. I think it is probably fruitless to attempt to discern a coherent system of purity and holiness here, or in Paul as a whole, or in the Corinthian community, that would explain why the children are holy and exactly how spouses are made holy. Scholars have speculated that it has to do with the intimacies of marriage, namely intercourse, and that holiness was understood as heritable, so that children of holy parents were inherently holy. 51 As intriguing as these possibilities are, we simply 50 I have translated the Greek preposition INR as “by,” treating it as instrumental. See Rom 15:16 where the offering of the gentiles is “sanctiÀed by (INR) the holy spirit.” Another possibility is to read this INR as “in,” so the unbeliever is made holy “in” the believer. Dale Martin makes this argument, and compares this to believers being “in” Christ (The Corinthian Body, 218). I am not sure the two readings (INR as “by” or as “in”) are mutually exclusive, although I do not think the use of INR in 7:14 is quite the same as being “in Christ.” I have argued elsewhere that when Paul says that the gentiles are “in Christ,” he refers to a kinship ideology in which descendants are “in” their ancestors (If Sons, 93–107). See also Stanley K. Stowers, “Pauline Participation in Christ,” in RedeÀning First-Century Jewish and Christian Identities: Essays in Honor of Ed Parish Sanders (ed. Fabian Udoh; Notre Dame, Ind.: University of Notre Dame Press, 2008). 51 Many questions remain despite signiÀcant scholarly attention: by what mechanism is one made holy by one’s spouse? Why is it a given that the children are holy— have they been baptized? Are the children and the E?TMWXSb spouse considered members of the community? For discussion of these issues, see Hans Conzelmann, First Corinthians: A Commentary on the First Epistle to the Corinthians (Philadelphia, Pa.: Fortress, 1975) 121–23; Raymond F. Collins, First Corinthians (Sacra Pagina 7; Collegeville, Minn.: The Liturgical Press, 1999) 262–73; MacDonald, Early Christian Women, 189–95; Anthony C. Thiselton, The First Epistle to the Corinthians: A Commentary on the Greek Text (Grand Rapids: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Company, 2000) 527–30. Thiselton is less persuaded by the “contagion” theories, and argues (following Owen Roger Jones and Jerome Murphy-O’Connor) that Paul’s concept of holiness could have an ethical dimension, so that the behavior of the believing spouse could affect the whole household (First Epistle to the Corinthians, 529–30). For a connection between Paul’s “sanctiÀcation” language and later Jewish texts, see David Daube, “Pauline Contributions to a Pluralistic Culture: Re-creation and Beyond,” in Jesus and Man’s
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
15
do not have enough information to settle the matter. Therefore, rather than trying to “uncover” a stable system accessible to Paul and to the Corinthians, which may not in fact exist, I will consider instead how purity language is being used rhetorically in this passage. How does Paul deploy purity language in certain situations, as he does here, and what are the issues at stake for him and for his audience? If we survey Paul’s letters, we Ànd that he repeatedly connects gentiles who are not in Christ with idolatry and TSVRIMZE (or sexual immorality) and then describes this state in terms of pollution and holiness.52 Before they are in Christ, gentiles are idolatrous, prone to acts of TSVRIMZE, and are ENOEZUEVXE, or unclean.53 This cluster of bad things, in Paul’s thinking, is a theological condition that characterizes people who are alienated from the God of Israel.54 In turn, Paul describes the transformation from this degraded state to becoming a people of God as being made holy. Just prior to our “mixed marriage” passage, Paul describes this change, offering a “before and after” moral assessment of the gentile believers. Some of you used to be sexually immoral, idolaters, adulterers (and so on),55 Paul tells the Corinthians, “But you were washed, you were sanctiÀed (L.KMEZWULXI), you were justiÀed in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ and in the Spirit of our God” (6:9b–11).56 Holiness marks a shift in identity for these non-Jews who have left behind their worship of the wrong gods and lack of self-mastery and have become loyal to the God of Israel.57 Hope (ed. Donald G. Miller and Dikran Y. Hadidian; Pittsburgh: Pittsburgh Theological Seminary, 1971) 223–45 and Yonder Moynihan Gillihan, “Jewish Laws on Illicit Marriage, the DeÀlement of Offspring, and the Holiness of the Temple: A New Halakic Interpretation of 1 Corinthians 7:14,” JBL 121 (2002) 711–44. For a study of Paul’s concept of holiness, see J. Ayodeji Adewuya, Holiness and Community in 2 Cor 6:14–7:1: Paul’s View of Communal Holiness in the Corinthian Correspondence (New York: Peter Lang Publishing, 2001) chs. 5 and 6. 52 Jennifer Knust comments on this in Abandoned to Lust: Sexual Slander and Ancient Christianity (New York: Columbia University Press, 2006) 51–87. 53 On notions of purity in Paul, see Michael Newton, The Concept of Purity at Qumran and in the Letters of Paul (London: Cambridge University Press, 1985), but also the revisions of Jonathan Klawans, who argues that it is important to distinguish between ritual impurity and moral impurity, and that Paul is concerned about the latter in regard to gentiles (Klawans, Impurity and Sin in Ancient Judaism [New York: Oxford University Press, 2000] 150–56). 54 See Johnson Hodge, If Sons, 49–51. 55 The verse I paraphrase reads: “Those who are sexually immoral (TSZVRSM), idolaters, adulterers (QSMGSMZ), effeminate men (QEPEOSMZ), those who have sex with men (ENVWIRSOSMDXEM), thieves, the greedy, drunkards, revilers, robbers — none of these will inherit the kingdom of God. And this is what some of you used to be” (1 Cor 6:9b–11a). On the complications of translating QEPEOSMZ and ENVWIRSOSMDXEM, see Dale B. Martin, “Arsenokoitďs and Malakos: Meanings and Consequences,” in his collection of essays, Sex and the Single Savior: Gender and Sexuality in Biblical Interpretation (Louisville: Westminster John Knox, 2007) 37–50. See also Bernadette J. Brooten, Love Between Women: Early Christian Responses to Female Homoeroticism (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1996) 260. 56 See also Rom 6:19b: “For just as you once presented your members as slaves to impurity and to greater and greater iniquity, so now present your members as slaves to righteousness for sanctiÀcation.” 57 This kind of purity and holiness language is reminiscent of discussions of the temple among Jewish authors. Indeed, Paul makes this connection explicit a few verses later when he speaks of
16
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
These holy bodies are not without constraints, however, as Paul will argue immediately following this passage. They must answer to the “body of Christ,” of which they are all members. Using the analogy of a man with a prostitute (TSZVRL),58 Paul challenges: “Do you not know that whoever is united (OSPP[ZQIRSb) to a prostitute (XLD TSZVRL becomes one body with her? For it is said, ‘The two shall become one Áesh.’ But anyone united (OSPP[ZQIRSb) to the Lord becomes one spirit with him. Shun TSVRIMZE!” (6:16–18a). With Genesis to bolster his argument, Paul asserts a contagion theory whereby impurity can pass from one to another through acts of TSVRIMZE, or sexual immorality.59 This is especially egregious since it threatens the body of Christ, the community, to which the believer’s body — here represented as male — is connected and subjected.60 Paul wraps up his argument with a reiteration of the relationship of the individual body to the corporate body, and makes explicit the individual Corinthians’ lack of power: “Do you not know that your bodies are members of Christ? Or do you not know that your body is a temple of the holy spirit within you, which you have from God, and that you are not your own?” (1 Cor 6:14–15). 1 Corinthians 6 illustrates how Paul uses purity language to deÀne the status and limit the power of the Corinthians. Calling the gentiles “unclean” links them to idolatry, immoral behavior and the crisis, from Paul’s perspective, of being alienated from the God of Israel. In turn, “sanctiÀcation” and “holiness” signal a transformation from that degraded state to a new life in which gentiles belong to God and must live up to this standard. Part of this arrangement, as Paul states in 1 Corinthians 6, is that they no longer own their own bodies, and must now serve the corporate body of Christ. Purity language serves Paul’s aim of policing the bodies of the gentile believers, and thus the boundaries of the INOOPLWMZE. In the “mixed marriage” passage in 1 Corinthians 7, purity language once again marks the boundaries between believers and unbelievers. In contrast to 1 Corinthians the Corinthians’ bodies being a “temple” or “sanctuary” (RESZb) (1 Cor 6:19; see also 3:16–17). Thanks to my conversation partners Jonathan Klawans, Paula Fredriksen, James Walters, Jennifer Knust and others at the Brown Lecture Series at Boston University, October 2007, for a lively discussion on this point. 58 Jennifer Glancy argues that this prostitute is most likely a slave girl or slave woman in Slavery in Early Christianity (New York: Oxford University Press, 2002) 65. Kathy L. Gaca interprets this TSZVRL as a biblical harlot Àgure, a foreign woman who is devoted to other gods who is often negatively sexualized by biblical writers (The Making of Fornication, 170–72). 59 Christine Hayes, developing the work of Jonathan Klawans on purity categories in Judaism, argues that here Paul conÁates two types of impurity systems: 1) ritual impurity (which was contagious, usually connected to bodily processes, and either temporary or treatable); and 2) moral impurity (which was brought on by behavior, was associated with gentiles, and which could not be Àxed). Hayes calls this innovation “carnal impurity” (Hayes, Gentile Impurities, 92–98; 3–16 offers a helpful introduction to and outline of the argument). 60 Laura S. Nasrallah, An Ecstasy of Folly: Prophecy and Authority in Early Christianity (Harvard Theological Studies 52; Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard Divinity School, 2003) 78–79. Nasrallah argues that the string of advice about bodies in 1 Corinthians (eating, marriage, sex, etc.) represent various attempts by Paul to subject individual bodies to the corporate body.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
17
6, however, where Paul claims that a contagious impurity threatens the “body of Christ,” in this passage a contagious holiness seems to be at work.61 Here, the status of the believer’s body — a member of Christ, a holy temple — trumps the status of the unbeliever’s: the holiness of the believer somehow transfers to the unbelieving spouse, at least enough to render their children not unclean but holy.62 Instead of the body of Christ, we have the household as the corporate entity here, and the status of each member is affected positively by the holiness of the one believer. Similar assumptions about contagion and power to transform are at work here as in the previous chapter, but they are turned on their head so that the insider transforms the outsider rather than the other way around. What is Paul up to here? It is possible that this passage is at least intended to serve his repeated admonition in 1 Corinthians 7 to “stay as you are.” Paul offers this advice to those who are married, to those who are not, to those who are widows, to those who are virgins, to the circumcised, the uncircumcised, and to slaves.63 Just prior to our passage, for example, Paul advises spouses not to divorce each other (7:10–11). When he turns to the issue of believers married to unbelievers, he also 61 In most Jewish texts, and elsewhere in Paul, it is pollution that is contagious, not holiness (Hayes, Gentile Impurities, 251, n. 13). For rabbinic exceptions, see Hayes (Gentile Impurities, 145–63) and E. P. Sanders, who describes clean water purifying unclean water (Judaism: Practice and Belief 63 BCE – 66 CE [Philadelphia: Trinity Press International, 1992] 226). Will Deming Ànds a parallel in Philo, On the SacriÀces of Abel and Cain 128 (see Deming, Paul on Marriage and Celibacy, 140–41). Forty or so years after Paul, the author of 1 Clement writes: “For it is written, ‘Unite with the holy ones (OSPPEDWUI XSMDb E.KMZSMb), for those who unite with them shall be made holy (E.KMEWULZWSRXEM)’ ” (46.2). The language of “uniting” (OSPPEDWUI) and “being made holy” or being “sanctiÀed” (E.KMEWULZWSRXEM) echoes Paul’s language in 1 Corinthians 6:16–17 and 6:11 (respectively). 62 Yonder Moynihan Gillihan offers an alternative reading in “Jewish Laws on Illicit Marriage,” 711–44. Using Qumran and Mishnaic sources, Gillihan argues that Paul engages in halaka here, commenting on and interpreting the law laid down by “the Lord.” He cites some fascinating parallels in which these other Jewish texts refer to licit marriage as the “sanctiÀcation” of the spouse. Gillihan therefore argues that Paul is using this purity language similarly: to argue that the marriage is sanctiÀed and therefore licit. It is through the marriage itself that the unbeliever is sanctiÀed, or made into a legitimate marriage partner. I Ànd the parallel language fascinating and Gillihan’s argument mostly convincing. I tend to agree with Christine E. Hayes, however, that there is still some sort of notion of contagious purity implied in 1 Corinthians 7:14. As Hayes points out, Paul is not saying that the marriage sanctiÀes or legitimizes the unbelieving partner, but that the believing partner does (Gentile Impurities, 251, n. 10; and see 94–96 for further discussion of Gillihan’s thesis). Furthermore, for Gillihan’s argument to fully convince, more needs to be said about the patterns of inÁuence and shared contexts between Paul and later mishnaic and sectarian texts. 63 Scholars do not agree on what Paul is saying about slaves in 7:21. The Greek is ambiguous, and some argue that Paul is encouraging slaves to seek their freedom. For discussion see: J. Albert Harrill, The Manumission of Slaves in Early Christianity (Hermeneutische Untersuchungen zur Theologie 32; Tübingen: Mohr Siebeck, 1995) 77–108; Glancy, Slavery in Early Christianity, 67–69; Collins, First Corinthians, 274–87; Conzelmann, First Corinthians, 125–29. If Paul is telling slaves to remain enslaved, then we might ask the same question we are asking about wives: does he expect that they, too, will continue to worship the gods of the slave holders? What choice do they have?
18
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
counsels the spouses to stay together, and encourages the believers to accommodate the unbelievers: if the unbelieving spouse wants to separate, let him or her go. Paul explains why: “God has called you in peace” (7:15). Two verses later, he sums up the principle that governs each situation: “Let each of you lead the life the Lord has assigned, to which God has called you,” and further claims, “This is the rule in all the INOOPLWMZEM” (1 Cor 7:17). The call for inertia that dominates this chapter stands in stark contrast to Paul’s language of transformation in 1 Corinthians 6. He calls these gentiles to self-mastery and even upholds the celibate body as the ideal for bodies-in-Christ, yet he then tells them not to rock the boat, to stay as they are. Margaret Mitchell has demonstrated how Paul’s rhetoric here, and throughout 1 Corinthians, draws upon political and philosophical discourses of harmony and unity.64 This rhetoric—which is reminiscent of household management discourses that call for harmonious and proper familial relationships—masks difference, quells dissension and, as such, serves as an assertion of power by those for whom not rocking the boat is advantageous.65 In our passage, the potentially unharmonious issue of mixed households has been raised, perhaps initially by the Corinthians themselves, and Paul frames the solution in terms of purity and pollution. Paul’s purity language, by transforming the unbelieving spouse, attempts to dispense with conÁict, and, for the sake of stability, secure the holy status of the whole family. Thus the holiness language here is intended to operate almost as a quick Àx, serving the larger goal of encouraging sedation. Yet the passage does not entirely behave itself, for it leaves open the possibility of other readings that undermine Paul’s advice to “stay as you are.” As discussed above, the language of “being made holy” or “being sanctiÀed” marks the change that occurs at baptism (1 Cor 6:11, for example). It identiÀes members of the INOOPLWMZE over and against outsiders, or what these gentiles were before.66 Thus the notion of one spouse sanctifying another has implications for the boundaries of the community: was baptism by an established leader necessary or could one become a member of the INOOPLWMZE through marriage to a believer? Or through birth to believing parents? Does the believer serve as a kind of portal for the household to the community of believers? This individual power to inÁuence and transform other bodies, and possibly to grant access to the INOOPLWMZE, stands in tension with
64 Margaret M. Mitchell, Paul and the Rhetoric of Reconciliation: An Exegetical Investigation of the Language and Composition of 1 Corinthians (Louisville, Ky.: Westminster/John Knox Press, 1991). See also Castelli, “Interpretations,” 216. 65 As Laura Nasrallah points out, this conservative argument is employed by Paul in an attempt “to corral various somatic practices of the Corinthian community—whether celibacy or sleeping with a prostitute or speaking in tongues—and to construct the Corinthian identity” (Nasrallah, Ecstasy of Folly, 81). 66 Mitchell discusses this point in Paul and the Rhetoric of Reconciliation, 121–23.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
19
Paul’s earlier rhetoric about subjecting individual bodies to the corporate body in 1 Corinthians 6. This scenario is especially remarkable if the believer is a woman. Paul has granted—or perhaps acknowledged—the sanctifying power of the bodies of believing wives. This subverts traditional household ideologies, and the expectation that women and other subordinates will follow the loyalties of the male head of the household. Perhaps even more striking is that it also undermines Paul’s own efforts elsewhere in the letter to rein in the practices of female bodies (e.g., 1 Cor 11:2–16; 14:34–36).67 As many scholars have discussed, this is a chief concern of Paul’s in 1 Corinthians.68 It is intriguing to think about the possibilities of how wives might be responsible for a kind of household holiness that makes these mixed marriages acceptable.69 Paul’s “quick Àx” is thus a bit slippery and yields multiple readings. Furthermore, Paul’s contagious holiness solution prompts multiple questions having to do with the logistics of these mixed marriages in households. Pauline readers would have been negotiating these marriages in households where other gods were venerated, where complex social hierarchies were in place, and where subordinate members 67
Margaret Y. MacDonald argues that 1 Corinthians 7 is also primarily aimed at women, even where the advice is couched in symmetrical admonitions to men and women: “Virgins, Widows and Wives,” in A Feminist Companion to Paul (ed. Amy-Jill Levine with Marianne Blickenstaff; Cleveland: Pilgrim, 2004) 148–68. 68 Some examples of scholarship on this topic are the following: Elisabeth Schüssler Fiorenza, In Memory of Her: A Feminist Theological Reconstruction of Christian Origins (New York: Crossroad, 1983) 218–36; Antoinette Clark Wire, Corinthian Women Prophets (Minneapolis, Minn.: Fortress, 1990); MacDonald, Early Christian Women; Økland, Women in Their Place. 69 Some have argued that Paul encourages evangelizing on the part of wives. This interpretation is based on a particular reading of 1 Cor 7:16, which has been translated two ways. The Àrst communicates a more hopeful attitude, the sense of which is “perhaps you will win over your spouse.” Scholars in favor of this translation argue that verse 16 sums up the whole passage, the gist of which is that Paul has asked the believer to be patient and accommodating, following the will of the unbeliever. Verse 16 then provides the reason for this course of action: perhaps you will win him or her over (the NRSV chooses this option). The second translation, which I Ànd more convincing, expresses a certain resignation, the sense of which is “how will you ever know if you can win over your spouse?” This translation Àts well with the previous verse, providing further explanation for why one should let one’s spouse separate and also makes better sense of the grammar. If the passage expressed the more hopeful sense, we would expect IMNQLZ rather than merely IMN. It could then be translated “how do you know that you might not save your wife?” (Conzelmann, First Corinthians, 124). Thiselton discusses both translations and while he opts for the less optimistic one, he does not rule out the optimistic sense, arguing that Paul’s point is intentionally “open” (The First Epistle to the Corinthians, 537–40). Those who choose the more hopeful translation assume that Paul has a missionary purpose in mind (meaning that he wants his readers to evangelize to outsiders, and here, to an unbelieving spouse), whereas I do not see evidence of this attitude in Paul’s letters. Margaret Y. MacDonald identiÀes this text as the Àrst example of a strategy of the early INOOPLWMZE to gather new members by converting the wife in a household and then encouraging her to inÁuence everyone else (Early Christian Women, 30, 192, 195). I think this is a plausible theory for later Christian texts (1 Pet 3:1–2; Justin Martyr, Second Apology 2.1–6); in 1 Corinthians, however, Paul is more concerned with teaching the Corinthians to manage the situation they are in rather than evangelizing all the unbelievers.
20
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
were expected to worship the gods of the household. Paul addresses none of these issues and indeed, scholars (perhaps inadvertently following Paul’s lead) have also not explored this advice from the perspective of households.70 In the Ànal section of this essay, I will consider how ancient readers may have responded to Paul’s advice. I will use some of what I have outlined about household religious practices, about purity and holiness, and about power dynamics within households to think about the possible viewpoints of wives on this topic.
Q Imagining Responses to Paul Elisabeth Schüssler Fiorenza, who has long been a leader in reconstructing voices outside the written canon, suggests that when the Corinthians debated among themselves the issue of how to live out their new self-understanding in Christ, they may have written to several teachers to ask their advice, Paul being one. Discussion would have then continued once the letter had been received, evaluated, and compared to others.71 This reconstruction frames Paul’s letter not as the sole, authoritative voice among early Christ-followers, but as one of many that were subject to critique or embellishment by the Corinthians, and eventually believers from all over the empire. In what follows I will lay out a series of scenarios imagining how wives might have responded to (or perhaps prompted) Paul’s comments in 1 Cor 7:12–16. Paul’s rhetoric glosses over a whole host of issues related to the power dynamics and religious practices of ancient households. For example, Paul’s comments would not be terribly helpful if one were trying to maintain loyalty exclusively to the God of Israel. Given the religious life of ancient households—where offerings to multiple gods are made on a daily basis and images of the gods might populate domestic space—we can understand how difÀcult it would be to avoid traditional worship practices. Paul seems to imagine believers and unbelievers sharing domestic activities, but he does not comment on how to behave, for example, when offerings are made to various household gods before meals.72 Those believers who did not wish to honor other gods would have to look elsewhere for a solution to this problem.
70
Margaret MacDonald is an exception to this in that she understands 1 Cor 7:12–16 as describing how Christians, through mixed marriages, can evangelize the household (Early Christian Women, 189–95). As I mention in the previous note, I disagree with MacDonald’s view that this is Paul’s motivation, although it is possible that believing wives were interested in converting their husbands. 71 I have paraphrased Schüssler Fiorenza’s proposal in Rhetoric and Ethic: The Politics of Biblical Studies (Minneapolis: Fortress Press, 1991) 120. 72 Presumably this would have been an issue also if they went to a neighbor’s house for dinner, as Paul discusses in 1 Cor 10:27. Here Paul does not object to eating sacriÀced meat as long it does not injure another’s conscience (10:28–29), but he does not comment on prayers or offerings to other gods.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
21
Furthermore, wives would hear Paul’s advice differently from husbands. On the one hand, Paul’s reciprocal language is striking and may appear to resist or to offer an alternative to the patriarchal household structure.73 The conditions, which Paul lays out in two parallel sentences (vv. 12–13), appear to be the same for the believing husband and the believing wife: if your unbelieving spouse agrees to live with you, stay together. Indeed, his phrasing seems to leave open the possibility that women (either believers or unbelievers) would in fact not follow their husbands gods, but would leave the marriage instead. On the other hand, as Elizabeth Castelli has pointed out, such reciprocal language does not necessarily translate to equal treatment in practice.74 For a woman to leave a marriage or to stay in a marriage, for example, could have profoundly different implications than for a man to do either. Given that loyalty to her husband was tied to loyalty to his gods, a wife’s avoidance of these practices may have been perceived as insubordination. She might be in the position that Plutarch imagined, accused of bringing “foreign superstition” into the household. Paul’s counsel simply to stay together may not have been realistic or helpful. It is possible that Paul’s advice was prompted in the Àrst place by believers leaving their marriages, perhaps because of some of the complications mentioned above.75 Some of the women may have shared with Paul the association of unbelieving gentiles with idolatry, a lack of self-mastery and TSVRIMZE, and thought their marriage to unbelievers constituted participation in these unclean things.76 Paul thus attempts to solve this problem with his logic of contagious holiness, reassuring them that they can stay in the marriage without compromising their new status. Believers might ask how this scenario plays out: do all these household members continue honoring the household gods, protected by holiness associated with the God of Israel? Would everyone have agreed to this? Schüssler Fiorenza suggests that Corinthian women may have understood that their new identity in Christ disregarded the social distinctions among them and even abolished old kinship and marriage ties. Some of the women may have thought that patriarchal marriage was no longer appropriate for them, and wanted to leave their husbands.77 Others may have agreed with Paul that a celibate body was the 73
This reciprocal language echoes that of 1 Cor 7:2–6. Castelli, “Interpretations,” 211 and eadem, “Paul on Women and Gender,” in Women and Christian Origins (ed. Ross Shepard Kraemer and Mary Rose D’Angelo; New York: Oxford University Press, 1999) 228. 75 For a later example of a Christian wife who leaves her unbelieving husband, see Justin Martyr, Second Apology 2.1–6. 76 Dale Martin argues that Paul shared with the non-elite in Corinth this concern with pollution and invasion of disease, in contrast to the elite view of disease in terms of imbalance (Corinthian Body, 139–97, esp. 159–64). 77 See Elisabeth Schüssler Fiorenza, Rhetoric and Ethic, 155–56 and eadem, In Memory of Her, 222. Schüssler Fiorenza’s reconstruction is built upon two premises: that “initiation into Judaism dissolved previous kinship and marriage bonds” (In Memory of Her, 222) and that Gal 3:28 incorporates an earlier baptismal formula that abolishes patriarchal marriage (In Memory of 74
22
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
ideal and sought to lead lives of celibacy. Ann Wire argues that this is a possibility for the “Corinthian women prophets,” who understood themselves as channels of God’s spirit and who rejected “sexual relations that involve the authority of one person over the body of another in order to devote themselves to prayer and prophecy.”78 These women would have thought that marriage with unbelievers was no longer viable and may have been voicing these opinions and acting on them.79 To each of these groups Paul’s “stay as you are” response aims to keep these marriages intact, as long as the unbeliever is willing. All of these reconstructions are based on the premise that a mixed household would be a problem and that women were rejecting them for various reasons. The evidence for household practices suggests another possibility: that some women actually did not Ànd mixed households a problem and did not want to leave them. Indeed, several scholars who have reconstructed the Corinthians’ positions—Wire, Martin, and Castelli among them—have argued that at least some among the Corinthians were in fact not concerned about purity and pollution, boundaries, identity, and proper gender and sexual behavior.80 Anxiety over these issues comes from Paul, not the Corinthians, and triggers his use of purity language. If this is the case, then perhaps some women were unconcerned about their proximity to an idolatrous unbeliever and wanted to stay in these marriages. Paul’s emphasis on accommodating the unbeliever’s wishes—if the unbeliever wants to separate, let him separate (1 Cor 7:15)—could hint at an unwillingness on the part of the believers to break up the marriage. Perhaps these women brought their new worship practices into the household and found this unproblematic or even advantageous. We have seen how households could include a variety of religious practices and spaces, and that people of different status participated in daily rites. Perhaps unbelieving husbands would not have minded if the God and messiah of Israel were added to the other deities honored in
Her, 205–231; Rhetoric and Ethic, 155–56). For this latter point Schüssler Fiorenza relies in part on David Daube, “Pauline Contributions,” 223–45. 78 Wire, Corinthian Women Prophets, 182. 79 The Apocryphal Acts of the Apostles illustrate that this was a popular theme in Christian literature beginning at least in the second century. In several of these texts, celibacy is central to Christian theology and practice. 80 Wire, Corinthian Women Prophets, 182; Castelli, “Interpretations,” 211; Martin, Corinthian Body, 34–36, 159–62 (for Martin, those not so concerned about pollution and invasion are the elite in the community, who tend to follow a balance/imbalance model). This suggestion that the Corinthians were not concerned about boundaries between insiders and outsiders coheres with James Walters’ argument that while there was considerable conÁict among believers in Corinth, there was also notably little conÁict with those outside the community (at least as far as Paul indicates). Walters relates this phenomenon to the larger context of Roman Corinth, which was experiencing a proliferation of religious groups at the time. See James Walters, “Civic Identity in Roman Corinth and its Impact on Early Christians,” in Urban Religion in Roman Corinth, 397–417.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
23
the household: more gods meant more protection and prosperity.81 It seems possible that this mixing of gods would not have bothered either spouse.82 If her husband did object to this foreign deity, perhaps the believing wife worshipped her God on her own, or in secret.83 As discussed above, archaeological and literary evidence suggests the possibility that subordinates in the household may have had some autonomy in their religious practices, with opportunities to follow or subvert their duty to the gods of the head of the household. Plutarch and Cato seem concerned about precisely this situation in their prescriptions for subordinates to carry out the wishes of the head of the household.84 If worshipping “foreign gods” is perceived by those in power as an act of “religious inÀdelity” to the marriage and household, then those in subordinate positions may view these practices as a form of resistance, an assertion of power. This sort of power could operate within the household, as one of the multiple strands of power that make up a social hierarchy. As discussed earlier, Elizabeth Castelli and Catherine Bell, both drawing on Foucault, emphasize that power does not operate in a one-dimensional fashion, exercised upon those of lower-status by those of higher status (by the paterfamilias on subordinate members of the household, for example).85 Instead, power is consensual, and, as Bell argues, “ritualization” allows those of the lowest status to claim some power, even as their subordination is reinscribed by the ritual itself.86 A believing wife in a polytheistic household might be in precisely this position, especially if she understands herself as able to sanctify her children and spouse, as Paul suggests. Yet whereas Paul, and perhaps householders as well, might perceive their power as based on status and gender, wives may have perceived their own power as Castelli and Wire suggest, as Áuid, available to different bodies regardless of gender and status, and uninhibited by the proximity of outsiders, and their gods and rites.87 A sort of power similar to that which authorizes prophecy, removing veils and speaking in tongues, may also empower believing women to make their households holy. Whereas some women may have heard Paul’s larger call for sedation, others may have recognized the power of their own holy bodies that Paul’s text implies. 81 One hundred and Àfty years after Paul, Tertullian complains about precisely this problem of the “tolerant husband” (Ad Uxorem 2.5.1.) in his condemnation of exogamous marriage. 82 Perhaps it would not have bothered Paul, either. He clearly does not raise the issue when speaking of these mixed marriages, and in other places he seems remarkably tolerant of other religious traditions (1 Corinthians 8:4–13; 10:23–33). 83 Tertullian addresses the difÀculties of this situation as well, describing the various Christian practices that might appear suspicious (Ad Uxorem 2.5.2–4). See also Apuleius, Metamorphoses 9.14 84 Plutarch, Advice to the Bride and Groom 140D (Moralia 1.140 D); Cato, de Agricultura 143. 85 Castelli, “Interpretations”; Bell, Ritual Theory, Ritual Practice. 86 Bell, 211. 87 Castelli, “Interpretations,” 209; Wire, Corinthian Women Prophets, 63–66.
24
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
One hundred and Àfty years later, as Tertullian recounts, some women were reading Paul in precisely this way. In his vigorous denouncement of mixed marriages, he mentions that he has heard of several instances of women using 1 Corinthians, especially 7:14, which claims that believing wives make their husbands holy, as a scriptural warrant for marrying non-Christians (Ad Uxorem 2.2.1–2). Tertullian, of course, is appalled by this and uses Paul’s text to argue that mixed marriage is not advisable. In the process, he has left us at least a trace of his opponents’ views, women who seem to have been claiming the sanctifying power Paul speaks of for themselves.
Q Conclusion Much of the scholarship on 1 Cor 7:12–16 has focused on marriage and has considered Paul’s ideas an early articulation of what Christian marriage would eventually become after being shaped by later church writers. I have tried to offer a different entry point of analysis by shifting the focus to households and to the women who would have heard and responded to Paul’s words. Doing so helps us think about the complicated relationships among religious loyalties, gender, and social hierarchies in the ancient world, and the realities “on the ground” for early converts. Wives who had been baptized into Christ had to negotiate this new commitment in the context of the household, where they might be vulnerable to their husbands’ censure. The author of 1 Peter seems to recognize this precarious position of believing wives, advising them to “accept the authority” of their husbands “without a word,” (3:1) and “never let fears harm” them (3:6).88 Yet we have seen that domestic religion was multifarious, adaptable, and a part of daily life. Thus Christian practices may have mixed and mingled with traditional worship practices without much conÁict. Or, a wife may have been able to conduct her practices in secret. Either way, she may have derived some sense of agency and power from these practices, and perhaps even understood that her presence in the household exerted some beneÀcial inÁuence over the rest of the household. This analysis prompts us to consider some larger issues relating to the beginnings of Christianity and its place in the Roman world. The boundaries between traditional religious practices and this newcomer, Christianity, may have been more porous and Áuid than someone like Paul or Tertullian—or scholars of Christian origins—would typically conceive. The kind of historical situation implied by texts like 1 Corinthians, where Christian practices might exist along side many others in an ancient household, suggests that conversion to Christianity could happen in a 88 This is fascinating advice given the climate of ancient households in which “accepting the authority” of one’s husband meant worshipping his gods. Although not stated explicitly, the implication seems to be that the believing woman should continue to perform her wifely duties, which would likely include making offerings to the appropriate gods, lighting incense, and decorating the hearth and doorways. Like Paul, this author seems interested in not rocking the boat, even at the expense of honoring other gods.
CAROLINE JOHNSON HODGE
25
piecemeal fashion, where individuals or groups might adopt aspects of Christianity and perhaps integrate these into their traditional religious forms. In this paradigm Christianity does not arrive fully formed, but is gradually incorporated and shaped by its adherents, inÁuenced in part by interactions with outsiders. For a Christian wife married to an unbeliever, this piecemeal incorporation took place in the intimate and quotidian context of marriage and household.
Where the Spirits Dwell: Possession, Christianization, and Saints’ Shrines in Late Antiquity* David Frankfurter University of New Hampshire
With its clear-glass, brightly-lit, whitewashed interior, Harvard Divinity School’s Andover Chapel reÁects all the values of elite Protestant culture in New England history: quiet prayer, thoughtful sermons, an approach to God through the heart rather than the senses, and a minimum of iconic reminders that the space is Christian. And it was here, in April 2007, that this author beheld the Voudoun spirits Danbala and Ogoun arrive through several experienced mediums. The ceremony had not really been intended to call down the spirits, only to praise them in a kind of broad sampling of Haitian Voudoun songs.1 But the altar was full of their treats, the room was full, the drummers were good, the singing was loud, and the mediums were expert. So the spirits arrived: various Danbalas slithering across the Áoor and a very martial Ogoun hufÀng and pufÀng around the altar to get his rum. And they were greeted, with awed interest by the Harvard students, familiarity by the Haitians, and annoyed tolerance by one Adventist woman. Now, Andover Chapel is a relatively neutral place for Voudoun spirits, loas, to show up: neither intrinsically inviting nor forbidding. But what if it were a space for * This paper was Àrst presented at the SBL 2007 Annual Meeting (San Diego, Calif., S17–27) and subsequently proÀted from audiences at the Harvard Divinity School (29 February 2008), Hebrew University of Jerusalem (19 March 2008), and the University of Chicago Divinity School (8 May 2008). I am grateful to David Brakke, Peter Brown, Bruce Lincoln, David Shulman, and the Casablanca Group for comments and advice. Research for this paper was conducted during fellowships from the Guggenheim Foundation and Radcliffe Institute for Advanced Study as part of a larger study of the sites of Christianization in late antique Egypt. 1 Announced on posters as “Action de Grace: A Vodou Service at Harvard Divinity School, with Manbo Marie Claude Evans of Jacmel, Haiti and Mattapan, MA, Friday, April 13, 2007, 7pm–9pm, Andover Chapel, Andover Hall.”
HTR 103:1 (2010) 27–46
28
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
demonstrating the power of Christ against such spirits? Would they then show up, or stay away? How would possession take place in that context? What spirits would appear under those circumstances, and how would they deÀne themselves? Holy spaces often serve as theaters of contestation between new religious ideologies and traditional religious formulations. In this case the chapel provided simply a backdrop (and even at that, hardly legitimacy) for the Voudoun loa. But in other, more historically fraught or culturally transitional situations, much can ride on the manifestations of spirits and their self-deÀnitions at shrines. Thus, in its most general scope, this paper asks how cultures that acknowledge ancestral spirits (like loa) as part of cultural experience and memory have negotiated the rise of Christianity. Have these spirits simply been demonized and expelled? Or have they assumed different functions and personalities, like the Voudoun loas?2 What might exorcism mean in cultures that live in perpetual relationship with spirits? Finally, what role does “place” have in the forms of possession? The primary focus of this paper is “demonic” possession in the development of Christian local religion, but the perennial appearance of possession phenomena in the history of religions recommends just such broader questions about the relationship of Christianization to indigenous spirit beliefs. The historical and regional focus of this paper is the late antique Mediterranean world and the encounter of Christian and native spirits in those lands. And in this context we must Àrst tackle the category daimĿn as an ancient evaluation of spirits. How diverse a Àeld of local spirits would have been covered over in the application of this category? In its most familiar literary usage in Roman and late Roman Christian texts daimĿn denoted those obnoxious, disruptive spirits, often linked to heathen cult and to the army of Satan, who provided such perfect literary foils to Jesus and apostles. It was a category constructed and wielded to dramatize the triumphant, even apocalyptic heroism of Christian holy men.3 But even as Greek and Roman writers applied it to virtually any supernatural being beneath the theoi, daimĿn was a strikingly impoverished term for representing ancient supernatural experience—the “lived religion” of the ancient Mediterranean world, in which local forms of great gods spoke as oracles, seers transmitted the words of spirits, and local cultures lived in familiarity with a great range of ancestral and landscape spirits, both named and 2 On the diversiÀcation, localization, and performative variations of loas in Haitian Voudoun, see Harold Courlander, The Drum and the Hoe: Life and Lore of the Haitian People (Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 1960), and Karen McCarthy Brown, Mama Lola: A Vodou Priestess in Brooklyn (Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 1991). 3 On the structually dramatic function of demons, especially in early Christianity, see Peter Brown, The Making of Late Antiquity (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1975) 18–23; Ramsay MacMullen, Christianizing the Roman Empire, A.D. 100–400 (New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1984) 21–29; and in ritual context David Frankfurter, Evil Incarnate: Rumors of Demonic Conspiracy and Satanic Abuse in History (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2006) 13–72.
DAVID FRANKFURTER
29
categorized.4 To comprehend this great range of supernatural beings we need an approach that does not depend on static, theologically-loaded terms like “demon” or “angel” (or “Holy Spirit”) as descriptive, second-order categories. We need to seek instead more neutral, dynamic, and Áexible categories that can “preserve the sense of indeterminacy [that] people represented for their communities in negotiating spirits and possession.”5 What we need in addition are sources that themselves reÁect this “sense of indeterminacy” around possessing spirits as people regarded them. And these are the texts this paper will tackle: texts mostly from the transitional epoch of the fourth and Àfth centuries C.E., the period of Christianity’s ofÀcial ascendance, that promote Christian supernatural hegemony, but in which “demons” serve not as forces of havoc or evil but as oracles and healing spirits. It is the thesis of this paper that such potent yet ambiguous spirits, which were enacted through possession, reÁected not a peripheral curiosity of late antiquity but rather a central feature of the Christianization of local cultures. Christianization itself involved the reorganization of traditional and institutional pantheons to bring Christianity into local relevance, as a source of authority, morality, power, and myth.6 This reorganization of pantheons was connected to the establishment of various religious centers, those new shrines of a nascent Christian landscape, for it was these sites that came to serve as theaters for the manifestation of spirits, indeed for the shaping of spirits in relationship to the Christian pantheon and to the predilections, beliefs, and needs of particular audiences.7 Finally, I will argue, this performative shaping of spirits’ characters through possession points to popular agency in the process of appropriating Christianity, not simply scriptural or doctrinal models.
4 Regarding gods speaking as oracles, see: Aude Busine, Paroles d’Apollon. Pratiques et traditions oraculaires dans l’Antiquité tardive (IIe–VIe siècles) (RGRW 156; Leiden: Brill, 2005). On the complexity of spirits and gods in the landscape see William Brashear, “Exkurs. Übergänge, Grenzen, Niemandsland,” Archiv für Papyrusforschung 36 (1990) 61–74; and more generally, Charles Stewart, Demons and the Devil: Moral Imagination in Modern Greek Culture (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1991). 5 Nancy Caciola, Discerning Spirits: Divine and Demonic Possession in the Middle Ages (Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 2003) xli. See also Jonathan Z. Smith, “Towards Interpreting Demonic Powers in Hellenistic and Roman Antiquity,” Aufstieg und Niedergang der römischen Welt 2.16.1 (Berlin: De Gruyter, 1978) 425–39. I will thus use “spirit” as the main second-order category and “demon” as an historically contingent classiÀcation for a peripheral and generally hostile spirit. 6 See useful perspectives on this reorganization of pantheons and cosmos in Robert Marcus, The End of Ancient Christianity (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990), and Valerie Flint, The Rise of Magic in Early Medieval Europe (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1991) 87–199. 7 The variable function and representation of “demonic” possession in late antiquity has been insightfully sketched by both Peter Brown, The Cult of the Saints: Its Rise and Function in Latin Christianity (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981) 106–27, and Peregrine Horden, “Responses to Possession and Insanity in the Earlier Byzantine World,” Social History of Medicine 6 (1993) 177–94. This paper is indebted to their approaches.
30
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
Q Holy Places, Vital Spirits Before shrines, of course, it was the ekklďsia, the religious assembly itself, that served as such a theater for the articulation of spirits. Already in the Àrst century, such gatherings seem typically to have led to possession by “angelic” spirits (1 Cor 13; Rev 1–3). But it is a letter of Firmilian of Caesarea (256 C.E.) that describes in especially dramatic terms the dynamics that we will see in late antique shrines. Firmilian notes how, in the wake of a series of disasters in the region, a woman in his group began to enter an ecstatic state and prophesy “as if stirred by the Holy Spirit.” The group seems to have attended closely to this spirit’s words about imminent signs and prodigies. The possessing spirit sanctiÀed the Eucharist, performed baptisms, walked barefoot in the snow, and announced it was returning to its home in Judea. The congregation, on its side, was rapt. When an outside exorcist showed up, however, he denounced the spirit as, rather, a “demon,” demonstrating (according to Firmilian) “that that which was before thought holy was indeed a most wicked spirit [nequissimum spiritum].”8 Firmilian tries to balance the spirit’s appearance of holiness (i.e., its behavior within the roles expected for holy spirits) with his subsequent recognition of its demonic identity. These oscillating perspectives were made all the more acute given that the woman was performing sacraments.9 But of most historical signiÀcance in this letter is Firmilian’s depiction of the real ambiguity of possessing spirits and the imprecision of people’s attempts to classify spirits as either “holy” or “demonic/wicked.” The possessed woman functioned with considerable authority for some time as the vehicle of a prophetic spirit, and even after the exorcist’s pronouncement there was probably some conÁict over the deÀnition of the spirit, reÁected in Firmilian’s own ambivalent tone. We note also the diachronic process of performance, negotiation, and interpretation through which the spirit gained one identity, then another, fulÀlled esssential roles like prophecy and then seemed to switch roles to embody the demonic itself—that is, to oppose the central spirit, Christ. This process, I would argue, is a perennial one, due to the inherent ambiguity of spirit possession (especially in new apocalyptic movements) and the urgency that polarized classiÀcations lend to the deÀnition of spirits. The appearance, authority, and interactions of this spirit would have owed much to the historical and social circumstances of ekklďsiai in third-century Caesarea: apocalyptic literature that implied the resurgence of biblical prophecy, ecstatic leadership in the New Prophecy movement, rumors of persecution and martyrdom,
8 Cyprian, Ep. 75.10.2–5 in Saint Cyprien: Correspondance (ed. Louis Bayard; 2 vols.; Paris: “Les Belles Lettres,” 1961) 2:296–98. 9 In his description of her performance Firmilian implies that the sacraments were done correctly, not deviantly. The affront lay in their performance by a demon-possessed woman. See G. W. Clarke, The Letters of St. Cyprian of Carthage (4 vols.; Ancient Christian Writers 47; New York: Newman, 1989) 4:267–68 nn. 56–58.
DAVID FRANKFURTER
31
and beliefs in the ekklďsia as site for human/angel interaction.10 All the same, the social dynamics of possession that are discernible in Firmilian’s letter do prepare us to comprehend phenomena of the following centuries that revolve around not congregations, but particular shrines. Thus we shift to mid fourth-century Egypt, where Athanasius of Alexandria was lamenting (370 C.E.) a new practice among Egyptian Christians in the countryside of congregating in tombs that had acquired reputations as sites of martyrs’ relics, for a curious ritual process. “Many people,” notes Athanasius, “who had unclean spirits gain healing in the martyria, claiming that the martyrs’ spirits come upon the demons [WXQF )J)FOEBJNXOJPO] . . . and the demons cry out.” However, he complains, people also “seek to see the demons [TFOBWJQFFVOBVFOEBJNXO],” apparently through possession at these tomb shrines. Then, with the demons manifest in devotees’ bodies, “these people give glory to them and ask them about what will happen [FUPVUFPPVOBVBVX FVKOPVNNPPVFUCFUOBWXQF] . . . they dare to question the unclean spirits!” They assume “the demons are the prophets of the martyrs. But the martyrs did not confess that they would speak through the demons! [FVNFFVFFOEBJNXOJPOKF NQSPGIUITOFONB SUVSPT BMMBOUBNNBSUVSPT)PNPMPHFJBOOOE BJNXOJPO KFFVOBWBKF)JUPPUPV].”11 Although he reports people going to tomb-shrines to experience demons, Athanasius is clearly not describing simply a cult of exorcism, of the expelling of spirits, nor does this seem to be the positive type of spirit possession that we know from the New Prophecy movement of Asia Minor and North Africa. There is clear ambiguity in these Egyptian Christian possession forms. As Athanasius depicts the situation it is demonic spirits that emerge at the shrines, due to the awesome spirits of the martyrs. Once they become manifest, however, the “demons” become oracular voices—even “the prophets of the martyrs”—to which devotees could address their questions. The spirit possession Athanasius observes evidently involved some Áuidity in function—that is, in social utility—between spirits deemed “demonic” and spirits deemed “martyrial.”12 Cf. Tertullian, An. 9.4 (early third century C.E.). On apocalyptic predilections for prophetic performance in second- and third-century C.E. Asia Minor see David Frankfurter, “Early Christian Apocalypticism: Literature and Social World,” in Jewish and Christian Origins of Apocalypticism (ed. John J. Collins; vol. 1 of Encyclopedia of Apocalypticism; 3 vols.; New York: Continuum, 1998) 415–53, esp. 426–30; and in general, Stephen Mitchell, The Rise of the Church (vol. 2 of Anatolia: Land, Men, and Gods in Asia Minor; 2 vols.; Oxford: Clarendon, 1993) 37–51. 11 Athanasius, Festal Letter 42, fr. 15 in L.-Th. Lefort, S. Athanase. Lettres festales et pastorales en copte (CSCO 150, Scriptores Coptici 19; Louvain: Peeters, 1955) 65; translation from David Brakke, “ ‘Outside the Places, Within the Truth’: Athanasius of Alexandria and the Localization of the Holy,” Pilgrimage and Holy Space in Late Antique Egypt (ed. David Frankfurter; RGRW 134; Leiden: Brill, 1998) 479–80. 12 It may be to this situation that Athanasius refers in Vit. Ant. 23.5, where the hermit Antony warns against demons’ pretenses “to prophesy and foretell what is going to happen [QERXIYZIWUEM OEM TVSPIZKIMR XE QIU© L.QIZVEb INVGSZQIRE]” (ed. G. J. M. Bartelink; SC 400; Paris: Éditions du Cerf, 2004) 200. 10
32
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
Less than a century later (mid Àfth century C.E.) the abbot Shenoute of Atripe echoes some of these complaints about the popular relic cult, but he aims his sermon at those illegitimately establishing topoi (places) for relics, in or by churches, where people claim to have seen lights appear. After detailing how people “sleep in the tombs to gain visions and . . . question the dead about the living”—familiar and longstanding incubation practices—Shenoute refers to “other sorts of places—of divination [NNBOWJOF] or of mediumship [FHHBTUSJNVRPT>.” It would seem that the “places” are, again, shrines, while the word eggastrimythos denotes ecstatic speech, such as the medium of Endor provided for Saul in the Bible, but now provided, Shenoute says, by “Christians and clerics (who serve) in the house of God.”13 While in the biblical account the medium of Endor was supposed to have channelled the spirit of a dead Samuel, Christian writers of the second and third centuries debated whether such a voice would have to be intrinsically demonic, and Shenoute would certainly be commenting on the ambiguity of possession by spirits in his time: Are they dead martyrs or demons? Thus spirit possession of some sort appears to have arisen again (“in this time [FCPM)NOJLBJSPT]”), Shenoute says, and in connection with relic veneration and new martyr shrines.14 As we saw possession initially occuring in the social context of the sectarian congregation, so too in late antique Egypt the locus of possession and of the interpretation of spirits could shift between spontaneous activity at actual shrines, such as Athanasius and Shenoute report, and social bodies: in this case, the sociallyembedded clairvoyant powers of charismatic monks. One story from the fourth or Àfth century involves an Egyptian monk near the village of Boushďm in whom “a spirit of divination [QOBOQVRPT], that is [FUF] the demon of falsehood, came to dwell, so that he would tell people about numerous events that were going to happen to them: he would say ‘they will happen,’ and they happened, and he spoke about the waters of the Nile and about many other worldly events that he learned about
13
)NQIFJNQOPVUF does not necessarily mean that such acts take place in the church itself. Shenoute of Atripe, Those Who Work Evil in Œuvres I (ed. Émile Amélineau; Paris: Leroux, 1907) 220. See L.-Th. Lefort, “La chasse aux reliques des martyrs en Égypte au IVe siècle,” La nouvelle Clio 6 (1954) 225–30; and on the shortly post-431 C.E. date, Stephen Emmel, Shenute’s Literary Corpus (Louvain: Peeters, 2004) 649–50, 669–70 (§13.630). FHHBTUSJNVRPT is employed in Lev 19:31 and 1 Sam 28:8 (LXX) for ecstatic mediumship and was a topic of considerable discussion in early Christian exegesis regarding the location of souls and the nature of demonic deception: see K. A. D. Smelik, “The Witch of Endor: 1 Samuel 28 in Rabbinic and Christian Exegesis till 800 A.D.,” VC 33 (1979) 160–79, and Rowan A. Greer and Margaret M. Mitchell, The “Belly-Myther” of Endor: Interpretations of 1 Kingdoms 28 in the Early Church (SBL Writings from the Greco-Roman World 16; Atlanta: Scholars Press, 2007). On incubation practices in early Egyptian Christianity see Leslie S. B. MacCoull, “Duke University Ms. C25: Dreams, Visions, and Incubation in Coptic Egypt,” OLP 22 (1991) 123–32; and David Frankfurter, “Voices, Books, and Dreams: The DiversiÀcation of Divination Media in Late Antique Egypt,” in Mantikď: Studies in Ancient Divination (ed. Sarah Iles Johnston and Peter Struck; RGRW 155; Leiden: Brill, 2005) 233–54. 14
DAVID FRANKFURTER
33
from the spirits.”15 Once again this Coptic author communicates the ambiguity of a spirit, revered by local villagers yet reviled by certain church leaders. This phenomenon was hardly restricted to late antique Egypt, however. The same ambiguity of spirits’ functions—potentially both harmful and clairvoyant—appears in the west as well, in legends associated with the cult of St. Martin in Tours. The late fourth-century legend of Martin’s life describes a time of great public anxiety about imminent barbarian invasion, when Martin gave the order that a man possessed of a demon should be brought before him. He commanded [the demon] to state publicly whether [the news of imminent barbarian attack] was true. [The demon] then confessed that it was accompanied by ten demons who had spread the rumour throughout the population . . . that the barbarians were not planning an attack at all. And so, as soon as the unclean spirit had confessed these things in the middle of the church, the city was freed from the fear and confusion rife at the time.16
Here the possessing spirit provides a helpful service for a town in panic by clarifying the nature of a real crisis: the possibility of imminent invasion. Other places associated with Martin likewise continued to inspire these manifestations even in the sixth century. There is a “man accustomed to utter many words, frequently to speak the language of unknown people, to prophesy future events, and to confess crimes” whose demon is expelled shortly after arriving at Martin’s cell; while another demoniac announces in the middle of the Martin church that the Roman general (and later Frankish “king”) Aegidius had triumphed over enemies due to Martin’s assistance.17 Again, the oracles, albeit demonic in origin, answer questions, reframe misfortunes, and resolve social tensions. The Ànal two examples come again from the eastern empire: Constantinople and its environs. The Àfth-century church historian Sozomen reports (393 C.E.) that a “certain person afÁicted by demons arose in the temple of God [that is, the Theodosian shrine to John the Baptist’s head in the outskirts of Constantinople] and insulted John the Baptist” and then proceeded to give an oracle about the current war: “You conquer me and lay snares for my army,” as if in the voice of the enemy’s genius. “The persons who happened to be on the spot and who 15 Macarius, Hist. Laus. [copt.] in M. Chaîne, “La double recension de l’Histoire Lausiaque dans la version copte,” Revue de l’Orient chrétien 25 (1925/26) 245–48; trans. Tim Vivian, “Coptic Palladiana III: The Life of Macarius of Egypt,” Coptic Church Review 21 (2000) 96–97. Versions of this story are discussed in James E. Goehring, Ascetics, Society, and the Desert: Studies in Early Egyptian Monasticism (Harrisburg, Pa.: Trinity Press International, 1999) 128–30. 16 Sulpicius Severus, v. Mart. 18.1–2, in Early Christian Lives (trans. Carolinne White; London: Penguin, 1998) 150–51. See Jacques Fontaine, Vie de Saint Martin 1 (SC 133; Paris: Éditions du Cerf, 2004) 290–93. 17 Gregory of Tours, De virt. Mart. 1.2 in Scriptores Rerum Merovingicarum (ed. Krusch; Hanover: Hahn, 1969 (1885) 136–37), trans. Raymond Van Dam, Saints and Their Miracles in Late Antique Gaul (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1993) 202. Cf. Sulpicius Severus, V. Martini 17; Gallus 6 (ed. and trans. Jacques Fontaine, SC 510 [Paris: Éditions du Cerf, 2006] 311–13).
34
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
were waiting impatiently to learn some news of the war, were amazed.”18 Such performances were not unusual in early Byzantine Constantinople, it seems, for the seventh-century Miracles of St. Artemios depicts a time when “there were a very large number of possessed [HEMQSRM[DRXEb] in many churches” in the city to whom one might go for oracles. In one story a man robbed of his clothes is advised to head to the St. Panteleemon shrine where “someone [XMRE] was there dispensing information [INTMZWXEWMRHMHSZRXE]” who might reveal the robber. But when he gets near and hears “the cry of the possessed one,” he balks, realizing that “now [he was] forsaking God and approaching demons” to resolve his robbery. Thus demon-possession—here of the afÁicted, residing hopefully in a healing shrine—had gained a perennial civic function, with some possessed becoming local manteis for the desperate.19 In these cases from across the Mediterranean world the possessed individual is not simply cured, the demon expelled, and the holy man or shrine victorious. Rather, the possessed person, in full embodiment of some otherworldly spirit, becomes a valuable mouthpiece for oracles and an instrument of divination. And he notably performs these services—enacts the spirits—in a shrine of some recent vintage. What does this phenomenon signify?
Q Literary and Phenomenological Considerations There is, of course, a literary character to these gnomic pronouncements by unclean spirits, reminiscent of the Gerasene demoniac’s utterance in the gospel of Mark, “My name is Legion, for we are many” (5:9). This literary character certainly informs the dramatic exorcism scenes in the Martin legends. Might such biblical typologies have so determined the many stories of oracular demons that no historicity can be assumed at all—that they were created out of whole cloth? This conclusion would be too extreme, for biblical typology does not in itself negate historicity; and indeed the persistence of the very motif of the prophetic demon in the literature of Christian thaumaturgy would have sanctioned the behavior itself in areas where such texts were read. But even more, the range and consistency of the witnesses under discussion suggest that we are dealing with a type of historical occurrence, not just a literary trope. Athanasius and Shenoute offer fairly direct witnesses to real oracular phenomena at martyria in late fourth- and early Àfth-century Egypt, while even the more legendary sources like the Life of Martin describe “demons” offering oracles that are immediately embedded in historical events and socially relevant.20 The late antique texts thus place demonic utterances in historical context, as if the possessed person were responding to actual situations of political anxiety. They 18
Sozomen, Hist. eccl. 7.24.8–9 (ed. Bidez and Hansen; Berlin, 1960) 338. On the Hebdomos see ibid. 7.21. 19 Miracles of St. Artemios 18 (ed. and trans. Virgil S. Crisafulli and John W. Nesbitt; The Medieval Mediterranean 13; Leiden: Brill, 1997) 114–15. 20 See Jacques Fontaine, Sulpice Sévère. Vie de saint Martin 2 (SC 134; Paris 1968) 853–62.
DAVID FRANKFURTER
35
reÁect, if not particular historical occurrences, a type of possession performance that authors and their audiences knew to exist.21 Assuming a degree of general historicity, then, let us consider the nature of the possessions themselves, and more speciÀcally their labelling as “demonic.” It would seem that for the authors and for their cultures the term daimĿn conveyed both censure, referring possession and mantic phenomena to an ofÀcial demonology, and a fundamental imprecision in the identiÀcation of possessing spirits in late antique Christianity.22 We certainly see this imprecision in the elision of martyrs’ spirits and “demons” in Athanasius’s complaint about possession at tomb-shrines. In a similar vein the fourth-century Cappadocian writer Gregory of Nazianzus celebrates the martyrs “by whom demons are expelled and diseases cured, by whom occur apparitions [INTMJEZRIMEM] and predictions [TVSVVLZWIMb],” a remarkable series of prodigies notable both for their diversity and for their dependence on the bodies of shrine devotees for their performative expression. A single ritual sphere thus serves as theater for both possession and useful prophecy, martyrs’ spirits and “demons.”23 The possession, therefore, is in every case ambiguous: socially beneÀcial, but brought by spirits at best peripheral to the Christian pantheon. Furthermore, as we have seen, the historical phenomenon we are describing involves both semi-spontaneous forms of possession, such as the texts describe among laity at saint-shrines, and a kind of beneÀcial spirit mediumship, an ongoing social role, like that of the prophetess in third-century Caesarea and the monk from the Egyptian village of Boushem. Further cases of this kind of mediumship appear in late antique Christianity: a Christian priest in GaballĿn, for example, whose great “signs and wonders” won him great regional renown—until his powers were reassigned to a demonic archontikon.24 Such individuals gained renown as regional oracles or prophets by virtue of their possession by, or familiarity with, certain spirits. At some point in the period when the hagiographer recounts them, the oracles and their spirits fell afoul of church authorities—unlike, for example, the late fourth-century Egyptian monk John of Lycopolis, whose “gift of prophecy” [TVSJLXIMZEbGEZVMWQE] allowed him to maintain a credible reputation with church and civil authorities for “reveal[ing] things hidden in the future . . . and predict[ing] the rise and fall of the Nile.” He too “used to foretell when some divine threat was going to [occur] and exposed those who were to blame for it.” But despite largely 21 See Raymond Van Dam, Leadership and Community in Late Antique Gaul (Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 1985) 266–68, on the abilities of possessed folk to respond to current socio-political situations; and, more generally, John Eade and Michael J. Sallnow, introduction to Contesting the Sacred: The Anthropology of Christian Pilgrimage (London: Routledge, 1991) 7. 22 DaimĿn loses its originally neutral associations in Christian literature of late antiquity: Lampe, Patristic Greek Lexicon (Oxford: Clarendon, 1961) s.v. 23 Gregory Nazianzus, Or. 4 contra Julianum 69 (PG 35:589). 24 Vita Maximi/Domitii in Histoire des monastères de la Basse-Égypte (ed. Émile Amélineau; Paris: Leroux, 1894) 273; see translation in Tim Vivian, “The Boharic Life of Maximus and Domitius,” Coptic Church Review 26 (2005) 44.
36
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
identical claims and services to those deemed demonic, John’s spirit (or basis of clairvoyant authority) remained legitimate.25 Thus charismatic authority, especially when achieved through the claim or reputation of familiar spirits, tended to be evaluated in conÁicting and probably even oscillating ways. These latter “mediumship” cases in particular show us that the term daimĿn itself did not indicate a distinct form of possession performance but rather served as one possible evaluation of possessing spirits.26 These were spirits whose performance in possession evidently could Àt quite neatly into local needs and styles. And yet, like modern Middle Eastern zar and jinn demons, they were ambiguous enough to be potentially dangerous. They required either mastery or exorcism.27
Q Historical Considerations How do these phenomena Àt into the larger religious situation of the late antique Mediterranean world, whose landscapes were assimilating a newly institutional Christianity and its shrines? First of all, in accounts from places like Tours and Constantinople, spirit possession is explicitly linked to historical uncertainty or, in the cases of Athanasius and Shenoute, to larger conÁicts about the locus of the holy in a Christianizing landscape. It is no surprise that such social anxieties would precipitate a need to see and hear the spirits, to witness their clairvoyance and authority in settling matters of great social and political import. Yet it seems that the actual identity or class of the spirits that appear emerges only through a process of negotiation between possessed performer, audience members, institutional emissaries, and so on. What might begin as a martyr redivivus in one setting might end up as a dangerous archontikon; what might begin as an ancestral or earth spirit 25 Historial monachorum in Aegypto 1.11 in Lives of the Desert Fathers (trans. Norman Russell; London: Mowbray, 1980) 53. See also Augustine, Civ. 5.26, on John’s mantic abilities. Compare the man from Ascalon who had “a spirit of divination [OSF'WJOF],” which is later exorcised as an “unclean spirit.” Vita Maximi/Domitii in Monastères de la Basse-Égypte, 270. On the relationship of desert monks’ clairvoyant powers (and spirits) to oracles see David Frankfurter, Religion in Roman Egypt: Assimilation and Resistance (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1998) 184–93. 26 See Laura Nasrallah, An Ecstasy of Folly: Prophecy and Authority in Early Christianity (HTS 52; Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard Divinity School, 2003), on discourses of evaluating ecstasy in the early Roman period vis-à-vis madness and rationality rather than type of spirit. In placing Pythian oracular possession in theological and natural context Plutarch (Def. orac.) uses both daimĿn and pneuma to classify the possessing spirit, but he does not represent local discourse on spirits. 27 See esp. I. M. Lewis, Ecstatic Religion: A Study of Shamanism and Spirit Possession (2d ed.; London: Routledge, 1989); Pamela Constantinides, “ ‘Ill at Ease and Sick at Heart’: Symbolic Behaviour in a Sudanese Healing Cult,” in Symbols and Sentiments: Cross-Cultural Studies in Symbolism (ed. Ioan Lewis; London: Academic Press, 1977) 61–84; Women’s Medicine: The ZarBori Cult in Africa and Beyond (ed. I. M. Lewis, Ahmed Al-SaÀ, and Sayyid Hurreiz; Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1991); Gerda Sengers, Women and Demons: Cult Healing in Islamic Egypt (Leiden: Brill, 2003); Celia Rothenberg, Spirits of Palestine: Gender, Society, and Stories of the Jinn (Lanham, Md.: Lexington Books, 2004); and Mohammed Maarouf, Jinn Eviction as a Discourse of Power: A Multidisciplinary Approach to Moroccan Magical Beliefs and Practices (Leiden: Brill, 2007).
DAVID FRANKFURTER
37
might end up as a spirit of prophecy with full ecclesiastical sanction.28 And each such process of spirit-deÀnition would likewise culminate in a ritual performance: exorcism for the one, spirit mastery and oracular performance for the second.29 Thus the resolution of uncertainty would be sealed with drama. Secondly, the clustering of these witnesses in the late fourth and Àfth centuries reÁects quite immediately the religious changes occurring in local Christianities of the period. In Egypt, Gaul, and elsewhere a thriving local religious culture had persisted into the Roman period, with diverse shrines, demarcated points in the landscape, varieties of beneÀcial, ambivalent, and hostile spirits, and the ritual traditions to deal with these supernatural beings.30 But, with the decline of traditional cult centers, the development of an autochthonous Christian local piety, and the struggle of an institutional church for hegemony, much attention came to be directed to the locations and powers of holy places as sites that embraced local experience and that situated the new pantheon of Christian “spirits” in the landscape.31 Now, in the late fourth and Àfth centuries, new local religious cultures had to comprehend and mediate the new religious system in locally authentic ways, all in a system presided over by bishops. This brings us to the third historical factor in these cases of spirit possession after the third century: its predominant occurrence in shrines. We see spirits appearing in new, ad hoc tomb shrines in upper Egypt;32 in churches and shrines associated with Martin of Tours;33 and in the new “temple” [RI[Zb] of John the Baptist’s 28 Although I know of no late antique sources that capture this latter transformation (i.e., the ecclesiastical domestication of a traditional oracular spirit), there is sufÀcient evidence of ambiguous local spirits that maintain credibility in local Christian culture and of Christian seers (like John of Lycopolis) whose mantic services replicate those of traditional spirits to posit the likelihood of such cases. Of course, madness itself may serve as an evaluation of spirit possession at any stage, denying any spiritual possession: see Horden, “Responses to Possession,” and Nasrallah, Ecstasy of Folly. 29 Compare Plutarch, Def. orac. 433C. 30 See Frankfurter, Religion in Roman Egypt, 97–144, and Ton Derks, Gods, Temples and Religious Practices: The Transformation of Religious Ideas and Values in Roman Gaul (Amsterdam Archaeological Studies 2; Amsterdam: Amsterdam University Press, 1998). On the geography of the demonic see also Stewart, Demons and the Devil; Anna Plotnikova, “Balkan Demons Protecting Places,” in Christian Demonology and Popular Mythology (ed. Gábor Klaniczay and Éva Pócs; Budapest: Central European University Press, 2005) 213–20; and on antiquity, Horden, “Responses to Possession,” 182–84; and Frankfurter, Evil Incarnate, 13–19. 31 See in general Marcus, The End of Ancient Christianity, 139–55, and Brakke, “ ‘Outside the Places’ ” 32 These martyria were based in tombs, as André Grabar argued in Martyrium. Recherches sur le culte des reliques et l’art chrétien antique (2 vols; Paris: Collège de France, 1946) 1:47–75, 82–84. See Ahmed Fakhry, The Necropolis of El-Bagawat in Kharga Oasis (Cairo: Government Press, 1951); and now, Peter Grossmann, Magdy Saad Salib, and Mohammed Salem Al-Hangury, “Survey of an Early Christian Burial Chapel at Tall Al-Yuhudiyya-Suez,” BSAC 44 (2005) 45–53. 33 On reconstructing sites of devotion to St. Martin of Tours see Van Dam, Leadership and Community, 230–54; May Viellard-Troiekouroff, Les monuments religieux de la Gaule d’après les œuvres de Grégoire de Tours (Paris, 1976) 311–23; and Charles Lelong, Vie et culte de saint Martin. État des questions (Chambray-lès-Tours: Cahiers du Livre et Disque, 1990) 99–117.
38
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
head outside Constantinople (and the church of St. Panteleemon within). These were buildings dedicated to invoking the presence of the saints whose bones lay beneath. The eyes and postures in wall-paintings would signify saintly presence no less than the false-doors inside Egyptian tombs of another era, through which the soul of the deceased was supposed to enter and exit. Visitors were familiar with an iconography that mediated supernatural beings. Sermons and stories, too, not only brought martyrs’ sufferings to life but envisioned their heavenly bliss and promised their eternal contact. Through clouds of incense and the dim light of oil lamps the martyr’s spirit would become tangible to those crowded inside.34 And then, already brimming with the power of these new (if often home-grown) martyrs’ spirits, the martyria came to attract, as Athanasius describes it, the manifestation of other spirits.
Q The Performative Construction of Demons But who were these “other spirits”? There exist a few cases in which the spirits are said to identify themselves—as, say, Jupiter and Mercury in one description of demoniac possession associated with the Martin cult.35 But more generally these “other spirits”—these “demons” peripheral to the now-central Christian pantheon—were not recognized as the “old gods,” speciÀc ancestral spirits come to invade and depart via dramatic exorcisms. The “demons” that emerged at these Àfth- and sixth-century shrines reÁected, I would argue, the incoherent possession forms of a culture conscious of its abandoned gods but utterly invested in the 34 On the ritual world of fourth- and Àfth-century martyria in general see Brown, Cult of the Saints; Hippolyte Delehaye, Les origines du culte des martyrs (Brussells: Société des bollandistes, 1933) 115–31; and Richard M. Price, “The Holy Man and Christianization from the Apocryphal Apostles to St. Stephen of Perm,” The Cult of Saints in Late Antiquity and the Middle Ages: Essays on the Contribution of Peter Brown (ed. James Howard-Johnston and Paul Antony Hayward; Oxford: Clarendon, 1999) 219–24. For Gallic saint-shrines see Van Dam, Leadership and Community, 230–49; and for Egyptian saint-shrines: Arietta Papaconstantinou, Le culte des saints en Égypte des Byzantins aux Abbassides. L’apport des sources papyrologiques et épigraphiques grecques et coptes (Paris: Centre nationale de la recherche scientiÀque [CNRS], 2001). On incense as indicating or cultivating the presence of the martyr-saint’s spirit see Franz Cumont, “Cierges et lampes sur les tombeaux,” in Miscellanea Giovanni Mercati (Studi e testi 125; Vatican City: Biblioteca Apostolica Vaticana 1946) 5:41–47; Béatrice Caseau, “EuĿdia: The Use and Meaning of Fragrance in the Ancient World and Their Christianization (100–900 AD)” (Ph.D. dissertation, Princeton University, 1994) ch. 5; and idem, “Incense and Fragrances: From House to Church,” in Material Culture and Well-Being in Byzantium (400–1453) (ed. M. Grünbart et al.; Vienna: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 2007) 75–92, esp. 85–87; and Susan Ashbrook Harvey, Scenting Salvation: Ancient Christianity and the Olfactory Imagination (Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 2006) 75–90. Archaeological evidence for incense in tomb-shrines is discussed in Fakhry, Necropolis of ElBagawat, 26–27. Cf. Plutarch, Def. orac. 437C, in which IYN[HMZE heralds the presence of the oracular spirit. Wall-paintings in tomb-martyria portrayed martyrs in what would have been understood as their “transÀgured” bodies, much as Roman Egyptian funerary iconography included images of the deceased in his or her “transÀguration body”: see Christina Riggs, The Beautiful Burial in Roman Egypt: Art, Identity, and Funerary Religion (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2005). 35 Sulpicius Severus, Gallus 6.4.
DAVID FRANKFURTER
39
power of the saint. They were fundamentally Christian performances, meant to articulate the power of the saint; but in constructing and Áeshing out the spirits of the periphery they also involved quite local acts of bricolage. That is, they drew from memories and anxieties of the local sphere, and from a folklore combining exotic biblical legends with familiar landscape spirits. Again, we might compare them to modern Middle-Eastern zar and jinn spirits, whose identities with peripheral lands and peoples are likewise constructed in performance and in counterpoint to the central power of sheikh or marabout. Possession allowed people to participate in Christianization, sometimes critiquing the displaced pantheon through mimesis of its spirits, sometimes inventing an antithesis of the new pantheon with some type of chaotic spirit. One might even acclaim the new pantheon, using the peripheral spirits—those rendered marginal and ambiguous through Christianization—as the voice of ancestral tradition itself. For example, one demoniac in Rome proclaimed “the God of St. Callixtus,” while in late fourth-century Nola (Italy) the demoniacs would declare that St. Felix was afÁicting them. Indeed, it seemed here that the demons themselves were announcing “that Christ shines out in the person of his saint—and they prove[d] it by trembling with shaking limbs and wagging heads.”36 By such spectacles local audiences could witness Christ’s (or a saint’s) reception, as it were, by the familiar spirits of neighborhood and village. There is inevitably a ludic, creative element in articulating through possession a shift in pantheons. Of course, there is also a distinct locative aspect to these phenomena, where the place of the martyr or saint becomes the place also of the demonic. For the early Christian laity the demonic was envisioned more in geographical than spiritual terms—as a threat revealed and distributed in landscape features, especially the urban landscape, where a casual visit to the baths or the theatre (obvious demon habitats) might precipitate demonic possession.37 In this worldview the holy topos of the martyr served not only as counterpoint to demonic spaces but also as the very resolution of a polarized landscape: here the demons would emerge and be vanquished. But on another level the new cult centers that Christianity brought to regional cultures had to accommodate the full range of local peoples’ supernatural experiences and potentialities. Just as at Delphi, where (according to Plutarch) an unprepared Pythia might get overtaken by a “mighty and baleful spirit [ENPEZPSYOEM OEOSYD TRIYZQEXSb]” instead of the oracular god,38 so too at the Christian shrines the declaration of Christ and his saints’ immanence through liturgy, paintings, and 36
On the St. Felix cult, see: Paulinus of Nola, Carmen 14.25–33 (The Poems of St. Paulinus of Nola [trans. P. G. Walsh; Ancient Christian Writers 40; New York: Newman Press, 1975] 78), with edition of Andrea Ruggiero, Paolino di Nola. I Carmi (2 vols.; Naples: LER, 1996) 1:222. On the St. Callixtus cult, see: Passio S. Callisti 3: “a temple virgin [or Bacchante apud Mombritius edition] named Juliana was seized by a demon and shouted out, ‘The God of Callixtus is himself the living and true God’ ” (ed. AASS, 440B–C). I am indebted to Kristina Sessa for this reference. 37 See, e.g., Tertullian, Spect. 26; Acta Andreae (Latin) 27. On demons of the landscape in general see Brashear, “Exkurs. Übergänge, Grenzen, Niemandsland.” 38 Plutarch, Def. orac. 438B.
40
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
incense invited the complementary embodiment of other spirits: peripheral spirits, “demons.” The space of the saint became the space of all the spirits, in conÁict and collusion.39 There was obviously an element of spectacle in the construction of demons, for people went out to the shrines in order to experience the new pantheon and its powers through dramatic possessions; and naturally they expected some consequences of the demons’ appearance, whether exorcisms, oracles, or simply drama. Jerome describes his friend Paula’s experience in a late fourth-century saint’s shrine in Palestine, among “men howling like wolves, baying like dogs, roaring like lions, hissing like serpents, and bellowing like bulls”—a veritable theater of demoniac possession.40 Paulinus of Nola marvels at a demoniac who hangs upside-down from the balustrade next to St. Felix’s tomb, his robe miraculously staying up to cover his genitals.41 A man visiting St. Artemios’s shrine in Constantinople for a testicular condition turns out also to have an “evil spirit,” leading him to hang suspended before the icon of Artemios “as though his hands were tied by chains, hovering one cubit above the Áoor, and yelling loudly, so that all [those supplicants likewise incubating in the shrine] were astonished by the sight and were cowed by fear.”42 Such performances served as the authenticating spectacles of shrines, initiated through the centralizing experience of the shrine itself. Finally, behind these performative and architectural contexts for the deÀnition of these peripheral spirits, we must recognize the very agency of the local milieu in appropriating the shrine—often an ofÀcial structure—as the place of the spirits and declaring it to be the site for possession or the resolution of possession, with or without the systematic encouragement of bishops. The spirits at the shrine of St. Felix in Nola do not simply release their victims but amazingly seem to prolong their possessions. While Paulinus attributes this phenomenon to the saint’s effort to expiate more fully the victims’ sins, we may perceive some popular agency in maintaining the drama, not simply acquiescing to the power of Felix.43 Whether martyrs’ bones or John the Baptist’s head, St. Martin’s body or patriarchs’ remains, it was the possession of the laity and its experts, even more than the reading of martyrological passions, that served to articulate the praesentia and potentia of the relics inside. 39
Peregrine Horden notes that, in early Byzantine hagiographical materials, most supplicants to shrines or holy men seeking healing from demonic possession only manifest the demons when they get to the shrines or encounter the holy man (“Responses to Possession,” 178). Note that zar possession often (although not always) takes place at saint-shrines in modern Egypt: see Hani Fakhouri, “The Zar Cult in an Egyptian Village,” Anthropological Quarterly 41 (1968) 49–56; and Richard Natvig, “Some Notes on the History of the Zar Cult in Egypt,” in Women’s Medicine, 183–84. 40 Jerome, Ep. 108.13 = PL 22:889, trans. Philip Schaff, NPNF 2d series, 6:201. See Brown, The Cult of the Saints, 106–12. 41 Paulinus of Nola, Carmen 23.82–95, ed. Ruggiero, I carmi 2:98–100, tr. Walsh, Poems, 212. 42 Miracles of St. Artemios 6, ed./tr. Crisafulli/Nesbitt, Miracles of St. Artemios, 88–89. 43 Paulinus of Nola, Carmen 23.48–54, ed. Ruggiero, I carmi 2:96, tr. Walsh, Poems, 210–11.
DAVID FRANKFURTER
41
The focus in this paper on local audiences and pilgrims as principal agents in the representation of demons (whether oracular, heathen, or animal-like) obviously sets aside that central Àgure in early Christian literature, the exorcist. It is the exorcist who is typically credited with the authority to govern lay possession. Literature of the Roman period, from Luke-Acts to Philostratus, tends to focus on this Àgure as the essential dramatic counterpoint to the demonic. Through his technical ability to identify and subdue chaotic spirits, or simply through his representation of Christian power, the exorcist becomes both ritual expert and hero, and the literature depicts the possessed as acting largely in aggressive, then passive, counterpoint.44 Christian ritual manuals from the third, fourth, and later centuries outline such exorcisms in practical terms, yet the late antique materials discussed here ignore or diminish the role of exorcists in actually triggering demonic displays in others.45 Instead, they depict the forms of the possession state as initiated through the mere presence of holy men or saintly relics. It is possible that scholars have put too much historical emphasis on the roles of exorcists as instigators of possession states—that instead we should regard them as shapers of demonic possession, authorities in the deÀnition of spirits that laypeople initially construct themselves.
Q Towards a New Framework for the Christianization of the Mediterranean World The late antique spirit-possession phenomena described in this paper would not have required prior traditions of beneÀcial spirit possession, like shamanism, ecstatic oracles, or possession “cults.” Nor did they necessarily involve the resurgence of prior religious forms, as many have viewed (for example) New Prophecy in the context of Phrygian cults.46 To be sure, literature of the Roman period is rife with cases of individuals possessed by “spirits,” “holy spirits,” “pythonic spirits,” and sometimes “gods” who gained prestige as prophetic oracles.47 There were certainly areas of the ancient Mediterranean world that viewed the embodiment and mantic 44 See, e.g., Mark 1:23–28; 5:1–13; 9:17–29; Acts 19:13–17; Justin, 2 Apol. 6; Acts of Thomas 42–50, 62–81; Acta Andreae (Coptic) 10; (Latin) 5, 17, 27, with Jan N. Bremmer, “Man, Magic, and Martyrdom in the Acts of Andrew,” The Apocryphal Acts of Andrew (ed. Jan N. Bremmer; Leuven: Peeters, 2000) 24–32. See also Lucian, Philopseudes 16; Philostratus, v. Apollonii 3.38; 4.10. See in general Campbell Bonner, “The Technique of Exorcism,” HTR 36 (1943) 39–49. 45 For examples of Christian exorcistic spells see PGM 4.86–87, 1227–64, 2007–86; 36.275–88; 94.17; 114.1–14. Some form of the Testament of Solomon would also have circulated as a basis for exorcistic and apotropaic rituals by the fourth century: see Todd E. Klutz, Rewriting the Testament of Solomon: Tradition, ConÁict, and Identity in a Late Antique Pseudepigraphon (Library of Second Temple Studies 53; London: T&T Clark, 2005), and the important new study of manuscript diversiÀcation, Sarah L. Schwarz, “Reconsidering the Testament of Solomon,” Journal for the Study of the Pseudepigrapha 16 (2007) 203–37. 46 E.g., Vera-Elisabeth Hirschmann, Horrenda Secta. Untersuchungen zum frühchristlichen Montanismus und seinen Verbindungen zur paganen Religion Phrygiens (Stuttgart: Steiner, 2005). 47 E.g., Acts 16:16–18; Lucian, Alexander, 43–44; Origen, Cels. 7.9; Eusebius 5.16.7–9.
42
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
voice of an ancestral spirit as an essential role in society. There may well have been traditions of ecstatic mediumship in the regions of these saints’ shrines; but the approach in this article to the upsurge of demons in shrines does not depend on it.48 Rather, spirit possession in late antiquity was an historical epiphenomenon of the process of Christianization itself, involving three critical historical developments: Àrst, the increasing hegemony of a new, totalist pantheon that, second, polarized ancestral spirits as liminal and chaotic, and that, third, was “realized” in the landscape through the Àxity of particular places as the loci of spirits and the manifestation of spirits. In this Ànal section, these stages of Christianization will be explained in more detail, in light of both the late antique materials introduced above and current anthropological work on “conversion” and spirit possession. Let us begin with the supernatural world in advance of Christianization. What used to be called “paganism,” but which is better described as (Egyptian, Gallic, or other) local religion, involved perpetual negotiation with a range of ancestral and landscape spirits, as well as more well-known gods. A gold lamella from Romania adjures the “daimĿn menacing here” to go and instead(!) afÁict Julia Cyrilla; while a Sicilian Jew needs an elaborate amulet to protect him from the local Artemis.49 In Roman Egypt alone we Ànd one letter extolling “our ancestral gods [who] continually assist us, granting us health and safety” and another lamenting how “one of the gods sent [my daughter’s illness] in malice, and likewise let him remove it!”50 Here too, apotropaic gods like Bes, Toutou, and Horus stood against a range of chaotic and capricious beings, some of which we Ànd listed in magical and mortuary texts.51 For a woman of the Àrst century it was a local Osiris to whom one should address a complaint about a husband’s sexual reticence.52 Negotiating among these gods and spirits involved family and local traditions, individual selfdetermination, and the appeal to temples and ritual experts for aid. By what god are my children stricken? How can I assure my ancestor’s continued favor on my family? To whom should I place my vows for a successful trip to Alexandria? It is
48 On evidence for traditions of spirit possession in Pharaonic Egypt see Yvan Koenig, Magie et magiciens dans l’Égypte ancienne (Paris: Pygmalion, 1994), 217–18; and Philippe Derchain, “Possession, transe et exorcisme: Les oubliés de l’Égyptologie,” Göttinger Miszellen 219 (2008) 9–18. 49 Roy Kotansky, Greek Magical Amulets (P.Col. 22; Opladen: Westdeutscher Verlag, 1994) #24 (second century C.E.), #33 (third/fourth century C.E.). Number twenty-four was found in a workshop (idem, 96) but was probably intended to be deposited where the demon was imminens rather than left under Julia’s pillow (100). 50 Respectively, P.Oxy 6.935 (third century C.E.); P.Hermopolis 2 (fourth century C.E.). 51 See Frankfurter, Religion in Roman Egypt, 111–31. 52 Helmut Satzinger, “The Old Coptic Schmidt Papyrus,” JARCE 12 (1975) 37–50, republished in Religions of Late Antiquity in Practice (ed. Richard Valantasis; Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2000) 230–31, reÁecting a traditional Egyptian sense that ancestors mediate inevitably in domestic affairs.
DAVID FRANKFURTER
43
this kind of culture of religious agency and the negotiation of spirits that we must imagine encountering Christianity.53 Now, any new religious ideology brought into this kind of local culture—by religious experts or holy men, for example—will propose and often bring about a reorganization of pantheon and cosmology as well as the classiÀcation and recognition of supernatural forces. Which spirits are beneÀcial, which harmful? By what ritual means are people truly protected, and which rituals amount to sorcery? This is a pattern repeatedly observable in ethnographic studies of religious conversion, but it especially covers the radically totalist Christianity of the fourth century, which made a profession of discerning and opposing the demonic.54 This reorganization often simply marginalized spirits associated with the landscape, ancestors, or divination, while the new transcendent spirits were centralized.55 Occasionally in history this marginalization has become more extreme, turning into a process of polarization in which missionaries, prophets, and religious reformers render ambiguous spirits (daimones, jinn, even orishas and loas in Afro-Caribbean cultures) as utterly and actively evil, to be shunned and exorcised for the sake of the central God. While exorcisms might eventually allow more innovative, even
53 The extent and diversity of spirits in the Egyptian Christian landscape alone is well-documented: see Sydney Aufrère, “L’Égypte traditionnelle, ses démons vus par les premiers chrétiens,” Études Coptes V (ed. Maggy Rassart-Debergh; Cahiers de la Bibliothèque copte 10; Paris: Peeters, 1998) 63–92; See also Frankfurter, “Syncretism and the Holy Man in Late Antique Egypt,” JECS 11, 3 (2003) 461–64. Beyond Egypt, see (e.g.) Lisa M. Bitel, Isle of the Saints: Monastic Settlement and Christian Community in Early Ireland (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1990) 42–48, and Ken Dowden, European Paganism: The Realities of Cult from Antiquity to the Middle Ages (New York: Routledge, 2000) 25–148. 54 On holy men as instruments of Christianization, see Peter Brown, “The Rise and Function of the Holy Man in Late Antiquity” Society and the Holy in Late Antiquity (London: Faber & Faber, 1982) 103–52, and Authority and the Sacred: Aspects of the Christianisation of the Roman World (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995); as well as David Frankfurter, “Syncretism and the Holy Man,” 339–85. On Christianity’s radical totalism see J. B. Rives, “Christian Expansion and Christian Ideology,” The Spread of Christianity in the First Four Centuries: Essays in Explanation (ed. William V. Harris; Leiden: Brill, 2005) 15–41. On the importance of exorcism see MacMullen, Christianizing the Roman Empire, 21–29; and Eric Sorensen, Possession and Exorcism in the New Testament and Early Christianity (WUNT 157; Tübingen: Mohr/Siebeck 2002). On the reorganization of pantheon and cosmology more generally see Robin Horton, “African Conversion,” Africa 41 (1971) 85–108; Birgit Meyer, “‘If You Are a Devil, You Are a Witch and, If You Are a Witch, You Are a Devil’: The Integration of ‘Pagan’ Ideas into the Conceptual Universe of Ewe Christians in Southeastern Ghana,” Journal of Religion in Africa 22 (1992) 98–132; Terence Ranger, “The Local and the Global in Southern African Religious History,” Conversion to Christianity: Historical and Anthropological Perspectives on a Great Transformation (ed. Robert W. Hefner; Berkeley: University of California Press, 1993) 65–98. 55 Cf. Lewis, Ecstatic Religion, 86–87, with J. Waardenburg, “Changes of Belief in Spiritual Beings, Prophethood, and the Rise of Islam,” Struggles of Gods: Papers of the Groningen Work Group for the Study of the History of Religions (ed. Hans G. Kippenberg; Religion and Reason 31; Berlin: Mouton, 1984) 260–90.
44
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
helpful performances by these evil spirits, their initial experience among groups unprepared for the “domestication” of such spirits may be terror.56 The possession materials in this article demonstrate above all that, in receiving this reorganized or polarized Christian pantheon, people in local communities were not passively acquiescent. Instead, they actively engaged in the mimesis and articulation of the new conÀguration of spirits through ritual performance and possession. This is the crucial element of agency in the religious transformation of the local sphere. Rather than depending on missionaries and prophets, it is quite often laity themselves who demonstrate the new spirits in action, the old spirits in submission or resurgence, or combinations of both—an overall dramaturgy of religious transformation, Christ’s victory, and often the continued relevance and potency of ancestral spirits. Another aspect of this local dramaturgy is the opening up of new social roles: for possession specialists, like some Egyptian holy men, and for nonspecialists, whose possession often took the form of afÁiction. But the late antique materials show that possession is also a process. As the letter of Firmilian of Caesarea shows most vividly, initial possession states, especially among nonspecialists, have to be shaped and deÀned so that people recognize the possessing spirit as a “demon” rather than a “god,” or a “holy spirit” rather than an angel. But how do people distinguish the demonic from the holy in possession? While efforts to establish hard-and-fast rules for discerning spirits have considerable antiquity, the recognition of demons and holy spirits in fact has always involved a process of negotiation—sometimes over years—between the possessed person, the community, and (often) institutional experts.57 Out of that process emerges an established role for the beneÀcial spirit or else the dramatic exorcism of a demon—or in many historical cases the Àrst followed by the second.58 Numerous accounts of 56 This process is particularly evident in Pentecostal churches’ development in cultures with more complex cosmologies, often under Catholic aegis. See, e.g., John Burdick, Looking for God in Brazil: The Progressive Catholic Church in Urban Brazil’s Religious Arena (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1993) 47–67; with Patricia Birman and Marcia Pereira Leite, “Whatever Happened to What Used to be the Largest Catholic Country in the World?” Daedalus 129 (2000) 273–74; Lionel Caplan, “The Popular Culture of Evil in Urban South India,” The Anthropology of Evil (ed. David Parkin; Cambridge: Blackwell, 1985) 110–27; and Birgit Meyer, “Beyond Syncretism: Translation and Diabolization in the Appropriation of Protestantism in Africa,” Syncretism/AntiSyncretism: The Politics of Religious Synthesis (ed. Charles Stewart and Rosalind Shaw; New York: Routledge, 1994) 45–68, and Translating the Devil: Religion and Modernity among the Ewe in Ghana (Trenton: Africa World Press, 1999); with Dulue Mbachu, “Christianity vs. the Old Gods in Nigeria,” (Associated Press, 4 Sept. 2007). On the “domestication” or familiarization of demonic spirits in Pentecostal exorcism see Stephen Hunt, “Managing the Demonic: Some Aspects of the Neo-Pentecostal Deliverance Ministry,” Journal of Contemporary Religion 13 (1998) 215–30. 57 Ancient rules for the discernment of spirits: Deut 18; Did 11. 58 This point is illustrated in D. P. Walker, Unclean Spirits: Possession and Exorcism in France and England in the Late Sixteenth and Early Seventeenth Centuries (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1981), esp. 21–22, 31–32, 52–56; and Michel de Certeau, The Possession at Loudun (trans M. Smith; Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1996), but its fullest theoretical statement appears in Caciola, Discerning Spirits, and Moshe Sluhovsky, Believe Not Every Spirit:
DAVID FRANKFURTER
45
spirit possession in early Christian literature show the debates involved in evaluating and labelling the spirits themselves over time—especially when those spirits (and their bearers) had gained some regional cachet before others pronounced them false or demonic.59 In the stories of the spirit-bearing monks mentioned above, possession led to credible service as a master of spirits, and it was only later ecclesiastical opponents who pronounced their spirits “demons.” This process of negotiation does not end if a spirit is pronounced—and then popularly regarded as—a “demon.” Rather, this recognition simply ushers in a whole new set of questions for audience and experts alike. Are demons simply to be expelled, or should they Àrst “perform” their evil, their allegiance to Satan, their afÀliation with heathen cult, or their erotic or violent natures? Perhaps the performance of demonic characters comes to serve as a regular shrine spectacle, as we saw at Nola and Tours. In one notable modern case young Sinhalese women journey to the Catholic shrine in Kudagama and there manifest demons to the fascination of the crowds: demons named after Hindu gods, who put the girls through vividly erotic performances.60 The persistent manifestation of demons at shrines thus can maintain the vitality of the enchanted landscape. It may not be vital in the old way, where tree- and house-spirits had their names, habitats, and modes of supplication, but even as evil demons, devils, and opponents of Christ, their acknowledgment in ritual and possession demonstrates to the community that a spirit world remains. We can learn from the many ethnographic studies of the Christian demonization of local spirits that the articulation of the demonic in ritual offers a real reassurance in the tangibility of spirits, even if they are only to be dominated and bound by the authority of a St. Martin, St. Antony, or St. Sissinios.61 If contemporary jinn and zar rituals can again shed light on these phenomena, the ranks of demonized spirits can still play a role in local culture, even lending themselves to healing and divination rites unattributable to the transcendent spirits of the central pantheon—to Christ or Allah. Indeed, their penetration of the lives of villagers often involves a moral dimension: popular values are afÀrmed through interaction with demonic spirits.62 Possession, Mysticism, and Discernment in Early Modern Catholicism (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2007). 59 Acts 16:16; Lucian, Alexander, 43–44; Origen, Cels. 7.9; Anonymous source on New Prophecy apud Eusebius, Hist. eccl. 5.16.7–9. 60 See R. L. Stirrat, Power and Religiosity in a Post-Colonial Setting: Sinhala Catholics in Contemporary Sri Lanka (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992) 78–98. In general, see Lewis, Ecstatic Religion, 86–87, 92–96. 61 The point is made clearly for early modern Latin America by Fernando Cervantes, The Devil in the New World: The Impact of Diabolism in New Spain (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1994), and for modern Christian Ghana by Meyer, Translating the Devil. In neither case was possession (evidently) involved in the demonization/preservation of local spirits; ideology, iconography, and (in Mexico) masquing were apparently enough. 62 On the utility of demonized spirits in post-conversion cultures see Waardenburg, “Changes of Belief in Spiritual Beings,” 282–86; Lewis, Ecstatic Religion, 116–19; Caciola, Discerning Spirits,
46
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
Q Conclusion These texts show us that, even as cultures embraced Christianity, the supernatural landscapes of Mediterranean people and the ancestral spirits that permeated those landscapes persisted even through late antiquity. The spirits remained relevant, whether manifest as beneÀcial oracles or as “demons”—chaotic spirits that afÁicted from the margins, causing one couple’s divorce, appearing like a headless dog to another, or lurking under the roof beams of a house.63 The category “demon,” that is, so constantly reasserted in Christian texts and sermons, served to maintain a broader supernatural pantheon and even, through possession, the actual presence of ancestral spirits and their various functions. These were not free-Áoating phenomena, however, for the saint’s shrine lay at the historical and phenomenological center of these dynamics. In the fourth and Àfth centuries it was this new locus that provided tangibility and abode for those potent new spirits, the martyrs. Far more than liturgy, they were the axes of Christianity’s power in an evolving supernatural landscape. Whether these buildings were initiated at the behest of popular enthusiasm, as Athanasius and Shenoute suggest, or sponsored by ecclesiastical forces, like the St. Martin cult, they became theatres for the manifestation of spirits, the articulation of spirits, and the evacuation of spirits. Thus the spirits were not only preserved dramatically, even terrifyingly; they were also re-placed—from the periphery to the center, from the village to the regional shrine, from the theatre to the church, and from the wilderness to the body—shifts that in many ways continued perennial swings in the religious experience of ancient Mediterranean communities.
72–76; and Stewart, Demons and the Devil. 63 Respectively, P. London 5.1713; Ancient Christian Magic (ed. Marvin Meyer and Richard Smith; San Francisco: Harper, 1994), #20 (= PGM P10) and #24 (= PGM P15b), all ca. sixth century C.E.
A New Fragment of Athanasius’s Thirty-Ninth Festal Letter: Heresy, Apocrypha, and the Canon* David Brakke Indiana University
Athanasius of Alexandria’s thirty-ninth Festal Letter remains one of the most signiÀcant documents in the history of the Christian Bible. Athanasius wrote the letter, which contains the Àrst extant list of precisely the twenty-seven books of the current New Testament canon, in 367 C.E., during the Ànal decade of his life. Like many of his annual Easter letters, the thirty-ninth was fairly long, but only a small portion of the text survives in Greek.1 The Greek excerpt contains Athanasius’s lists of the books of the Old and New Testaments, which he calls “canonized,” and a list of a few additional books, like the Shepherd of Hermas, which he says are not canonized, but are useful in the instruction of catechumens. Most studies of the formation of the Christian canon, including very recent ones, examine only this Greek fragment and so discuss only the contents of the lists. But already in the late-nineteenth-century fragments of the much more extensive Coptic translation had been published, and a few scholars, such as Carl Schmidt and Theodor Zahn, used them to write penetrating studies of the letter.2 In 1955 Lefort published all * As I note below, the text and translation that I present here owe much to Stephen Emmel and Gregor Wurst, with whom I Àrst read the new fragment in a seminar at the University of Münster several years ago, in addition to discussing several problems with Professor Emmel in Münster more recently. The Alexander von Humboldt-Stiftung supported both of my visits to Münster. I presented an earlier version of this paper to the annual meeting of the North American Patristics Society; the questions and criticisms of the colleagues there, as well as those of the anonymous reviewer, helped me to clarify my points. I am grateful to these people and institutions. 1 Périclès-Pierre Joannou, Fonti. Discipline générale antique (IVe–IXe s.) (2 vols.; Rome: Grottaferrata, 1963) 2:71–76. 2 Carl Schmidt, “Der Osterfestbrief des Athanasius vom J. 367,” in Nachrichten von der Königl. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen, Philologisch-historische Klasse aus dem Jahre
HTR 103:1 (2010) 47–66
48
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
the then-known Coptic fragments in his book of Coptic Athanasiana, and then in 1984 Coquin published another long fragment.3 These served as the basis for my 1995 translation and my 1994 article in this journal on the social context of canon formation in fourth-century Egypt.4 Since that time, however, another new fragment of the Coptic text has been discovered. This paper introduces the new fragment to Anglophone scholars, discusses some problems with its text and translation, assesses how it may affect our understanding of the context and purpose of the letter as a whole, and presents an English translation of all the known text. When I read the letter in the mid 1990s, I argued that Athanasius’s promotion of a biblical canon supported a parish-based, episcopally-centered spirituality in opposition to other forms of Christian authority, namely, the teacher and the martyr. I still think that this is the case, but the new fragment does suggest that I underestimated the speciÀcally anti-heretical intent of the letter and of Athanasius’s canon. That is, Athanasius promoted a biblical canon not only—as I argued earlier—to support one form of Christian piety, social formation, and authority in opposition to others, but also to refute the speciÀc teachings of persons and groups that he deemed “impious” and “heretics.”
Q The New Fragment: Text, Translation, and Contents The new fragment is preserved in the A. S. Pushkin State Fine Arts Museum in Moscow and was published by Alla Elanskaya in 1994.5 But Elanskaya did not recognize what her tenth- or eleventh-century leaf of Sahidic Coptic really was, and instead called it “part of a sermon against the Manichaeans.” In 2001 Enzo Lucchesi identiÀed it as a part of Athanasius’s letter, and he published a French translation of it.6 Alberto Camplani therefore could include it in his outstanding Italian translation of and commentary on the Festal Letters, published in 2003. Camplani’s book is now the starting point for anyone who studies the Festal
1898 (Göttingen: Horstmann, 1898) 167–203; idem, “Ein neues Fragment des Osterfestbriefes des Athanasius vom Jahre 367,” in Nachrichten von der Königl. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen, Philologisch-historische Klasse aus dem Jahre 1901 (Göttingen: Horstmann, 1902) 326–48; Theodor Zahn, Athanasius und der Bibelkanon (Leipzig: Deichert, 1901) 1–36; idem, Grundriss der Geschichte des neutestamentlichen Kanons (Leipzig: Deichert, 1901) 58–60. 3 Louis-Theophile Lefort, S. Athanase. Lettres festales et pastorales en copte (CSCO 150; Leuven: Durbecq, 1955) 16–22, 58–62; René-Georges Coquin, “Les lettres festales d’Athanase (CPG 2102). Un nouveau complément: Le manuscrit IFAO, copte 25,” OLP 15 (1984) 133–58. 4 David Brakke, Athanasius and the Politics of Asceticism (Oxford Early Christian Studies; Oxford: Clarendon, 1995) 326–32; idem, “Canon Formation and Social ConÁict in Fourth-Century Egypt: Athanasius of Alexandria’s Thirty-Ninth Festal Letter,” HTR 87 (1994) 395–419. 5 Alla I. Elanskaya, The Literary Coptic Manuscripts in the A. S. Pushkin State Fine Arts Museum in Moscow (Supplements to VC 18; Leiden: Brill, 1994) 379–80. 6 Enzo Lucchesi, “Un nouveau complément aux Lettres festales d’Athanase,” AnBoll 119 (2001) 255–60.
DAVID BRAKKE
49
Letters.7 In 2005 Gabriella Aragione translated the complete known text of Festal Letter 39 into French.8 The Moscow fragment presents some textual and translation problems. The Coptic translation of our letter survives fragmentarily in two medieval manuscripts from the White Monastery, now designated MONB.AS and MONB.AT, which Lefort called “Codex B” and “Codex C” respectively. These manuscripts contained collections of Athanasius’s Festal Letters; because their contents parallel the Syriac translations of the letters (where they are extant) and the surviving Greek citations, there can be no doubt that they represent ancient translations of the genuine Festal Letters. Our fragment belongs to MONB.AT, or Lefort’s Codex C, and Àlls a lacuna precisely.9 Unfortunately, the original scribe did not do a great job: he had to do a lot of erasing, and he left out some letters. Moreover, the leaf appears to be poorly preserved. Short of going to Moscow or acquiring digital photographs, the best that one can do is examine the plates that Elanskaya helpfully included in her book.10 In my translation I have presented Elanskaya’s Coptic text, with some revisions, and numbered the lines for reference. The incomplete opening sentence of the fragment concludes Athanasius’s argument in paragraphs 23–24 that, even if the so-called “apocryphal books” contain some useful teachings, there is no need for any Christian to consult them because the entire Christian faith can be found in the canonized Scriptures. He explains that all the central doctrines, including the incarnation of the Word, the resurrection of the dead, and the Ànal judgment, can be found in the Bible. He turns, then, to argue—in paragraph 25—that passages from the Bible expose the impious or heretical character of certain deviant teachers and groups, namely, the Manichaeans, Marcion, the Montanists (“the people in Phrygia”), the Arians, and the Melitians (“parasites” of the Arians). The references to the Montanists as “Phrygians” and to the Melitians as “parasites” of the Arians are characteristic of Athanasius.11 Still, this type of brief catalogue of heresies is not common in Athanasius’s works; the closest parallels may be in the Life of Antony, where Antony warns against the Melitians, the Manichaeans, and the Arians, and in the Orations against the Arians, where Manichaeans, “Phrygians,” and other heretics 7 Alberto Camplani, Atanasio di Alessandria. Lettere festali; Anonimo. Indice delle lettere festali (Milan: Paoline, 2003) 498–518. 8 Gabriella Aragione, “La Lettre festale 39 d’Athanase. Présentation et traduction de la version copte et de l’extrait grec,” in Le canon du Nouveau Testament. Regards nouveaux sur l’histoire de sa formation (ed. Gabriella Aragione, Eric Junod, and Enrico Norelli; Le Monde de la Bible 54; Geneva: Labor et Fides, 2005) 198–219. 9 For a complete discussion of the transmitted text of the Festal Letters, see Camplani, Atanasio di Alessandria, 595–602; on our letter, see 503. Aragione provides a helpful summary table in “La Lettre festale 39,” 202. 10 Elanskaya, Literary Coptic Manuscripts, plates CXLI–II. 11 Phrygians or Cataphrygians: Athanasius, Orationes contra Arianos 1.3 and 2.43; 3.47; idem, De synodis 13. Meletians as “parasites”: Athanasius, Epistulae festales 41, in Lefort, Lettres festales, 62.
50
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
appear together in a couple of dense passages.12 These other passages do not, however, include brief descriptions of each heresy’s distinct false teaching as the new fragment does. It is interesting that Athanasius appears to consider the status of the Creator-God to be the distinctive impiety of the Manichaeans. The last portion of the Moscow fragment, paragraph 26, conÀrms my earlier guess that Egyptian Christians cited 1 Corinthians 2:9—“What no eye has seen, nor ear heard, nor the human heart conceived”—in support of their use of apocryphal books.13 We can now see a special edge to Athanasius’s earlier question about Jesus the true Teacher: “Who can convince those whom he teaches about ‘things that eye has not seen nor ear heard nor have arisen upon the human heart,’ except he who alone knows the Father and has established for us the way to enter the kingdom of heaven?”14 Most likely both Athanasius and his opponents knew a version of the Ascension of Isaiah, in which the words that Paul cites appear. The use of the masculine singular pronoun in lines 42 and 48 to refer to the person who makes this argument is strange. Who is this “he”? Lucchesi wonders whether it might refer to Marcion, the only individual in the preceding passage, and Camplani suggests that it might be “a generic heretic.”15 I believe Camplani has the better idea, but that it is likely the singular here is a mistake and that there should be a plural: “they have said” and “I will answer them.” The reference to “contentious persons” in line 49 may support this hypothesis, and in the next paragraph Athanasius in fact refers to “the heretics” as claiming that Paul cited apocryphal books. How does Athanasius respond to the citation of 1 Corinthians 2:9 in support of apocryphal books? Subsequently, in paragraph 27, a previously known section of the letter, Athanasius argues that heretics composed the apocryphal books recently and placed these words of Paul in one of their texts in order to make their work appear to be older than Paul. Here in lines 50–54, the awkward Coptic most likely does a poor job of translating the Greek, but Athanasius’s point seems clear enough. He has to deal with Paul’s citation as somehow biblical because Paul introduces it with the phrase “as it is written.” So Athanasius argues that Paul does not support or commend (WYRMWXEZREM) his arguments with simply any words; rather, he does so with words from the Scriptures.16 According to Athanasius, Paul, however, does not always quote the relevant biblical text exactly, but instead paraphrases, giving its meaning (RSYDb). And in this case Athanasius claims that Paul has paraphrased a portion of Isaiah 29, which refers to blind and deaf people and people without any hope.
12
Athanasius, Vita Antonii 68; idem, Orationes contra Arianos 1.3 and 2.43. Brakke, “Canon Formation and Social ConÁict,” 413. 14 Paragraph 9. 15 Lucchesi, “Un nouveau complément,” 259; Camplani, Atanasio di Alessandria, 515 n. 34. 16 For similar uses of WYRMWXEZREM as “commend” or “support,” see Athanasius, Epistula ad episcopos Aegpyti et Libyae 9, and this letter 39.16. 13
DAVID BRAKKE
51
Q Implications for the Interpretation of the Letter While the beginning and end of the fragment merely extend or supplement what we already knew of Athanasius’s argument, the brief catalogue of heresies with the biblical passages that refute them in its central section is genuinely new, and in the view of Alberto Camplani, it undermines the way in which I interpreted the letter back in 1994. In what follows I review my earlier position and then turn to the objections to it and the relevance of the Moscow fragment. In the letter as we now know it, including the new fragment, Athanasius makes a variety of arguments against the use of non-canonical books, but he devotes considerable attention to two particular themes. The Àrst is the irrelevance or even danger of human teachers. The Word of God is the only true Teacher—after all, he is Truth itself, and he never needed anyone to teach him. The Word’s truth is to be found completely and plainly in the Scriptures, and so there is no need to seek it in other books or from other teachers. The second theme is that no “apocryphal” books really come from Isaiah, Moses, Enoch, or any other authoritative ancient Àgure. They all published their teaching openly, and any “apocryphal” books attributed to them must be recent inventions of heretics. He accuses the Melitians speciÀcally of composing and promoting the use of apocryphal books. My reading contextualized these two themes by associating them with two forms of Christian spirituality, authority, and social organization that were traditional in Egyptian Christianity, but which Athanasius opposed. The Àrst, following Rowan Williams, I called academic Christianity, a tradition of study under the guidance of a learned and inspired teacher, which I traced back to Alexandrians such as Basilides, Clement, Valentinus, and Origen and saw exempliÀed by Arius in the fourth century.17 In an earlier Festal Letter, written in 352, Athanasius had similarly contrasted “the words of the saints” and “the fancies of human invention”; only the New Testament authors transmit the teachings of the Word “without alteration,” and thus “of these the Word wants us to be disciples, and they should be our teachers, and it is necessary for us to obey only them.”18 The second was an apocalyptically oriented mode of piety, found in the traditions that David Frankfurter studied in his book on the Apocalypse of Elijah and which I saw continuing into the fourth century in the cult of the martyrs and the use of so-called apocryphal books, both taken up most enthusiastically by the Meletians.19 In contrast to these, Athanasius offered an episcopally-centered piety, which valued adherence to the clergy and its sacraments and found revealed truth not through study under a learned teacher, 17 See Rowan Williams, Arius: Heresy and Tradition (London: Darton, Longman, & Todd, 1987) 82–91. 18 Epistulae festales 2.7 (which is actually no. 24, written in 352 C.E.), in The Festal Letters of Athansius: Discovered in an Ancient Syriac Version (ed. William Cureton; London: Society for the Publication of Oriental Texts, 1848) 24–25. 19 See David Frankfurter, Elijah in Upper Egypt: The Apocalypse of Elijah and Early Egyptian Christianity (Studies in Antiquity and Christianity; Minneapolis: Fortress, 1993).
52
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
nor through revelations at martyr shrines, but through a stable canon of Scriptures, interpreted by the ofÀcial catholic church. I summed up the differences among these competing modes of Christian spirituality in terms of three authoritative Àgures: the teacher, the martyr, and the bishop. In this view, it was not so much the speciÀc “heresies” named by Athanasius (“Arians” and “Melitians”) that prompted the letter and the promulgation of a canon, as much as the general forms of spirituality, social organization, and authority that they represented. My argument met with some criticism even before the appearance of the new fragment.20 Most criticism has been aimed at the distinction between academic and episcopal Christianities. One objection is that labeling Alexandrian Christians like Arius “academic” renders them “marginal” and places them in “elite and insular” schools.21 To the contrary, “academic” may be a marginal category in the contemporary United States and perhaps in some centers of late ancient Christianity, but it was not at all marginal or insular in Alexandrian Christianity. Rather, an academic mode of spirituality, one focused on the study of sacred texts under a learned teacher, was Alexandria’s most traditional form of Christian piety, shaping the ethos not of isolated schools in our sense, but of study circles, public lectures, and worshiping communities that overlapped and often included clerical leadership. To be sure, such a spirituality was frankly elitist, as any reader of Clement or Origen will readily see—some people are more advanced than others—but that does not mean it could not be genuinely popular and religious, as Arius by all accounts was. Another objection is that I have allowed the rhetoric of people like Irenaeus, Athanasius, and Epiphanius to shape my understanding of their opponents as charismatic teachers.22 It is true that many of the literary sources for our social information about ancient people (not only “heretics”) are prejudicial and characterized by polemical distortion or even outright lies. When Athanasius, Irenaeus, and others derided their opponents as “teachers”—which they tried to make into a term of disparagement—and ridiculed cultured study and theological speculation, they were trying to demean, and portray as non-Christian, activities that many Christians considered positive means toward contemplation of God and salvation. Especially when we have corroborating evidence from Arius’s own writings, I am inclined to construct in this case a sympathetic portrait from characteristics that hostile sources depict as negative. 20 Many scholars have also accepted the argument: for example, Christoph Markschies, “The Canon of the New Testament in Antiquity: Some New Horizons for Future Research,” in Homer, the Bible, and Beyond: Literary and Religious Canons in the Ancient World (ed. Margalit Finkelberg and Guy G. Stroumsa; Jerusalem Studies in Religion and Culture 2; Leiden: Brill, 2003) 175–94, at 189–92, although he rightly criticizes my imprecise (and Athanasian) use of the term “Arians.” 21 Robert C. Gregg, review of R. Williams, Arius, JTS n.s. 40 (1989) 247–54; J. Rebecca Lyman, “Historical Methodologies and Ancient Theological ConÁicts,” in The Papers of the Henry Luce III Fellows in Theology (ed. Matthew Zyniewicz; 6 vols.; Atlanta: Scholars Press, 1999) 3:75–96, at 84–85. 22 Lyman, “Historical Methodologies,” 95 n. 57.
DAVID BRAKKE
53
Moreover, we must keep in mind the disingenuous self-representations of these bishops, who were themselves teachers and therefore doing some of the same things that their opponents were, as some of my critics have helpfully pointed out.23 Consequently, we should not doubt the activity of teaching itself, but we must investigate the differing social contexts of Christian teaching and the ways in which Christian authors package, spin, and (de-)legitimate this activity. As Athanasius and others like him present the matter, when legitimate ofÀceholders of the church (bishops) teach, they are faithfully passing on what Christ told the disciples, who subsequently informed their episcopal successors, and so they are not really teaching at all. Athanasius claims this about himself in our letter: “I have not written these things as if I were teaching, for I have not attained such a rank. . . . I thus have informed you of everything that I heard from my father,”24 that is, Bishop Alexander of Alexandria. Personal qualities of learning and insight do not legitimate what the bishop says, but rather his place in a trustworthy succession. When others teach, in contrast, they invent ideas and lead Christians astray. These claims, however, require interrogation and do not rule out that other Christian leaders taught in other contexts and legitimated their teaching in other ways, as I have argued Arius did. In his commentary on the Festal Letters, Camplani accepts my description of a shift in Alexandrian spirituality that Athanasius’s works both attest and promote. As Camplani phrases it, Origen and other early Alexandrians exhibit a pattern of spiritual growth in which an initial ethical distancing from the world facilitated increasingly advanced study of the Scriptures, which led to contemplation of God. Athanasius revised this pattern to place less emphasis on textual study and more on control of the body, and Christian spirituality took on a more explicitly social dimension in the form of a church inclusive of both monastic and married Christians, clergy and lay people. But Camplani objects to my mapping of these two forms of spirituality onto the social fabric of fourth-century Alexandrian Christianity. Arius, he points out, was a member of the clergy, and surely not all his supporters were learned; Didymus the Blind Àts my social role of “teacher” perfectly, but supported Athanasian orthodoxy.25 In Camplani’s view, then, the distinction between episcopally- and academicallyoriented spiritualities fails “to capture the substance of the Athanasian attitude.” Here, he says, is where the new fragment comes into play: It makes clear that a speciÀcally anti-heretical agenda formed the substance of what Athanasius was doing. The biblical canon was meant to expose and refute speciÀc heretical teachers and groups.26 Camplani goes on to describe the thirty-ninth Festal Letter as part of a wider “theological initiative” that Athanasius undertook in the years after he returned 23 24 25 26
Lyman, “Historical Methodologies,” 84–91. Paragraph 32. Camplani, Atanasio di Alessandria, 151–52. Ibid., 82–83.
54
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
from his Àfth and Ànal exile in 366 C.E. In this period, according to Camplani, Athanasius proposed “a more comprehensive model of orthodoxy,” which included more than the right beliefs in matters of the Trinity and Christology that he had stressed earlier in his career. Instead, this new concept of orthodoxy embraced the whole of Christian piety, including a canon of Scripture, its orthodox dogmatic exegesis, proper observance of the cult of the saints, and a closer connection with the monastic movement. The small heresiological catalogue in the new fragment, which looks beyond the Arians to a wider range of heretical groups, indicates one facet of this new concept of orthodoxy. So, Camplani argues, it is not really an episcopal spirituality that Athanasius promotes, but rather an orthodoxy.27 Camplani’s general point is, I think, correct. In his Ànal years Athanasius sought to reform a range of existing practices in Egyptian Christianity and to consolidate the orthodox catholic church that he had promoted throughout his long career.28 He devoted less attention to international theological developments and more time and energy to Egypt. I agree too that my original formulation of this effort, especially as found in the thirty-ninth Festal Letter, did not recognize sufÀciently the speciÀcally anti-heretical dimension of his project. That is, Athanasius opposed not only general forms of spirituality and authority, but also speciÀc heretical teachings, such as Marcion’s rejection of the Old Testament. Still, Camplani’s notion of a more comprehensive conception of orthodoxy on Athanasius’s part, one that includes pious practices and not just doctrines, perhaps states in different terms my emphasis on Athanasius’s larger interest in conÁicting types of religious authority and their corresponding modes of piety and social formation. Athanasius’s lengthy critique of human teachers and of any teaching activity that is not simple exposition of the Scriptures, however, also indicates that he sees a particular culture of independent Christian instruction and study as the breeding ground for Arianism, Melitianism, and perhaps the other heresies that he names. Although I do not share Athanasius’s negative view of this spirituality, I do think that it existed and that Arius and Didymus are good fourth-century representatives of it. Arius may have been a presbyter, but evidence suggests that he legitimated his teaching by pointing not only to his clerical ofÀce—as Athanasius the bishop would—but also to his academic pedigree and learning—as Athanasius would not.29 Likewise, Didymus may have been a Àrm supporter of Athanasian trinitarian orthodoxy and the episcopate, but his overall approach to Scripture and its study 27
Camplani, Atanasio di Alessandria, 499–500. For my discussions of these efforts, see not only “Canon Formation and Social ConÁict,” but also Athanasius and the Politics of Asceticism, 100–2, and “‘Outside the Places, Within the Truth’: Athanasius of Alexandria and the Localization of the Holy,” in Pilgrimage and Holy Space in Late Antique Egypt (ed. David Frankfurter; Religions in the Graeco-Roman World 134; Leiden: Brill, 1998) 445–81. 29 Brakke, “Canon Formation and Social ConÁict,” 403–4. See now also the summary portrait in Edward J. Watts, City and School in Late Antique Athens and Alexandria (The Transformation of the Classical Heritage 41; Berkeley: University of California Press, 2006) 171–74. 28
DAVID BRAKKE
55
is not that of Athanasius. As Richard Layton has nicely put it, “the instruction of Didymus was supportive of, but not necessarily in service to, ecclesiastical authorities.”30 Didymus’s school demonstrates that Athanasius’s campaign of “revolutionary anti-intellectualism” did not succeed and that the bishop did not appreciate the possibility of a fully orthodox philosophical culture independent of the episcopate, perhaps with the exception of monks like Antony, taught only by God.31 Edward Watts has described how Athanasius’s Life of Antony contributed to this campaign by depicting the monk as a teacher of “a new kind of philosophy that derived not from suspect speculation and deceptive argumentation, but from the purity of scripture and the clarity of faith.”32 During the late-fourth century, he argues, Alexandrian Christian intellectual circles moved away from regular interaction with pagan philosophical culture, and Christian instruction increasingly came from monastically-oriented Àgures like Didymus and Evagrius Ponticus, whose authority was based on an ascetic self-control and pedigree as much as, if not more than, on mastery of traditional philosophy.33 Although Eric Junod believes that my anti-teaching hypothesis lacks supporting evidence in Festal Letter 39 and other Athanasian works,34 the substantive claim of his excellent recent article coheres with my argument—as even its subtitle (“De la construction savante du Nouveau Testament à la clôture ecclésiastique du canon”) indicates. Junod suggests that at the beginning of the fourth century the biblical “canon,” as found in Eusebius of Caesarea, was the still incomplete and speculative project of Christian intellectuals, but with Athanasius the canon became a Àxed and ecclesiastical institution. Junod’s argument closely parallels my distinction between the Áexible and indeterminate “academic canon” of independent Christian teachers like Origen and the bounded and unchangeable “episcopal canon” promulgated by bishops like Athanasius. In fact, I cited Eusebius as an example of the former. I called Athanasius’s list of books that were not “canonized,” but were useful for the instruction of catechumens, a “remnant of the academic canon,” the status of which was “awkward” in Athanasius’s program.35 Junod has provided a more speciÀcally historical argument for this last claim. Athanasius, Junod points out, knew that he was being innovative in deÀning a set canon: The bishop speaks of his “audacity” (XSPQLVMZE) in doing so. In comparison to the lists of Eusebius, Athanasius lacks the category of “disputed” works (ENRXMPIKSZQIRE), a category that Junod calls both “learned and ecclesiastically embarrassing,” for it indicates 30 Richard A. Layton, Didymus the Blind and His Circle in Late-Antique Alexandria: Virtue and Narrative in Biblical Scholarship (Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 2004) 18. 31 The phrase “revolutionary anti-intellectualism” comes from Watts, City and School, 181. 32 Ibid., 177–81. 33 Ibid., 181–86. 34 Eric Junod, “D’Eusèbe de Césarée à Athanase d’Alexandrie en passant par Cyrille de Jérusalem. De la construction savante du Nouveau Testament à la clôture ecclésiastique du canon,” in Le Canon du Nouveau Testament (ed. Aragione) 169–95, at 189–90. 35 Brakke, “Canon Formation and Social ConÁict,” 408–10.
56
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
continued discussion among Christian intellectuals and a lack of unanimity within the church. Athanasius replaced this category with books that are not canonical, but are “to be read”; Junod plausibly suggests that Athanasius derived this list from the curriculum of the Alexandrian Catechetical School. Unlike Eusebius’s “disputed” books, Athanasius could present this new intermediate category (between “canonical” and rejected) as traditional and “integral to the life and teaching of the Church.”36 In other words, Athanasius marks a transition from one kind of canon, suited to a Christian intellectual culture of study and debate, to another, suited to a Christian episcopal culture of worship and orthodoxy. This last point restates part of my earlier argument about the signiÀcance of the thirty-ninth Festal Letter: Although most scholars remain focused on the lists of books, the greater importance of the letter is that it reveals the role of canon formation in supporting one form of Christian piety and authority and undermining others. Different scriptural practices accompany different modes of authority and spirituality, and we should not take the bounded canon of episcopal orthodoxy as either the inevitable telos of early Christian history or the only way that Christians construed and used sacred writings. The new fragment, however, makes clear that in establishing a deÀned canon Athanasius sought to undermine not only a general spirituality of free intellectual inquiry and its academic mode of authority, but also the speciÀc false doctrines to which he believed such a spirituality gave rise.
Q Translation (and Text of the New Fragment) Here follows a fresh translation of the entire letter.37 For the new fragment I include a revised version of Elanskaya’s text as well. The text and translation of the fragment presented here owe much to the deciphering and linguistic abilities of Stephen Emmel and Gregor Wurst, with whom I Àrst read it. The line numbers in the Coptic text have no relation to the lines in the manuscript, which arranges the text in two columns. The paragraph numbers are those that Camplani established in his translation.
36
Junod, “D’Eusèbe de Césarée,” 191–94. The Coptic text is attested as follows: White Monastery manuscript MONB.AS (Lefort’s Codex B) contains fragments of paragraphs 6–8 (Lefort, Lettres festales, 15–16), 11–23 (Lefort, Lettres festales, 16–21), and 32–34 (Lefort, Lettres festales, 21–22). MONB.AT (Lefort’s Codex C) contains fragments of paragraphs 6–8 (Lefort, Lettres festales, 58–60), 8–24 (Coquin, “Les lettres festales,” 138–44), 24–26 (Elanskaya, Literary Coptic Manuscripts, 379–80), and 26–29 (Lefort, Lettres festales, 60–62). In addition to adding the new fragment, I have revised slightly my translation of 1995 by correcting a few errors, adding some biblical references, using American spelling, and conforming the paragraphing to that which Camplani established. I have used the following editorial signs in the Coptic text: O
indicates text restored in a lacuna; #KF)JUOOBJÎ indicates text deleted (e.g., to correct dittography); <S> indicates text added (e.g., to correct haplography); FCPM. dots under letters indicate an uncertain reading. 37
DAVID BRAKKE
57
6. [ . . . ] as Life, he came to those who are dead, and as God, he came to human beings. In this way those who did not seek him found him, and he was made manifest to those who did not ask him.38 So too he became a light for the blind when he opened their eyes,39 and he became a staff for the lame when he healed them and they walked.40 Once and for all he became a teacher for everyone in everything. 7. For the teaching of piety does not come from human beings; rather, it is the Lord who reveals his Father to those whom he wills because it is he who knows him.41 First he did this to the apostles; one of them, Paul, writes to the Galatians: “I am informing you, brothers and sisters, about the gospel that was proclaimed through me, that it is not of human origin, nor was I taught it; rather, it is according to a revelation of Jesus Christ.”42 Moreover, writing to those in Ephesus, he said: “If you have heard about the working of the grace of God that has been given to me for you, how in a revelation I was informed about the mystery, just as I wrote to you earlier in a little bit as you are able, you desire to understand my teaching in the mystery of Christ, which was not revealed to the generations of the children of humanity as it has now been revealed to his prophets and holy apostles.”43 8. Not they alone, brothers and sisters, are the ones to whom the Lord has become a teacher by revealing the mystery to them; rather, he is a teacher to us all. For Paul rejoices with his disciples that they have been taught about the gospel in this way: he prays in behalf of those in Ephesus that “the God of our Lord Jesus Christ, the Father of glory, might give to you a spirit of wisdom and revelation in his knowledge.”44 The apostle knows that we all share in this prayer that he made for them (the Ephesians)—and not only at that former time when the Lord revealed the knowledge to human beings. No, it is he who “corrects until the end,” he who “teaches knowledge to humanity,” according to the word of the psalmist.45 It is he whom his disciples asked to teach them how to pray, and he who taught daily in the temple, as Luke said.46 It is he whom his disciples asked, “Teacher, when will these things happen, and what is the sign that all these things are going to be fulÀlled?”47 When his disciples asked him, “Where do you want us to prepare to eat the Passover?” he answered and said to them, “Behold, when you enter this city, a man will meet you carrying a jar. Follow him into the house that he enters
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
See Isa 65:1; Rom 10:20. See Isa 35:5; Matt 11:5; Luke 4:18. See Luke 7:22. See Matt 11:27; Luke 10:22; John 10:15; 17:25. Gal 1:11–12. Eph 3:2–5. Eph 1:17. Pss 17(18):35; 93(94):10. Luke 11:1; 19:47. Mark 13:4; Luke 21:7.
58
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
and say to the master of the house, ‘It is the Teacher who says to you, “Where is my guest room where I will eat the Passover with my disciples?” ’48 9. Well indeed he spoke like this, for the name of Wisdom is Àtting for him because it is he alone who is the true Teacher. For who is to be trusted to teach human beings about the Father, except he who exists always in his bosom?49 Thus, who can convince those whom he teaches about “things that eye has not seen nor ear heard nor have arisen upon the human heart,”50 except he who alone knows the Father and has established for us the way to enter the kingdom of heaven? Therefore, he charged his disciples, just as Matthew said: “Let none of you be called ‘Rabbi,’ for your Teacher is one, and you are all brothers and sisters. And do not call for yourselves ‘Father’ on earth, for your Father in heaven is one. And do not be called ‘Teacher,’ for your Teacher, Christ, is one. And the great one among you will be your servant.”51 10. But it is not Àtting, brothers and sisters, that we should listen to the holy words carelessly. Therefore, why does the apostle in one place call himself “teacher of the Gentiles in faith and truth,”52 and in another place say about the Lord, “It is he who has made some apostles, and some preachers, and others pastors and teachers”?53 And James commands and says, “Let not many be teachers, my brothers and sisters: you know that we will receive a more severe judgment than you all.”54 He did not say this because there were no teachers, but because there were some, although it was not necessary that there be teachers. 11. And yet, although these people (Paul and James) speak in this way, it is written in the gospel that the Lord commanded that we not be called “Rabbi” and that no one be called “Teacher” except the Lord alone. While I was examining these (passages), a thought occurred to me that requires your scrutiny. What I thought is this: The task of the teacher is to teach, and that of the disciple is to learn. But even if these people teach, they are still called “disciples,” for it is not they who are the originators of what they proclaim; rather, they are at the service of the words of the true Teacher. For our Lord and our God Jesus Christ, because he wanted to inform us of this, said to his disciples, “What I say to you in the darkness, say in the light, and what you hear with your ears, proclaim upon the rooftops.”55 For the words that the disciples proclaim do not belong to them; rather, they are what they heard from the Savior. Therefore, even if it is Paul who teaches, it is nevertheless Christ who speaks in him.56 And even if he says that the Lord has 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
Luke 22:9–11. See John 1:18. 1 Cor 2:9. Matt 23:8–11. 1 Tim 2:7. Eph 4:11. Jas 3:1. Matt 10:27; see also Luke 12:3. See Gal 2:20.
DAVID BRAKKE
59
appointed teachers in the churches,57 he (the Lord) nevertheless Àrst teaches them and then sends them out. 12. For the nature of everyone who is of the created order is to be taught, but our Lord and Demiurge is by nature a teacher. For he was not taught by someone else how to be a teacher; but all human beings, even if they are called “Teacher,” were disciples Àrst. For all people are instructed because the Savior supplies them with the knowledge of the Spirit, so that “they all might be taught by God.”58 13. But our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ—being the Word of the Father and having not been instructed by anyone—rightly he alone is the Teacher, so that the Jews were astonished when they heard him and said, “How does he know the Scriptures without having been taught?”59 Therefore, when he was teaching in the synagogue and healing the sick, the Jews persecuted him, and so “from their feet to their head they do not lack wounds or bruises”;60 rather, such punishment came upon them as a great madness. For “they have not understood,” as it is written, “nor have they learned wisdom; rather, they walk in darkness.”61 14. And, following them, those from the heresies who have caught up to them, namely the wretched Melitians, by denying him, have walked in waterless places and have abandoned the spring of life.62 Therefore, even if they talk about the Passover hypocritically for the sake of the glory of human beings, their gathering is a bread of mourning, for they take counsel evilly against the truth, so that whoever sees such a gathering speaks the word that is written as suited to them: “Why have the nations become arrogant, and why have the peoples worried about vain things?”63 For the Jews gather together like Pontius Pilate, and the Arians and the Melitians like Herod, not to celebrate the feast, but to blaspheme the Lord, saying, “What is truth?”64 and “Take him away! Crucify him! Release to us Barabbas!”65 For it is just like the request for Barrabas to say that the Son of God is a creature and that there was a time when he was not. As for them, it is no surprise that they have remained dead in their unbelief by being bound by their evil thoughts, just as the Egyptians were bound by their own axles.66 15. But for our part, let us now keep the feast according to the tradition of our ancestors, because we have the Holy Scriptures, which are sufÀcient to instruct us perfectly. When we read them carefully with a good conscience, we will be “like the tree that grows upon places of Áowing water, which brings forth its fruit in its 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66
See 1 Cor 12:28; Eph 4:11. John 6:45; Isa 54:13. John 7:15. Isa 1:6. Ps 81(82):5. See Matt 12:43; Luke 11:24; Jer 2:13; 7:13. Ps 2:1. John 18:38. Luke 23:18, 21. See Exod 14:25 in the LXX.
60
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
season and whose leaves do not wither.”67 But inasmuch as we have mentioned that the heretics are dead but we have the divine Scriptures for salvation, and we are afraid that, as Paul wrote to the Corinthians,68 a few of the simple folk might be led astray from sincerity and purity through human deceit and might then begin to read other books, the so-called apocrypha, deceived by their having the same names as the genuine books, I exhort you to bear with me if, to remind you, I write about things that you already know, on account of the church’s need and advantage. 16. As I begin to mention these things, in order to commend my audacity, I will employ the example of Luke the evangelist and say myself: Inasmuch as certain people have attempted to set in order for themselves the so-called apocryphal books and to mix these with the divinely inspired Scripture, about which we are convinced it is just as those who were eyewitnesses from the beginning and assistants of the Word handed down to our ancestors, it seemed good to me, because I have been urged by genuine brothers and sisters and instructed from the beginning, to set forth in order the books that are canonized, transmitted, and believed to be divine, so that those who have been deceived might condemn the persons who led them astray, and those who have remained pure might rejoice to be reminded (of these things).69 17. There are, then, belonging to the Old Testament in number a total of twenty-two, for, as I have heard, it has been handed down that this is the number of the letters in the Hebrew alphabet. In order and by name they are as follows: Àrst, Genesis; then Exodus; then Leviticus; and after this, Numbers; and Ànally Deuteronomy. After these is Joshua, the son of Nun; and Judges; and after this, Ruth; and again, next four books of Kings, the Àrst and second of these being reckoned as one book, and the third and fourth likewise being one. After these are First and Second Chronicles, likewise reckoned as one book; then First and Second Esdras, likewise as one. After these is the book of Psalms; and then Proverbs; then Ecclesiastes and the Song of Songs. After these is Job; and Ànally the Prophets, the twelve being reckoned as one book; then Isaiah; Jeremiah and with it, Baruch; Lamentations and the Letter; and after it, Ezekiel and Daniel. To this point are the books of the Old Testament. 18. Again, one should not hesitate to name the books of the New Testament. For these are the four Gospels, Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John; than after these, Acts of the Apostles and seven letters, called catholic, by the apostles, namely: one by James; two by Peter; then three by John; and after these, one by Jude. After these there are fourteen letters by Paul, written in this order: Àrst to the Romans; then two to the Corinthians; and after these, to the Galatians; and next to the Ephesians; then to the Philippians and to the Colossians; and after these, two to the Thessalonians;
67 68 69
Ps 1:3. See 2 Cor 11:3. See Luke 1:1–4.
DAVID BRAKKE
61
and that to the Hebrews; and additionally, two to Timothy, one to Titus, and Ànally that to Philemon. And besides, the Revelation of John. 19. These are the springs of salvation, so that someone who thirsts may be satisÀed by the words they contain. In these books alone the teaching of piety is proclaimed. Let no one add to or subtract from them.70 Concerning them the Lord put the Sadducees to shame when he said, “You err because you do not know the Scriptures or their meaning,”71 and he reproved the Jews, “Search the Scriptures, for it is they that testify to me.”72 20. But for the sake of greater accuracy, I add this, writing from necessity. There are other books, in addition to the preceding, which have not been canonized, but have been appointed by the ancestors to be read to those who newly join us and want to be instructed in the word of piety: the Wisdom of Solomon, the Wisdom of Sirach, Esther, Judith, Tobit, the book called Teaching of the Apostles, and the Shepherd. 21. Nevertheless, beloved, the former books are canonized; the latter are (only) read; and there is no mention of the apocryphal books. Rather, (the category of apocrypha) is an invention of heretics, who write these books whenever they want and then generously add time to them, so that, by publishing them as if they were ancient, they might have a pretext for deceiving the simple folk. Great is the hardheartedness of those who do this and who do not fear the word that is written: “You shall not add to the word that I commanded you, nor shall you subtract from it.”73 Who has made the simple folk believe that those books belong to Enoch even though no Scripture existed before Moses? On what basis will they say that there is an apocryphal book of Isaiah? He preaches openly on the high mountain and says, “I did not speak in secret or in a dark land.”74 How could Moses have an apocryphal book? He is the one who published Deuteronomy with heaven and earth as witnesses.75 22. No, this can be nothing except itchy ears, trading in piety, and the pleasing of women.76 Paul spoke about such people beforehand when he wrote to his disciple: “A time will come when they will not keep to the salviÀc teaching, but according to their own desire they will produce teachers for themselves, when their ear will itch, and they will turn their ears away from the truth and go after myths.”77 For truly the apocryphal books are Àlled with myths, and it is a vain thing to pay attention to them, because they are empty and polluted voices. For they are the beginning of discord, and strife is the goal of people who do not see what is beneÀcial for the 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77
See Deut 13:1; 4:2; Rev 22:18–19. Matt 22:29; Mark 12:24. John 5:39. Deut 4:2. See Isa 40:9; 45:19. See Deut 4:26; 30:19; 31:28. See 2 Tim 4:3; 1 Tim 6:5; 2 Tim 3:6. 2 Tim 4:3–4.
62
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
church, but who desire to receive compliments from those whom they lead astray, so that, by publishing new discourses, they will be considered great people. 23. Therefore, it is Àtting for us to decline such books. For even if a useful word is found in them, it is still not good to trust them. For this is work of the wickedness of those who have conceived of mixing one or two inspired texts, so that, through such deception, they might somehow cover up the evil teachings that they have clearly created. Therefore, it is even more Àtting for us to reject such books, and let us command ourselves not to proclaim anything in them nor to speak anything in them with those who want to be instructed, even if there is a good word in them, as I have said. For what do the spiritual Scriptures lack that we should seek after these empty voices of unknown people? It is appropriate for us to cite the text that is written about them: “Is there no balm in Gilead nor physician there?”78 and again, “Of what proÀt to you is the road to Egypt so that you drink the troubled water from Gehon?”79 and again, “Of what proÀt to you is the way to Assyria that you drink the water from their rivers?”80 24. Therefore, if we seek the faith, it is possible for us to discover it through (the Scriptures), so that we might believe in the Father, the Son, and the Holy Spirit. If (we seek after) the subject of his humanity, John cries out, “The Word became Áesh and lived among us.”81 And on the subject of the resurrection, the Lord put the Sadducees to shame, saying, “Have you not read what is said to you by God, who says, ‘I am the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, the God of Jacob’? He is not the God of the dead, but of the living.”82 On the subject of the coming judgment, it is written, “We shall all stand OOB)SNQCINBNQFDTKFLBT before the judgment seat of Christ, FSFQPVBQPVBKJOOFCPM so that each may receive in his body )JUNQF'TXNBQSPTOFOUB'BBV recompense for what he has done, FJUFBHBRPOFJUFQFRPOi whether good or evil.”ii FSFNNBOJDBJPTPVPO)FCPM)JUOOBJ 25. It is through these #KF)JUOOBJÎKF)FOBTFCITO (passages) that the Manichaeans are FVTXUNFSPPVFVXWFCPMiii exposed as impious when they hear FUCFQOPVUFKFUBNJPNQLB) them proclaim about Godiv: “He
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
78 79 80 81 82
Jer 8:22. Jer 2:18 Ibid. John 1:14. Matt 22:31–32
i
That is, QFRPPV. Elanskaya suggests the inÁuence of BHBRPO. 2 Cor 5:10; see also Rom 14:10. iii The photographed text is mostly illegible here. Elanskaya reads FSPO . Camplani suggests FCPM (Atanasio di Alessandria, 514), which makes more sense. iv Alternatively, “when they (the passages) are heard proclaiming about God.” ii
DAVID BRAKKE
9 10 11 12 13 14
ORFOPVMBBVBVXPOKFOJN QFOUB'UBNJFOBJUISPVBVXPO FOOPFJKFOUBVTCUFOBJXO )NQWBKFNQOPVUFKFQFUOOBV FSP'OUB'WXQFFCPM )NQFUFO'WPPQBO
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
UBJPORFO# XÎ\O^UB'PVXO)FCPMO<$J>NBSLJPO KFO'OPFJBOKFQOPNPTPVBBC BVXUFOUPMIPVBBCBVX PVEJLBJPOUFBVXPVBHBRPOUF NBMJTUBFSFQTXUISKXNNPT KFFOFUFUOQJTUFVFFNXVTIT OFUFUOBQJTUFVFFSPJQF BQFUNNBVHBST)BJFUCIIUBVXPO KF)PU)UOOFHSBGIKFOBJ OFUSNOUSFFUCIIU PPVEFPOOFHSBGIFUPVBBC OFOUBVPVFOFU)OUFG<S>VBxi FCPMKF)FO<)BJ>SFUJLPTOF )NQUSFQFQOBFUPVBBCFJFQFTIU FKONNBRIUITBVXTFUBB' JTUT. OBSJEFPO NOOFVBSBTJUPTNNF<MJ>UJBOPT BVWJQFFSFJX)BOOITFQJOPFJ OUFVNOUBTFCITKFPVOPVPFJW WPPQFO'WPPQBOO$JQWISF F'BRFUFJEFNNPT)JUOUFJTNI KF)OUF)PVFJUFOF'WPPQ O$JQWBKFBVXQWBKFOF'WPPQ OOB)SNQOPVUFBVXOFPVOPVUFQF
v
63
created the earth out of nothing”;v and also, “Who created all these things?”vi; and also, “We understand that the worlds were prepared by the word of God, so that what we see was made from what does not exist.”vii In the same way Marcion was exposed as not understanding that “the law is holy, and the commandment is holy and just and good”viii especially when the Savior said, “If you believed Moses, you would believe me, for he wrote about me,”ix and also, “Search the Scriptures because it is they that testify on my behalf.”x In addition, it is the holy Scriptures that exposed the people in Phrygia as heretics when the Holy Spirit descended upon the disciples and they gave it to the Christians.xii Also, the Arians and their parasites, the Melitians, were put to shame when John considered their impiety, “There is a time when the Word was not,” and rejected it with this saying: “In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was
Isa 40:23. Isa 40:26. vii Heb 11:3. viii Rom 7:12. ix John 5:46. x See John 5:39. xi Elanskaya reads UFGVB. Lucchesi suggested the reading given here (“Un nouveau complément,” 258), which is certainly correct. xii See John 20:22–23; Acts 2:2–4; 8:17–18; etc. vi
64
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
41 QWBKF 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
BMMBQFKB'KFBQBVMPT KJPVNOUNOUSFFCPM)OOBQPLSVGPO F'KXNNPTKFOFUFNQFCBMOBV FSPPVNQFNBBKFTPUNPV OFUFNQPVBMFF)SBJFKNQ)IU OSXNF 5OBPVWCOB'KFQFJ)XC QB)FOSXNFQFOSF'5XO FSFQBVMPTTVO)JTUBBO OF'WBKF)JUO)FOWBKFBMMBxv OFUTI)OF#)OOFÎ)OOFHSBGI.
53 OBJOFOUBQBVMPTTFV)QFVOPVT 54 F)PVOB'T)BJTPV 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65
BVXPVOPVBOBWFJNFFQBJ )JUOOWBKFOOFQSGIUIT OFUTI)HBS)OITBJBTKFOBM OBTXUN)NQF)PPVFUNNBV FOWBKFNQKXXNFBVXOCBM OOCMMFFU)NQLBLFNOQF)MPTUO OBOBVFCPMBVXOFUFNOUV )FMQJTNNBV)OOSXNFTFOBTFJ OPVOP'OBJOFUFNQFCBMOBV FSPPVOFUFNQFNBBKFTPUNPV NQPVBMFF)SBJFKNQ)IUOOSXNF
66 BWHBSOPVPFJWOUBPVCMMFIPVBM 67 )FMQJ[FFTXUNIFOBQOPVUF 68 F'
with God, and the Word was God.”xiii 26. But he has said that Paul took a testimony from the apocryphal books when he says, “What no eye has seen, nor ear heard, things that have not arisen upon the human heart.”xiv I will answer him that this stuff is typical of contentious persons. Paul does not support his words through (merely other) words; rather, they are things written in the Scriptures. It is these (words in the Scriptures) whose meaning Paul gathered and wrote. And someone can understand this through the words of the prophets. For the things that are written in Isaiah—“The deaf will hear on that day the words of the book, and the eyes of the blind that are in darkness and fog will see, and those who have no hope among people will be Àlled with joy”xvi—these are “the things that no eye has seen, the things that no ear has heard nor have arisen upon the heart of human beings.”xvii For when did a blind person or a deaf person hope to hear or to see God [living]
among human beings? Who among those who have no hope could at all think that the Word would become Áesh?83 Have the things in God’s heart arisen upon the heart of human beings? When has anyone known his heart?84 [ . . . ] 83 84 xiii
See John 1:14. See Rom 11:34.
John 1:1. 1 Cor 2:9. xv Elanskaya mistakenly omits a line of text here, reading instead BOOF'WBKFBMMB. xvi Isa 29:18–19. xvii 1 Cor 2:9. xiv
DAVID BRAKKE
65
27. [ . . . ] Paul [ . . . ] and “these are the things that he proclaimed” [or “as] he said” [or] “Isaiah charges and says”85 and “as David says”86 and also “Moses says beforehand”87 and again “the Scripture says that Elijah.”88 Even when he says, “as it is written,”89 and does not make clear where the text is written or who proclaimed it, nevertheless we the readers know where it is written in the Scriptures. This text—“the things that no eye has seen . . .”—we do not Ànd written in the Scripture just as it is. But if it is written90 in the apocryphal books, as the heretics say, then those who invented these books stole Paul’s words and wrote it at a later time. 28. Therefore, inasmuch as it is clear that the testimony from the apocryphal books is superÁuous because it is unfounded—for the Scripture is perfect in every way—let the teacher teach from the words of Scripture, and let him place before those who desire to learn those things that are appropriate to their age. In the case of those who begin to study as catechumens, it is not right to proclaim the obscure texts of Scripture, because they are mysteries, but instead to place before them the teaching that they need: what will teach them how to hate sin and to abandon idolatry as an abomination, the teaching [ . . . ] 29. [ . . . ] is written: [ . . . ] his neighbor [ . . . ] in the one whose thought [...] 32. [ . . . ] in the Scriptures. I am satisÀed that this will remind you, so that, when you take for yourselves the saints as examples and administer well the words of the holy Scriptures, you will hear sometime, “Well done, good and faithful servant! Because you are trustworthy in small things, I will place you over great things.”91 I have not written these things as if I were teaching, for I have not attained such a rank. Rather, because I heard that the heretics, especially the wretched Melitians, were boasting about the books that they call “apocryphal,” I thus have informed you of everything that I heard from my father,92 as if I were with you and you with me in a single house, that is, “the church of God, the pillar and strength of truth.”93 When we gather in a single place, let us purify it (the church) of every deÀlement, of double-heartedness, of Àghting and childish arrogance. Let us be satisÀed with only the Scripture inspired by God to instruct us. Its books we have set forth in the words above: which they are and how many their number. For in this way we
85
See Rom 10:20. See Rom 4:6; 11:9. 87 See Rom 10:19. 88 See Rom 11:2. 89 Rom 1:17; 2:24; etc. 90 Leforts’s text reads FWKF'PO) (literally, “if it is alive”). Camplani translates “se poi si trova chiaramente.” My translation suggests that we should read FWKF'TI). In any event, the meaning is clear. 91 Matt 25:21, 23. 92 Bishop Alexander of Alexandria. 93 1 Tim 3:15. 86
66
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
now celebrate the feast as is Àtting, “not with old leaven nor with evil or wicked leaven, but with pure and true leaven.”94 33. We will begin the holy Lent on the twenty-Àfth of the month of Mechir (19 February), and the great week of the saving Passover on the last of the month of Phamenouth (26 March). And we will Ànish the holy fast on the Àfth of the month of Pharmuthi (31 March). And next we will celebrate the seven weeks of the holy Pentecost, remembering the poor and sharing with one another and with the needy, in accordance with the word of Esdra.95 Once and for all we do everything, glorifying God, in accordance with the command of Paul in Christ Jesus our Lord, through whom be glory and power with the Holy Spirit for ever and ever. Amen. “Greet one another with a holy kiss. All the brothers and sisters with me greet you.”96 I inform you of this as well: that when the blessed Lampon, bishop of Darnei, died, [ . . . ] was appointed [ . . . ].
94 95 96
1 Cor 5:8. 2 Esd (Neh) 8:10. Rom 16:16 etc.; Phil 4:21.
7KH&UXFLÀ[LRQ&RQXQGUXPDQGWKH 6DQWD6DELQD'RRUV* $OO\VRQ(YHULQJKDP6KHFNOHUDQG0DU\-RDQ:LQQ/HLWK Stonehill College
7KHHDUOLHVWH[WDQWSXEOLFLPDJHRIWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQRI&KULVWDSSHDUVRQDVLQJOH UHOLHISDQHORQWKHHDUO\ÀIWKFHQWXU\ZRRGHQGRRUVRIWKH&KXUFKRI6DQWD6DELQD RQWKH$YHQWLQH+LOOLQ5RPHÀJVDQG *HQHUDOVFKRODUO\FRQVHQVXVGDWHV WKH FRQVWUXFWLRQ RI WKH FKXUFK WR WKH SRQWLÀFDWH RI 3RSH &HOHVWLQH , ² C.E. DV VWDWHG LQ WKH VXUYLYLQJ LQVFULSWLRQ RQ WKH FKXUFK·V LQWHULRU ZHVW ZDOO &RQVWUXFWLRQSUREDEO\FRQWLQXHGLQWRWKHSRQWLÀFDWHRI6L[WXV,,,²C.E. * 7KH DXWKRUV ZRXOG OLNH WR DFNQRZOHGJH HVSHFLDOO\ WKH PHPEHUV RI WKH 6SULQJ DQG )DOO´3DJDQVDQG&KULVWLDQVµ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´&XOPHQ DSRVWROLFXP FXP &DHOHVWLQXV KDEHUHW³SULPXV HW LQ WRWR IXOJHUHWHSLVFRSXVRUEH . . .µ :KHQ&HOHVWLQHKHOGWKHIRUHPRVWDQGKLJKHVWDSRVWROLFUDQNDQGDV ELVKRSZDVLOOXVWULRXVLQWKHZKROHZRUOG 7KHEDVLFVWXGLHVRIWKH6DQWD6DELQDGRRUVDUH)pOL[ 0''DUV\´/HV /HVSRUWHVGH6DLQWH6DELQH0pWKRGHG·DQDO\VHIRUPHOOHHWGHFULWLTXHLQWHUQHHQ SRUWHV GH 6DLQWH 6DELQH 0pWKRGH G·DQDO\VH IRUPHOOH HW GH FULWLTXH LQWHUQH HQ +LVWRLUHGHO·$UWµ µLQRivista LQ di Archeologia Cristiana LGHPRecherches archéologiques à Sainte-Sabine sur l’Aventin. Géologie, topographie, sanctuaires archaïques, culte isiaque, ensemble architectural paléochrétien9DWLFDQ&LW\3RQWLÀR 3RQWLÀR,VWLWXWRGLDUFKHRORJLDFULVWLDQD ,VWLWXWR GL DUFKHRORJLD FULVWLDQD ² ² *LVHOD-HUHPLDVDie Holztür der Basilika S. Sabina in Rom7ELQJHQ:DVPXWK -HDQ 0LFKHO6SLHVHU´/H /HSURJUDPPHLFRQRJUDSKLTXHGHVSRUWHVGH6DLQWH6DELQHµ SURJUDPPH LFRQRJUDSKLTXH GHV SRUWHV GH 6DLQWH6DELQHµ µJournal des savants ²(XJHQLR5XVVR´$SSDUDWL $SSDUDWL'HFRUDWLYLµ 'HFRUDWLYLµ µLQAurea LQ Roma. Dalla città pagana alla città cristiana HG 6HUHQD (QVROL DQG (XJHQLR /D 5RFFD 5RPH %UHWVFKQHLGHU ² 'LQD 7XPPLQHOOR/DFURFLÀVVLRQHGHOSRUWDOHGL66DELQDHOHRULJLQLGHOO·LFRQRORJLDGHOODFURVVLÀVVLRQH 5RPH6HYHULQR7RJQRQ ²*DHWDQR5XEELQROHVVFRQYLQFLQJO\GDWHVWKHFKXUFKWRWKH SRQWLÀFDWHRI,QQRFHQW,² C.E. LQLa basilica di Santa Sabina sull’Aventino. Un esempio di “classicismo” nella Roma del V secolo*HQRYD *HQRYD)HUUDUL )HUUDUL
HTR 103:1 (2010) 67–88
68
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
)LJ &UXFLÀ[LRQSDQHORQWKHZRRGHQGRRUVRIWKH%DVLOLFDRI6DQWD6DELQD5RPH [FPFD²C.E. Photo credit: William Storage and Laura Maish
ZKHQWKHFKXUFKZDVIRUPDOO\FRQVHFUDWHG$OWKRXJKLQWKHHQVXLQJFHQWXULHVWKH LPDJHRIWKH&UXFLÀHG&KULVW³WKH&UXFLÀ[³DWWDLQHGFDQRQLFDOVWDWXVVFKRODUV VHHNLQJSUHFHGHQWVIRU6DQWD6DELQD·VFUXFLÀ[LRQVFHQHKDYHIDLOHGWRGHWHUPLQH LWVSHGLJUHHVDWLVIDFWRULO\ZLWKLQWKH&KULVWLDQDUWLVWLFWUDGLWLRQ:HSURSRVHWKDW EURDGHQLQJRXUXQGHUVWDQGLQJRIDUWLVWLFSURWRW\SHVIRUWKH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQ LPDJHWRLQFOXGHERWKIRUPDODQGWKHRORJLFDOHOHPHQWVDOORZVIRUDPRUHQXDQFHG DQGSURPLVLQJLQYHVWLJDWLRQ 7KHVFDUFLW\RIFUXFLÀ[LRQLPDJHVEHIRUHWKHHDUO\ÀIWKFHQWXU\KDVJHQHUDOO\EHHQ DWWULEXWHGWR&KULVWLDQHPEDUUDVVPHQWRYHUWKHVKDPHIXOFLUFXPVWDQFHVRI-HVXV· GHDWKRQDFURVV1HYHUWKHOHVVWKH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQFRXOGVFDUFHO\KDYH
/RXLV'XFKHVQHHG/LEHU3RQWLÀFDOLV2ème 3DULV%RFFDUG 5RELQ-HQVHQSURYLGHVDMXGLFLRXVVXPPDU\RIWKLVLVVXHLQUnderstanding Early Christian Art /RQGRQ5RXWOHGJH ²7KHVWDQGDUGZRUNRQFUXFLÀ[LRQLV0DUWLQ+HQJHO&UXFLÀ[LRQ in the Ancient World and the Folly of the Message of the Cross3KLODGHOSKLD)RUWUHVV UHSU LQLGHPThe Cross of the Son of God/RQGRQ6&03UHVV ²6HHDOVRWKHKHOSIXOHQWU\ RQFUXFLÀ[LRQE\*HUDOG*2·&ROOLQVLQWKHAnchor Bible DictionaryHG'DYLG1RHO)UHHGPDQ *DUGHQ&LW\1<'RXEOHGD\ -RKQ*UDQJHU&RRNVXPPDUL]HVLQVFULSWLRQDOHYLGHQFHIRU
SHECKLER AND LEITH
69
)LJ :RRGHQ'RRUV%DVLOLFDRI6DQWD6DELQD5RPH [P²C.E. Photo credit: Scala/Art Resource, N.Y.
PDWHULDOL]HGRXWRIQRZKHUHDQGDUWKLVWRULDQVKDYHHPSOR\HGYDULRXVVWUDWHJLHV WRLGHQWLI\DVXSSRVHGO\ORVW&KULVWLDQLFRQRJUDSKLFSURWRW\SHIRUODWHULPDJHVRI &KULVWRQWKHFURVV 'LQD7XPPLQHOORIRUH[DPSOHLQKHUPRQRJUDSKORRNV DWVOLJKWO\ODWHUFUXFLÀ[LRQLPDJHVDQGH[WUDSRODWHVEDFNZDUGWRWKH6DQWD6DELQD SDQHO 2Q WKH EDVLV RI HDUO\VHYHQWKFHQWXU\ SLOJULP DPSXOODH IURP 3DOHVWLQH FUXFLÀ[LRQLQ´(QYLVLRQLQJ&UXFLÀ[LRQ/LJKWIURP6HYHUDO,QVFULSWLRQVDQGWKH3DODWLQH*UDIÀWRµ NovT ² 7XPPLQHOOR/DFURFLÀVVLRQH ,ELG ² 7KHVH SLOJULP DPSXOODH ZKLFK 9LNDQ VHH EHORZ GDWHV WR FD DUH QRW FUXFLÀ[LRQVWKH\VKRZ-HVXV·QLPEHGKHDGRUEXVWKRYHULQJRYHUDQHPSW\FURVVDOWKRXJKWKHWZR ÁDQNLQJWKLHYHVGRKDQJRQFURVVHV 6HH*DU\9LNDQByzantine Pilgrimage Art'XPEDUWRQ2DNV %\]DQWLQH &ROOHFWLRQ 3XEOLFDWLRQV :DVKLQJWRQ '& 'XPEDUWRQ 2DNV &HQWHU IRU %\]DQWLQH
70
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
)LJ 0DJLFDO$PXOHWZLWK&UXFLÀ[LRQ (DVWHUQ0HGLWHUUDQHDQ6\ULD" ODWHQG²UGFHQWXU\C.E. %ORRGVWRQH[[FP %ULWLVK0XVHXP'HSDUWPHQWRI3UHKLVWRU\DQG(XURSH/RQGRQ 00( Photo credit: Trustees of the British Museum
D SDLQWHG VL[WKFHQWXU\ SLOJULP·V UHOLTXDU\ ER[ WKH FUXFLÀ[LRQ SDLQWLQJ LQ WKH 5DEXOOD*RVSHOVC.E. DQGDK\SRWKHWLFDOLPDJHLQWKH&KXUFKRIWKH+RO\ 6HSXOFKUHLQ-HUXVDOHP7XPPLQHOORKDVVXJJHVWHGWKDWWKH6DQWD6DELQDSDQHO GHULYHV IURP DQ (DVWHUQSRVVLEO\ PRQDVWLF&KULVWLDQDUWLVWLFSURWRW\SHHDUOLHU H[DPSOHVRIZKLFKDUHQRZORVW+HUVXJJHVWLRQVKRZHYHUUHPDLQVSHFXODWLYH DQGLQDQ\FDVHWKHFRPSRVLWLRQRIKHUSURSRVHGSDUDOOHOVLQFOXGHPRUHV\PEROLF DQGQDUUDWLYHHOHPHQWVWKDQWKHUHODWLYHO\VWDUN6DQWD6DELQDVFHQH
6WXGLHV &RQWHPSRUDU\ZLWKWKHSLOJULPDPSXOODHKRZHYHULVDWUXHFUXFLÀ[LRQVFHQHRQ D&RSWLFPDJLFDOSDS\UXVLOOXVWUDWLQJ´WKHSUD\HURI-HVXVWKDWKHXWWHUHGXSRQWKHFURVVµ%ULWLVK /LEUDU\/RQGRQ2ULHQWDO0DQXVFULSW SXEOLVKHGLQ$QFLHQW&KULVWLDQ0DJLF&RSWLF7H[WVRI Ritual PowerHG0DUYLQ0H\HUDQG5LFKDUG6PLWK6DQ)UDQFLVFR+DUSHU 2ULJLQDOO\LQWKHWUHDVXU\RIWKH6DQFWD6DQFWRUXPQHDU6W-RKQ/DWHUDQQRZLQWKHFROOHFWLRQ RIWKH0XVHR6DFURRIWKH9DWLFDQ6HH50RUH\´7KH3DLQWHG3DQHOIURPWKH6DQFWD6DQFWRUXPµ LQFestschrift zum sechzigsten Geburtstag von Paul Clemen'VVHOGRUI6FKZDQ ²6HH DOVR9LNDQ´%\]DQWLQH3LOJULPDJH$UWµ²DQGÀJDDOVRWKHFRORUSKRWRJUDSKVLQ+HUEHUW / .HVVOHU DQG -RKDQQD =DFKDULDV Rome 1300: On the Path of the Pilgrim 1HZ +DYHQ &RQQ
SHECKLER AND LEITH
71
)LJ (QJUDYHG*HP&UXFLÀ[LRQZLWK$SRVWOHV 6\ULDQ" PLGIRXUWKFHQWXU\C.E. &DUQHOLDQ [FP %ULWLVK0XVHXP'HSDUWPHQWRI3UHKLVWRU\DQG (XURSH00(² Photo Credit: Trustees of the British Museum
,QWKHFDWDORJWRDUHFHQWH[KLELWLRQRI&KULVWLDQDUW)HOLFLW\+DUOH\DQG-HIIUH\ 6SLHU DOVR VWUXJJOH ZLWK WKH SX]]OLQJ ´UDULW\ RI GHSLFWLRQV RI WKH FUXFLÀ[LRQ LQ &KULVWLDQDUWµ7KH\FRQVLGHUWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQFRQXQGUXPHVSHFLDOO\LQUHODWLRQWR WKUHHHDUO\FUXFLÀ[LRQUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVLQPLQLDWXUHIURPWKH5RPDQ(DVWDPDJLFDO DPXOHWRIWKHODWHVHFRQGHDUO\WKLUGFHQWXU\ZLWK-HVXVRQWKHFURVVÀJ DQG WZRIRXUWKFHQWXU\HQJUDYHGJHPVRQZKLFKWKHFUXFLÀHG-HVXVLVÁDQNHGE\VL[ GLVFLSOHVRQHLWKHUVLGHÀJ +DUOH\DQG6SLHULGHQWLI\WKHDPXOHWDVWKH´HDUOLHVW VXUYLYLQJUHSUHVHQWDWLRQRI-HVXVRQWKHFURVVµDQGVSHFXODWHWKDW´SLFWXUHVRIWKH VXEMHFWQRZORVW PD\KDYHEHHQZLGHVSUHDGHYHQLQWKHODWHVHFRQGRUHDUO\WKLUG FHQWXU\PRVWOLNHO\LQFRQYHQWLRQDO&KULVWLDQFRQWH[WVµ 7KHDPXOHWKRZHYHULVDOVRLQVFULEHGZLWKDPXOWLWXGHRIRFFXOWQDPHVQRW RQO\´6RQ)DWKHU-HVXV&KULVWµEXWDOVRWKH(J\SWLDQGHULYHGBadetophothDQG SatraperkmephtheDPRQJRWKHUV7KHFDWDORJHQWU\FRQFHGHVWKDWWKHDPXOHWFRXOG UHÁHFWWKHDFWLYLW\RIDSDJDQPDJLFLDQZKROLNHWKHIDPLO\RI-HZLVKH[RUFLVWV LQ$FWV²LQFOXGHG-HVXV·QDPHLQKLVUHSHUWRU\RIPDJLFDOSRZHUV The DPXOHWPLJKWHTXDOO\FRPHIURPD-HZLVKRU³JLYHQWKHSHULRG·VÁXLGUHOLJLRXV ERXQGDULHV³-HZLVK&KULVWLDQRFFXOWSUDFWLWLRQHU)RUWKHRULJLQRIWKHHQJUDYHG JHPV+DUOH\QRWXQOLNH7XPPLQHOORORRNVWRWKH(DVWDQGVXJJHVWVWKDWWKHJHPV SURYLGH´UDUHHYLGHQFHIRUWKHH[LVWHQFHRIXQFRQYHQWLRQDO&KULVWLDQLPDJHVDW DUHODWLYHO\HDUO\GDWHLQWKH(DVWHUQSDUWRIWKH5RPDQ(PSLUH6\ULD" µ
6SLHUPicturing the Bible. )HOLFLW\+DUOH\LQWURGXFWLRQWR6HFWLRQ)LYH´7KH&UXFLÀ[LRQµLQLELG +DUOH\DQG6SLHUFDWQR%ULWLVK0XVHXP00(² LQLELG. ² +DUOH\ FDW QR %ULWLVK 0XVHXP 00( ² DQG ÀJ SODVWHU FDVW *HUPDQ $UFKDHRORJLFDO,QVWLWXWH5RPH LQLELG +DUOH\DQG6SLHUFDWQRLQLELG ,ELG² 6HH'DYLG:&KDSPDQ$QFLHQW-HZLVKDQG&KULVWLDQ3HUFHSWLRQVRI&UXFLÀ[LRQ7ELQJHQ 0RKU6LHEHFN ²&KDSPDQFLWHV7DOPXGLFGHEDWHVRYHUWKHOHJLWLPDF\RI´FUXFLÀ[LRQ DUWLFOHVµLQPDJLF+HDOVRPHQWLRQVDVXJJHVWLYHDOEHLWODWHU-HZLVKVSHOOIURPWKH&DLUR*HQL]DZKLFK VSHFLÀHVWKDWDFUXFLÀ[LRQQDLOEHIRUPHGLQWRDVHDODQGHQJUDYHGZLWK´PDJLFZRUGVµ +DUOH\DQG6SLHUFDWQRLQ6SLHUPicturing the Bible
72
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
:LWKUHJDUGWRWKHDPXOHWLWLVLPSRUWDQWWRUHFRJQL]HWKDWPDJLFLQWKH*UHFR 5RPDQZRUOGRIWHQGHSHQGHGRQDQXQGHUO\LQJWUDQVJUHVVLYHHOHPHQWLQYROYLQJ GHPRQVDQGGDQJHUODGHQPDWHULDOVDQGLPDJHV3UHFLVHO\EHFDXVHRILWVLQQDWH JKDVWOLQHVVFUXFLÀ[LRQKDGDUROHLQ*UHFR5RPDQPDJLFZKLFKPD\H[SODLQWKH PRWLYDWLRQEHKLQGWKHDPXOHWLPDJHKHUH,QWKHGolden AssDZLWFK·VSRWLRQ UHTXLUHVQDLOVFRYHUHGZLWKWKHÁHVKRIFUXFLÀHGPHQDQG3OLQ\FLWHVDFURVV QDLODQGDURSHIURPDFURVVLQDOLVWRILQJUHGLHQWVIRUDPXOHWVDQGVSHOOV)URP 3DXORQFKXUFKOHDGHUVFRQGHPQHGRUDWOHDVWZHUHXQFRPIRUWDEOHZLWKWKHXVH
7KLVLVQRWWKHSODFHIRUDGLVFXVVLRQRIWKHNQRWW\SUREOHPRIPDJLF*RRGVWXGLHVLQFOXGH *UDKDP&XQQLQJKDPReligion and Magic: Approaches and Theories1HZ
SHECKLER AND LEITH
73
RIDPXOHWVE\&KULVWLDQVGHVSLWHWKHIDFWWKDWWKLVSUDFWLFHZDVZLGHVSUHDGEHIRUH DQGDIWHU&RQVWDQWLQH )XUWKHUPRUHXQOLNHWKH6DQWD6DELQDSDQHODPXOHWVDQGJHPV DUHSULYDWH DUW$PXOHWV ZHUH FUHDWHG WKURXJKRXW WKH 5RPDQ ZRUOG E\ DUWLVWVSUDFWLWLRQHUV ZKRRIWHQPD\KDYHEHHQUHVSRQGLQJWRORFDOQHHGVDQGDVVXPSWLRQV$VLQWKH FDVH RI WKH %ULWLVK 0XVHXP DPXOHW WKH IUHTXHQWO\ HFOHFWLF PL[WXUH RI -HZLVK &KULVWLDQ*UHFR5RPDQDQG(J\SWLDQGLYLQHQDPHVRQPDJLFDODPXOHWVREVFXUHV WKHUHOLJLRXVDIÀOLDWLRQV RIDQDPXOHWPDNHURUFRQVXPHURUSHUKDSVPRUHWRWKH SRLQWVXJJHVWVÁXLGUHOLJLRXVERXQGDULHV,QVRPHFDVHVDWOHDVWWKHDPXOHWDUWLVWV PD\KDYHEHHQFKDOOHQJHGWRFUHDWHDQXQSUHFHGHQWHGLPDJHZLWKQRH[WDQWYLVXDO SURWRW\SH2QHSUREOHPZLWK+DUOH\·VFRQWHQWLRQDERYH WKDWWKHVHHDUOLHULPDJHV VXJJHVWWKHH[LVWHQFHRI´XQFRQYHQWLRQDOµ&KULVWLDQLPDJHU\LVWKDWGHVSLWHWKHEHVW HIIRUWVRIKHUHVLRORJLVWVOLNH,UHQDHXVRI/\RQV´FRQYHQWLRQDOµ&KULVWLDQLW\OHW DORQH´FRQYHQWLRQDOµ&KULVWLDQLPDJHU\GLGQRW\HWH[LVW)XUWKHUPRUHEHFDXVHVR )RU&KULVWLDQDPXOHWVDQGVSHOOVIURPWKHIRXUWKWKURXJKVHYHQWKFHQWXULHVVHH0H\HUDQG 6PLWKAncient Christian MagicDOVR'DYLG)UDQNIXUWHUReligion in Roman Egypt: Assimilation and Resistance 3ULQFHWRQ 1- 3ULQFHWRQ 8QLYHUVLW\ 3UHVV QRWH HVS S ZKHUH UHJDUGLQJ%LVKRS$WKDQDVLXV·VFRPSODLQWVLQDERXWH[RUFLVPVDWPDUW\UV·VKULQHV)UDQNIXUWHU ZULWHV´$QGVRDOVRLQWKH&KULVWLDQVDLQWVDQGOHDGHUVZKRNLOOHGFXUVHGRUFUDIWHGDPXOHWVLQ WKH PDJLFDO VSHOOV WKDW LQYRNHG HVRWHULF DQJHOV (J\SWLDQ &KULVWLDQLW\ DVVLPLODWHG D XQLYHUVH RI DPELJXRXVSRZHUVµ6HHDOVR0DU\-RDQ:LQQ/HLWK´$PXOHWVµLQNew Interpreter’s Dictionary of the BibleHG.DWKDULQH'RRE6DNHQIHOGHWDO1DVKYLOOH$ELQJGRQ 6HH-HIIUH\6SLHULate Antique and Christian Gems:LHVEDGHQ5HLFKHUW -XVWLQ0HJDWWFDXWLRQVWKDWLQWKH*UHFR5RPDQZRUOGKHDOLQJRIWHQSHUFHLYHGDVPDJLFDO QHHGQRWOHDGWRWKHSDWLHQW·VDGRSWLRQRIWKHKHDOHU·VZRUOGYLHZ´0DJLF+HDOLQJDQG&KULVWLDQLW\µ LQThe Meanings of Magic from the Bible to Buffalo BillHG$P\:\JDQW1HZ
74
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
PXFKVXUYLYLQJ&KULVWLDQDUWFRPHVIURP5RPHLWLVHDV\WRIRUJHWWKDW&KULVWLDQV RFFXSLHGWKHHQWLUHHPSLUHWKURXJKRXWZKLFKWKH\WRRZHUHFUHDWLQJLPDJHV$V &KULVWLDQSDWURQDJHHYROYHGEH\RQGDQinterpretatio christianaRIDYDLODEOH´SDJDQµ LPDJHU\WRH[SOLFLWO\&KULVWLDQLPDJHVDYDULHW\RI´EHVSRNHµ&KULVWLDQLPDJHV LQPLQLDWXUHFRXOGKDYHEHHQFUHDWHGLQGHSHQGHQWO\DQGLQGLYHUVHORFDWLRQVDFURVV WKHYDVW5RPDQ(PSLUHZLWKRQO\DIHZLIDQ\PDNLQJDODVWLQJLPSDFWRQZKDW DIWHUC.E.ZRXOGEHFRPH´RIÀFLDOµ&KULVWLDQDUW 3DXO&RUE\)LQQH\KDVREVHUYHGWKDWWKHUHLVQRHYLGHQFHIRU&KULVWLDQDUWEHIRUH WKH WKLUG FHQWXU\ 1RU LV WKHUH DQ\ HYLGHQFH DW DOO IRU D SXEOLF UHSUHVHQWDWLRQ RI WKH FUXFLÀ[LRQ RI &KULVW EHIRUH 6DQWD 6DELQD·V ÀIWKFHQWXU\ SDQHO³GHVSLWH WKHIDFWWKDWFUXFLÀ[LRQKDGEHHQEDQQHGE\&RQVWDQWLQHDFHQWXU\HDUOLHU The ´WUDGLWLRQDOµ H[SODQDWLRQ IRU WKLV DEVHQFH VHHPV FRUUHFW WR XV &KULVWLDQ DUWLVWV DYRLGHGUHSUHVHQWLQJ&KULVWRQWKHFURVVEHFDXVHLWZDVVKDPHIXO1RQ&KULVWLDQ DOOXVLRQV WR FUXFLÀ[LRQ EHDU WKLV RXW &LFHUR LQ KLV GHIHQVH RI *DLXV 5DELULXV DVVHUWHGWKDW WKHYHU\ZRUG´FURVVµVKRXOGEHIDUUHPRYHGQRWRQO\IURPWKHSHUVRQRID 5RPDQFLWL]HQEXWKLVthoughts, his eyes and his ears)RULWLVQRWRQO\WKH DFWXDORFFXUUHQFHRIWKHVHWKLQJVEXWWKHYHU\PHQWLRQRIWKHPWKDWLVXQZRU WK\RID5RPDQFLWL]HQDQGDIUHHPDQ 3DXO &RUE\ )LQQH\ ´,PDJHV RQ )LQJHU 5LQJV DQG &KULVWLDQ$UWµ Dumbarton Oaks Papers ² 7KHFRPSRVLWLRQDOWHPSODWHIRUWKHWZRIRXUWKFHQWXU\JHPVGHSLFWLQJ-HVXVRQWKHFURVVÁDQNHG E\KLVWZHOYHGLVFLSOHVLVSUREDEO\WKHtraditio legisZKLFKLQYROYHGDV\PPHWULFDODUUDQJHPHQWRI ÀJXUHVÁDQNLQJDFHQWUDOD[LV6HH-HDQ3LHUUH&DLOOHW´1RWHVXUODFRKpUHQFHLFRQRJUDSKLTXHGHV VDUFRSKDJHVGHVGpFHQQLHV²µLQ.LUFKKDLQHUDQG.RFKAkten des Symposiums “Frühchristliche Sarkophage,”²2QERWKJHPVWKHPDVVHGJURXSLQJVRIDSRVWOHVVXJJHVWQRWKLQJVRPXFKDVD %\]DQWLQHOLWXUJLFDOSURFHVVLRQ7KHDSRVWOHVDUHQRWSUHVHQWLQDQ\1HZ7HVWDPHQWDFFRXQWRIWKH FUXFLÀ[LRQVXJJHVWLQJWKDWWKLV´XQKLVWRULFDOµFRPSRVLWLRQZDVPRWLYDWHGE\DVSHFLÀFVWLPXOXV SRVVLEO\WKHSRZHUVWUXJJOHGXULQJWKHIRXUWKFHQWXU\EHWZHHQFKXUFKOHDGHUVDQGLPSHULDODXWKRULW\ ELVKRSVLQSDUWLFXODUFODLPHGWKDWWKH\ZHUHWKHLQKHULWRUVRIDSRVWROLFDXWKRULW\DQDUJXPHQWWKDW XQGHUOLHVWKHtraditio legisDQGPD\KDYHLQVSLUHGWKHVFHQHRQWKHJHPVWKDWOLQNVWKHDSRVWOHVWR &KULVW·VPRVWLPSRUWDQWgestus 3DXO &RUE\ )LQQH\ The Invisible God: The Earliest Christians on Art 1HZWUDQVODWLRQDQGHPSKDVLVRXUV@6HHDOVR&LFHURVerrFUXFLÀ[LRQ LV´WKDWPRVWFUXHODQGGLVJXVWLQJSHQDOW\µ
SHECKLER AND LEITH
75
$PRQJ WKH 5RPDQ XQGHUFODVV &UX[ ZDV D FRPPRQ SURIDQLW\ DQG FOHDUO\ D UHÁH[RIWKHG\QDPLFXQGHUO\LQJ&LFHUR·VDGPRQLWLRQ 6TXHDPLVKQHVVDWWKHLGHDRIFUXFLÀ[LRQDSSDUHQWO\H[WHQGHGWRLPSHULDO5RPDQ UHOLHIVRQWULXPSKDODUFKHVDQGFROXPQVGHSLFWLQJPLOLWDU\YLFWRULHV HYHQWKRXJK 5RPDQDUPLHVFUXFLÀHGWKHLURSSRQHQWVGXULQJVLHJHVDQGUHEHOOLRQV7KH5RPDQV PD\KDYHFUXFLÀHGVRPH-HZLVKUHEHOVGXULQJWKHVLHJHRI-HUXVDOHPEXW FUXFLÀ[LRQV GR QRW DSSHDU DPRQJ WKH LPDJHV RI *HQHUDO7LWXV·V YLFWRU\ RQ KLV WULXPSKDO DUFK RYHUORRNLQJ WKH 5RPDQ )RUXP +HQJHO REVHUYHV ´&UXFLÀ[LRQ ZDVZLGHVSUHDGDQGIUHTXHQWDERYHDOOLQ5RPDQWLPHVEXWWKHFXOWXUHGOLWHUDU\ ZRUOGZDQWHGWRKDYHQRWKLQJWRGRZLWKLWDQGDVDUXOHNHSWTXLHWDERXWLWµ :LWKRXWDIXOODZDUHQHVVRIWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQWDERRLQ5RPDQVRFLHW\WKHPDOLFH EHKLQGWKHZHOONQRZQVHFRQGFHQWXU\GRQNH\KHDGHGFUXFLÀ[LRQYLFWLPRQWKH $OH[DPHQRVJUDIÀWRÀJ RUWKHZD\LQZKLFKWKH%ULWLVK0XVHXPFUXFLÀ[LRQ DPXOHWSDUWLFLSDWHVLQ*UHFR5RPDQVRFLHW\·V´ULFKYRFDEXODU\RIDOWHULW\µFDQQRW EHIXOO\JUDVSHG :KLOH DFNQRZOHGJLQJ WKH VWLJPD DVVRFLDWHG ZLWK FUXFLÀ[LRQ +DUOH\ VHHV D FRQWUDGLFWLRQ EHWZHHQ &KULVWLDQV· ´SXWDWLYHO\ FRQVFLRXV UHIXVDO WR GHSLFW WKH &UXFLÀ[LRQµ DQG ´WKH LQWHUQDO IRFXV RI WKH HDUO\ FKXUFK ZKHUH WKH SUHDFKLQJ RI &KULVW FUXFLÀHG ZDV FHQWUDOµ +RZHYHU pace 3DXO·V GHÀDQW DVVHUWLRQ WKDW &KULVWLDQV´SURFODLP&KULVWFUXFLÀHGDVWXPEOLQJEORFNWR-HZVDQGIRROLVKQHVVWR *HQWLOHVµ&RU DSDOSDEOHWHQVLRQH[LVWVEHWZHHQWH[WDQGLPDJHEHWZHHQ 3DXO·VDGYRFDF\RIWKH´ZLVGRPRI&KULVWFUXFLÀHGµDQGWKHGHYHORSLQJ&KULVWLDQ LFRQRJUDSKLFDOWUDGLWLRQZKLFKFRXOGQRWDIIRUGWRDVVRFLDWHWKHFXOWXUDOO\RIIHQVLYH LPDJHRIFUXFLÀ[LRQZLWKWKH-HVXVPRYHPHQW&OHPHQWRI$OH[DQGULDEFD C.E. IRUH[DPSOHQHYHUUHIHUVWRWKHFURVVLQKLVFDWDORJRIGHYLFHVVXLWDEOHIRU &KULVWLDQVHDOULQJV,QWKHYLVXDOUHFRUGHYHQLQWRWKHÀIWKFHQWXU\WKHFUXFLÀHG
+HQJHOThe Cross of the Son of God²ZLWKFLWDWLRQV&RRN´(QYLVLRQLQJ&UXFLÀ[LRQµ Q FLWHVDJUDIÀWRLQWKH6WDELDQEDWKVDW3RPSHLLWKDWUHDGV´*HWQDLOHGWRDFURVVµDQG VXJJHVWVWKDWWKLVZDVWKH5RPDQHTXLYDOHQWRI´*RWRKHOOµ +HQJHOThe Cross of the Son of God²DQGSDVVLP -RVHSKXVJ.W.² +HQJHOThe Cross of the Son of God $V+HQJHOSRLQWVRXWLELG WKHSURWDJRQLVWVRI+HOOHQLVWLFURPDQFHVDUHRIWHQWKUHDWHQHG ZLWK GHDWK E\ FUXFLÀ[LRQ EXW DUH DOZD\V UHVFXHG LQ RQH ZD\ RU DQRWKHU RQO\ RXWULJKW HYLOGRHUV SHULVKRQWKHFURVV ,IWKH$OH[DPHQRVJUDIÀWRKDGDYLVXDOSURWRW\SHLWZDVPRUHOLNHO\WREHIRXQGLQgenres mauditsVXFKDVJUDIÀWLRUPDJLFWKDQLQ&KULVWLDQFLUFOHV -RQDWKDQ=6PLWK·VSKUDVHLQ´7UDGLQJ3ODFHVµLQ0H\HUDQG0LUHFNLAncient Magic and Ritual Power +DUOH\LQ6SLHUPicturing the Bible Paedagogus ² 3DXO &RUE\ )LQQH\ GLVFXVVHV WKLV SDVVDJH DW OHQJWK LQ ´,PDJHV RQ)LQJHU5LQJVµ²
76
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
)LJ /LQHGUDZLQJDIWHUWKH$OH[DPHQRV*UDÀWWR )URPWKHZDOORIWKH,PSHULDO3DODFHRQWKH3DODWLQH+LOO5RPH 6HFRQGWKLUGFHQWXU\"C.E. Drawing Courtesy of Amy Bartlett-Wright, www.AmyBartlettWright.com
&KULVWLVDOOEXWLQYLVLEOHZKHUHDV&KULVWLDQZULWHUVGLVFXVVHGWKHFURVVDQG&KULVW·V FUXFLÀ[LRQLQDYDULHW\RIFRQWH[WV &UXFLÀ[LRQLQIDFWZDVQRWWKHRQO\PRGHRISXEOLFKXPLOLDWLRQDQGWRUWXUHWKDW &KULVWLDQVDYRLGHGUHSUHVHQWLQJLQYLVXDOPHGLD:KLOHHDUO\&KULVWLDQPDUW\URORJLHV GHVFULEHGLQJUXHVRPHLIORYLQJGHWDLOWKHWRUPHQWVRI&KULVWLDQVLQWKHDUHQD FRUUHVSRQGLQJO\JUDSKLFimagesRIWRUWXUHGRQRWVHHPWRDSSHDUXQWLOWKHIRXUWK FHQWXU\ DW WKH HDUOLHVW &KULVWLDQ ZULWHUV DFFRUGLQJ WR (OL]DEHWK$ &DVWHOOL SULYLOHJHGPHPRU\DQGZRUGVRYHUWKH´LGRODWU\µRIPDWHULDOUHSUHVHQWDWLRQV (XVHELXVDQG$XJXVWLQHW\SLFDOO\FDOOIRU&KULVWLDQVWRFUHDWHLQ(XVHELXV·VZRUGV ´DQLPSHULVKDEOHPRQXPHQWµWRVDLQWHGPDUW\UVQRW´E\VWDWXHVRIVWRQHQRUE\ SLFWXUHVRIPLQJOHGSLJPHQWVQRUE\FRORUVRULPDJHVRIOLIHOHVVWHUUHVWULDOWKLQJV EXWE\WKHWUXHZRUGXWWHUHGEHIRUH*RGµ
&URVVHVQRWFUXFLÀ[HVDUHWKHUXOHLQH[WDQWFKXUFKPRVDLFVRIWKHIRXUWKWRVL[WKFHQWXULHV IRUH[DPSOHWKHÁRRURI+LQWRQ6W0DU\(QJODQGWKF DQGWKHDSVHVRI6DQWD3XGHQ]LDQDFD DQGRI6DQW·$SROOLQDUHLQ&ODVVH -HDQ0DUF3ULHXU/DFURL[FKH]OHV3qUHVGX,,e au début du IVe siècle) 6WUDVERXUJ8QLYHUVLWp 0DUF%ORFK (OL]DEHWK$&DVWHOOLMartyrdom and Memory: Early Christian Culture Making1HZ6\ULDF@ SUHIDFH FLWHG LQ &DVWHOOLMartyrdom and Memory6HHDOVR$XJXVWLQHSerm
SHECKLER AND LEITH
77
(YHQLPDJHVRIWKHFURVVRQLWVRZQ GRQRWPDNHDVLJQLÀFDQWDSSHDUDQFHLQ &KULVWLDQ FRQWH[WV XQWLO &RQVWDQWLQH·V DGRSWLRQ RI WKH Chi-Rho DV KLV LPSHULDO LQVLJQLDDQGQRWDEO\XQGHU&RQVWDQWLQHWKHÀUVWIRUPXODWLRQRIWKH1LFHQH&UHHG C.E. DIÀUPVRQO\WKDW&KULVWVXIIHUHGDQGGLHGQRWWKDWKHGLHGRQWKHFURVV +RZHYHU-XVWLQ0DUW\UZULWLQJLQWKHVHFRQGFHQWXU\GLGQRWKHVLWDWHWRGUDZ DSDUDOOHOEHWZHHQWKHLPSHULDOtropaeumDQGWKHFURVVRI&KULVW,QDQLURQLF WXUQRIDIIDLUV7HUWXOOLDQFD²C.E. DQG0LQXFLXV)HOL[Á²C.E. DUHDWSDLQVWRSURYLGHDSDODWDEOHinterpretatio graecaIRU WKHFURVVE\GUDZLQJ DQDORJLHVWRFURVVOLNHLPDJHVDQGREMHFWVZLWKSRVLWLYHFRQQRWDWLRQVLQ*UHFR 5RPDQFXOWXUHDVKLS·VPDVWRUDQRDUHGVKLSDtropaeumDSHUVRQSUD\LQJHYHQ SDJDQVWDWXHVRIJRGV$QRWKHUSDOOLDWLQJVWUDWHJ\ZDVWRGLYHUWWKHIRFXVIURP &KULVW·VFUXFLÀ[LRQWR2OG7HVWDPHQW´SURSKHWLFµW\SHVFHQHVVXFKDVWKHVWRULHVRI 0RVHV·XSUDLVHGDUPVLQWKHEDWWOHDJDLQVW$PDOHN([RG² DQGWKHEUD]HQ VHUSHQWRI0RVHV1XP² $OVRDWWUDFWLYHZDVWKHGRFHWLFJQRVWLFLGHDWKDW -HVXVRQO\VHHPHGWRVXIIHURQWKHFURVVRUHYHQWKDWWKHFURVVZDVDV\PEROIRU VRPHWKLQJHOVH:KLOHWKHFKXUFKIDWKHUVGHVSLWHWKHLUYDULRXVHYHQFRQWUDGLFWRU\ WKHRORJLFDODJHQGDVYLHZHGWKHFURVVDVDV\PERORIVDOYLÀFSRZHULQWKHZRUGV RI-HDQ0DUF3ULHXU´WKHDSRORJHWLFSUHRFFXSDWLRQLVQHYHUIDUDQGWKHLUFRQFHUQ LVWRPDNHWKHFURVVFRPSUHKHQVLEOHDQGLISRVVLEOHDFFHSWDEOHWRWKHGHWUDFWRUV RI&KULVWLDQLW\ZKHWKHU-HZLVKRU3DJDQµ $Q DGGLWLRQDO H[SODQDWLRQ IRU WKLV GLVMXQFWLRQ EHWZHHQ WKH HDUO\ &KULVWLDQ WH[WXDODQGYLVXDOUHFRUGUHJDUGLQJFUXFLÀ[LRQOLHVLQWKH*UHFR5RPDQUKHWRULF RIPDVFXOLQLW\LQZKLFKFUXFLÀ[LRQFRQVWLWXWHGDSULPDU\VLJQLÀHURISDVVLYLW\ DQG HPDVFXODWLRQ &ROOHHQ 0 &RQZD\ KDV REVHUYHG WKDW EDUULQJ WKH SDVVLRQ DFFRXQWVWKHPXFKYDXQWHGIRFXVRQWKHFURVVLQWKH1HZ7HVWDPHQWKDVEHHQ H[DJJHUDWHG)RUH[DPSOHVKHREVHUYHVRI3DXOWKDWRXWVLGH*DODWLDQVDQG² &RULQWKLDQV ´GLUHFW UHIHUHQFHV WR WKH FURVV DUH QRW DV XELTXLWRXV DV WKH VWURQJ 5+6WRUFK´7KH7URSK\DQGWKH&URVV3DJDQDQG&KULVWLDQ6\PEROLVPLQWKH)RXUWKDQG )LIWK&HQWXULHVµByzantion ²HVS² $FRPSOLFDWHGVWRU\PRVWHDVLO\DFFHVVLEOHLQ/XNH7LPRWK\-RKQVRQThe Creed: What Christians Believe and Why it Matters1HZHPSKDVLVRXUV@ -HDQ0DUF3ULHXU/DFURL[FKH]OHV3qUHV>WUDQVODWLRQRXUV@$VFXOSWXUDOFDVHLQSRLQWLV WKHVRFDOOHG´3DVVLRQ6DUFRSKDJXVµGDWHGFD9DWLFDQLQY6SLHUPicturing the Bible FDW QR SS ² ZKHUH WKH FHQWUDO HPSW\ FURVV KDV ´PRUSKHGµ LQWR D Chi-Rho labarum WRSSHG E\ D YLFWRU\ ZUHDWK SDWHQWO\ DQ LPDJH RI WULXPSK ,Q WKH OHIW UHJLVWHU &KULVW FDUULHV KLV FURVV RYHU ZKLFK KRYHUV D VLPLODU YLFWRU·V ZUHDWK DV LI -HVXV· PDUFK WR *ROJRWKD FRQVWLWXWHG DQ LPSHULDOWULXPSK 6WHSKHQ'0RRUH´¶20DQ:KR$UW7KRX"·µ
78
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
KHUPHQHXWLFDOWUDGLWLRQRIKLV¶WKHRORJ\RIWKHFURVV·ZRXOGVXJJHVWµ:KHQ3DXO VSHDNVH[SOLFLWO\RIWKHFURVVLQ*DODWLDQVDQG²&RULQWKLDQVKHLVGHIHQGLQJ KLPVHOIDJDLQVWDFFXVDWLRQVRIZHDNQHVVRUODFNRIDXWKRULW\+HSDUULHVWKHVH FKDUJHVE\UHVRUWLQJWRDSKLORVRSKLFDOLGHDOSRSXODUL]HGLQ+HOOHQLVWLF6WRLFLVP WKDWWKHKLJKHVWGHJUHHRIPDQOLQHVVDFFUXHVWRRQHZKRZLOOLQJO\VXIIHUVDQGGLHV RQEHKDOIRIRWKHUV$FFRUGLQJO\3DXODVVHUWVWKDWZKLOHH[WULQVLFDOO\-HVXV·GHDWK RQWKHFURVVPLJKWDSSHDUKXPLOLDWLQJLQDFWXDOLW\KLVVXIIHULQJDQGYLFDULRXVGHDWK GHPRQVWUDWHGWKHKHURLFVHOIVDFULÀFHRIDWUXHPDQ,QWKHVHOHWWHUV3DXODOLJQV KLVRZQDSSDUHQWZHDNQHVVWKHIHPLQLQHTXDOLW\SDUH[FHOOHQFH ZLWKWKHQRELOLW\ RI&KULVW·VSDVVLYHHQGXUDQFH 7HOOLQJO\ IRU RXU DUJXPHQW &RQZD\ DVVHUWV WKDW WKH ´FRQFHSW RI WKH QREOH PDQO\GHDWKDQGWKHHPDVFXODWLQJFUXFLÀ[LRQDUHQRWLGHDVWKDWDUHHDVLO\KHOG WRJHWKHULQWKHJHQGHUHGLGHRORJ\RIWKHÀUVWFHQWXU\7KHJHQGHUHGLPSOLFDWLRQV RIERWKLPDJHVDUHOLNHVLPLODUSROHVRIDPDJQHWUHSHOOLQJUDWKHUWKDQDWWUDFWLQJ RQHDQRWKHUµ(DUO\&KULVWLDQZULWHUVFRXOGFRQWUROWKHGLVFRXUVHRIWKHFURVVE\ SURYLGLQJDQ\QXPEHURIFXOWXUDOO\DFFHSWDEOHLQWHUSUHWDWLRQVIRUWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQ RI&KULVW9LVXDOUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVRQWKHRWKHUKDQGOLNHPRYLHVWRGD\ZHUHIDLU JDPHIRULQWHUSUHWDWLRQE\DQ\RQHZLWKH\HVWRVHH(DUO\&KULVWLDQVFRXOGQRWULVN DVVRFLDWLQJWKHPVHOYHVZLWKDQLPDJHIURPZKLFKWKHPDMRULW\RIWKHLUQHLJKERUV ZRXOGDYHUWWKHLUH\HV $Q\DWWHPSWWRXQGHUVWDQGWKHEDFNJURXQGWRWKH6DQWD6DELQDSDQHOUHTXLUHVD ZLOOLQJQHVVWRZRUNZLWKUDWKHUWKDQDJDLQVWWKLVWHQVLRQEHWZHHQWH[WDQGLPDJH 2XUUHVHDUFKVXSSRUWV5RELQ-HQVHQ·VSURSRVDOWKDW´WKHUHLVLQIDFWDFRPSOHWH DEVHQFH RI FUXFLÀ[LRQ LPDJHU\ LQ HDUO\ &KULVWLDQLW\µ :H DUH LQWHUHVWHG LQ IROORZLQJXSRQKHUDGPRQLWLRQWKDW´LIQDUUDWLYHVXEMHFWVIXQFWLRQHGV\PEROLFDOO\ RU PHWDSKRULFDOO\ LQ DGGLWLRQ WR EURDGO\ LOOXVWUDWLQJ SDUWLFXODU QDUUDWLYHV QHZ SRVVLELOLWLHVHPHUJH³VRPHRIZKLFKPLJKWEHVXEWOHRUYHLOHGUHIHUHQFHVWRWKH FURVVµ,WLVZLWKWKLVSHUVSHFWLYHLQPLQGWKDWZHVKRXOGUHFRQVLGHUWKH6DQWD 6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQ
&ROOHHQ0&RQZD\Behold the Man: Jesus and Greco-Roman Masculinity2[IRUG2[IRUG 8QLYHUVLW\3UHVV &RQZD\·VFKDSWHURQ3DXODQGWKH3DXOLQHWUDGLWLRQDUJXHVWKDWLQWKH GHXWHURSDXOLQH HSLVWOHV WKH FUXFLÀHG -HVXV UHFHGHV EHIRUH WKH H[DOWHG UHVXUUHFWHG LPSHULDO &KULVW ,Q&ROQRW&KULVWEXWWKHVLQQHU·VGHFUHHRIDFFXVDWLRQLVQDLOHGWRWKHFURVVZKLOHLQ &ROWKHEORRGRIWKHFURVVEULQJVSHDFHZLWKQRVXJJHVWLRQRIVXIIHULQJ7KH3DVWRUDO(SLVWOHV DYRLG PHQWLRQ RI WKH FURVV DFFRUGLQJ WR &RQZD\ EHFDXVH WKH\ DUH LQWHUHVWHG LQ UHIXWLQJ HDUO\ VHFRQGFHQWXU\DFFXVDWLRQVRI&KULVWLDQVKDPHIXOQHVV ,ELG ,ELG ,ELG ,ELG -HQVHQUnderstanding Early Christian Art ,ELG
SHECKLER AND LEITH
79
)LJ 3DQHOIURPDQ,YRU\&DVNHW7KH&UXFLÀ[LRQRI&KULVW´0DVNHOO,YRULHVµ FDC.E.,5RPH,WDO\[FP Photo Credit: Trustees of the British Museum
Q7KH6DQWD6DELQD3DQHODQG5RPDQ&KULVWLDQ,FRQRJUDSK\ )LUVWEHFDXVHWKH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQUHOLHIKDLOVIURP5RPHLWLVLPSRUWDQW WRFRQVLGHULWZLWKLQLWV5RPDQ&KULVWLDQFRQWH[W:KHUHDVWKHQDWLRQDOLW\RIWKH 6DQWD6DELQDVFXOSWRULVQRWUHOHYDQWWRRXUTXHVWLRQRIWKHIRUPDOPRGHOIRUWKLV LPDJHDUWSURGXFHGLQ5RPHGXULQJWKHIRXUWKDQGÀIWKFHQWXULHVLV7KHRQO\ 5RPDQFUXFLÀ[LRQVFHQHFRQWHPSRUDU\ZLWKWKH6DQWD6DELQDGRRUVDSSHDUVRQ RQHRIIRXUQDUUDWLYHSDQHOVRIWKHVRFDOOHG0DVNHOOLYRULHV²C.E. LQWKH %ULWLVK0XVHXPÀJ 2ISDUWLFXODULQWHUHVWRQWKLVSULYDWHO\FRPPLVVLRQHG 5RPDQS\[LVLVWKHQDUUDWLYHLYRU\UHOLHIRIWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQZKLFKFOHDUO\VKRZV ERWKWKHHQWLUHFURVVDQG&KULVW:KLOHERWKWKH6DQWD6DELQDZRRGHQUHOLHIDQG WKHLYRU\UHOLHIGHSLFWFUXFLÀ[LRQVKRZHYHUPDQ\GLIIHUHQFHVDUHDSSDUHQW7KH 6DQWD6DELQDSDQHOLVSXEOLFZKHUHDVWKHLYRU\FDVNHWLVDSULYDWHZRUNRIDUWWKH LYRU\VKRZVERWKWKHIXOOFURVVDQG&KULVWKDQJLQJRQLWZKLOHRQWKHZRRGHQGRRU SDQHO&KULVWVHHPVWRVWDQGRQWKHJURXQGZLWKWKHFURVVLWVHOIEDUHO\YLVLEOH,Q DGGLWLRQXQOLNHWKHVWDUN6DQWD6DELQDSDQHOWKHLYRU\KDVDFRPSOH[QDUUDWLYH FRPSRVLWLRQLQYROYLQJQRWRQO\WKHFUXFLÀ[LRQEXWWKHVXLFLGHRI-XGDVDQGPRUH LPSRUWDQWO\WKH9LUJLQ0DU\DQG-RKQDVZHOODVWKHFHQWXULRQ
%ULWLVK0XVHXPZHEVLWH´3DQHOIURPDQ,YRU\&DVNHW7KH&UXFLÀ[LRQRI&KULVWµKWWSZZZ EULWLVKPXVHXPRUJH[SORUHKLJKOLJKWVKLJKOLJKWBREMHFWVSHBPODSSDQHOBIURPBDQBLYRU\BFDVNHWBWKDVS[ DQG)HOLFLW\+DUOH\´,YRU\3ODTXHVZLWKWKH3DVVLRQDQG5HVXUUHFWLRQRI&KULVWWKH¶0DVNHOO,YRULHV· µ LQ6SLHUPicturing the BibleFDWQR²
80
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
%RWK LPDJHV GR VKRZ FRPSRVLWLRQDO LQQRYDWLRQV DOEHLW GLIIHUHQW RQHV 7KH LYRU\MX[WDSRVHVWKHLJQRPLQLRXVO\GHDGDQGKDQJLQJ-XGDVZLWKDQRSHQH\HG &KULVWWULXPSKDQWO\DOLYHRQWKHFURVV WKHZRRGHQGRRUSDQHORQWKHRWKHUKDQG VKRZVDIURQWDO&KULVWDOLYHEHWZHHQWKHWZRWKLHYHVZLWKRQO\WKHEDUHVWKLQWRI DFURVVYLVLEOHEHKLQGHDFKRIWKHWKUHHÀJXUHV,QIDFWDOOWKUHHÀJXUHVDSSHDUWR EHVWDQGLQJVWXUGLO\UDWKHUWKDQKDQJLQJ,QERWKZRUNVWKHDUWLVWVDUHJUDSSOLQJ ZLWKDQHZVFHQHWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQDQGKDYHEURXJKWWZRYHU\GLIIHUHQWVROXWLRQV WRWKHFRPSRVLWLRQDOSUREOHP2QWKHLYRU\UHOLHIWKHDUWLVWKDVFKRVHQWRRPLWWKH WZR WKLHYHV DQG LQVWHDG KDV MX[WDSRVHG WZR VHSDUDWH QDUUDWLYH PRPHQWV RI WKH SDVVLRQ+HUHWKHFURVVLVDIXOO\DUWLFXODWHGSDUWRIWKHVFHQHWKHYLHZHULVLQQR GRXEWWKDWWKLVLV&KULVW·VFUXFLÀ[LRQDQGLVHQFRXUDJHGWRPHGLWDWHRQWKHLURQ\ RI-XGDVKDQJLQJGHDGRQDOLYLQJWUHHZKLOHWKHOLYLQJ&KULVWKDQJLQJRQD´GHDG WUHHµWULXPSKVRYHUGHDWK ,I WKH 6DQWD 6DELQD SDQHO KDV QR YLVXDO SUHFHGHQWV LQ HDUOLHU &KULVWLDQ UHSUHVHQWDWLRQVRIWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQZKHUHWKHQVKRXOGRQHWXUQWRÀQGDPRGHOIRU LWVFUXFLÀ[LRQFRPSRVLWLRQ"%HFDXVHWKHSDQHOLVD5RPDQZRUNRIDUWLWPDNHV VHQVHWRH[DPLQH&KULVWLDQ5RPDQDUWIURPWKHSUHFHGLQJWZRFHQWXULHVDQGWKH WZRPRVWIUXLWIXOVRXUFHVRI&KULVWLDQDUWIURPWKHWKLUGDQGIRXUWKFHQWXULHVDUH FDWDFRPESDLQWLQJVDQGVDUFRSKDJL,QRXUVHDUFKIRUDWKHRUHWLFDOSURWRW\SHIRU WKH6DQWD6DELQDVFHQHZHGHYHORSHGDEDVLFWHPSODWHFRQVLVWLQJRI v WKUHHVWDQGLQJIURQWDOPDOHÀJXUHV v ÀJXUHVZLWKRXWVWUHWFKHGDUPV v DQLFRQRJUDSKLFFRQWH[WRIVDOYDWLRQ
:LWKWKLVWHPSODWHLQKDQGLWZDVDUHODWLYHO\VLPSOHPDWWHUWRÀQGDIDPLOLDU VFHQHZLWKDOOWKHQHFHVVDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVDQGWKDWVFHQHDSSHDUVERWKLQFDWDFRPE SDLQWLQJVDQGRQVDUFRSKDJXVUHOLHIVWKH7KUHH%R\VLQWKH)LHU\)XUQDFHIURP 'DQLHO7KHVHLPDJHVH[DFWO\PDWFKHGDOOWKHUHTXLVLWHIRUPDODQGLFRQRJUDSKLF FULWHULD)RUH[DPSOHWKH7KUHH%R\VIUHVFRLQWKHHDUO\IRXUWKFHQWXU\Velatio FKDPEHURIWKH&DWDFRPERI6DQWD3ULVFLOODSURYLGHVDVWULNLQJSDUDOOHOWRWKH6DQWD 6HH 3DXO &RUE\ )LQQH\ The Invisible God ² ZKR H[SODLQV ZK\ &KULVWLDQ DUW RQO\ DSSHDUHGLQWKHWKLUGFHQWXU\DQG-HQVHQUnderstanding Early Christian Art²IRUDGLVFXVVLRQ RI WKH ODWH HPHUJHQFH RI FUXFLÀ[LRQ LPDJHV DQG KRZ &KULVWLDQ VXEMHFW PDWWHU GUHZ RQ HDUOLHU GHFRUDWLYH DQG SDJDQ LPDJHU\ DQG ELEOLFDO VWRULHV ,QYHVWLJDWLQJ SURWRW\SHV RU IRUPDO WHPSODWHV IRUFUXFLÀ[LRQFRPSRVLWLRQVLVDPHWKRGRORJ\HPSOR\HGE\-DV(OVQHULQ´¶3KDUDRK·V$UP\*RW 'URZQGHG·6RPH5HÁHFWLRQVRQ-HZLVKDQG5RPDQ*HQHDORJLHVLQ&KULVWLDQ$UWµ7KH(VWHOOH 6KRKHW%UHWWPDQ/HFWXUHGHOLYHUHGDWWKH0XVHXPRI)LQH$UWV%RVWRQ$SULO $ORQJWKH VDPHOLQHVYDQGHQ+RHNDQG+HUUPDQQLGHQWLÀHG'DQLHOLQWKHOLRQ·VGHQDVWKHLFRQRJUDSKLFDO SURWRW\SH IRU UHSUHVHQWDWLRQV RI 7KHFOD·V PLUDFXORXV SUHVHUYDWLRQ IURP ZLOG EHDVWV ´7KHFOD WKH %HDVW)LJKWHUµHVS² $VGDWHGE\1RUEHUW=LPPHUPDQQWerkstattgruppen römischer Katakombenmalerei0QVWHU $VFKHQGRUII $QHDUOLHUGDWLQJODWHVHFRQGWRHDUO\WKLUGFHQWXU\ LVIRXQGLQ-HQVHQ Understanding Early Christian Art DQG&'DJHQV´¶SURSRVGX&XELFXOXPGHODYHODWLR!·µ Rivista di Archeologia Cristiana ²'HVSLWH=LPPHUPDQQ·VODWHUGDWLQJRIWKHIUHVFR
SHECKLER AND LEITH
81
6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQÀJVDE 7KLVVFHQHUHPDLQHG SRSXODULQERWKFDWDFRPE GHFRUDWLRQDQG&KULVWLDQVDUFRSKDJLWKURXJKRXWWKHIRXUWKFHQWXU\C.E. %HIRUHWXUQLQJWRDGHWDLOHGFRPSDULVRQEHWZHHQWKH7KUHH%R\VLPDJHVDQGWKH 6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQSDQHOLWLVLPSRUWDQWWRFRQVLGHUWKHSDQHO·VFRPSRVLWLRQ 7KH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQSDQHOVKRZVWKHODUJHUVWDQGLQJIURQWDO&KULVWÀJXUHLQ WKHFHQWHUÁDQNHGE\WKHWZRVPDOOHUWKLHYHVZKRDUHVLPLODUO\IURQWDODQGVWDQGLQJ 7KHIDFLDOIHDWXUHVRIDOOWKUHHÀJXUHVDUHUXGLPHQWDU\DWEHVWDOWKRXJKWKHLUH\HVDUH PDQLIHVWO\RSHQ&KULVWKRZHYHUKDVORQJKDLUDQGDEHDUGZKLOHWKHWZRWKLHYHV DSSHDUVKRUWKDLUHGDQGFOHDQVKDYHQ$OOWKUHHÀJXUHVKDYHRXWVWUHWFKHGDUPVDQG ZHDULGHQWLFDOORLQFORWKV%HKLQGWKHÀJXUHVLVDZDOORIUHFWDQJXODUVWRQHV(DFK ÀJXUHLVVHSDUDWHGIURPWKHRWKHUE\DYHUWLFDOZRRGHQSLHUWKDWVXSSRUWVDZRRGHQ WULDQJXODUSHGLPHQWDERYHKLVKHDG%RWKWKLHYHV·KHDGVDUHEHORZWKHSHGLPHQW ZKLOH&KULVW·VKHDGH[WHQGVLQWRDQGLVIUDPHGE\WKHWULDQJXODUSHGLPHQW,QWKH SHGLPHQWDERYHWKHWKLHIRQ&KULVW·VSURSHUULJKWLVDVPDOODUFKHGZLQGRZ :KLOHWKLVLVFOHDUO\DFUXFLÀ[LRQVFHQHWKHRQO\LQGLFDWLRQVRIDFURVVDUHVPDOO UHFWDQJXODUEORFNVEHKLQGWKHKDQGVRIWKHÀJXUHVWKHQDLOVLQWKHKDQGVDQGD ELWRIWKHFURVVEDUHO\H[WHQGLQJDERYHHDFKWKLHI·VKHDG$OOWKUHHÀJXUHVVWDQG VTXDUHO\RQWKHERWWRPHGJHRIWKHSDQHOZLWKRQO\WKHVXJJHVWLRQRIDsuppedaneum VFXOSWHGLQWKHFHQWHURIHDFKÀJXUH·VIHHW([FHSWIRUKLVKHLJKWDQGKLVORQJKDLU &KULVWDQGWKHWZRWKLHYHVDUHDOPRVWLGHQWLFDO $FRPSDULVRQRIWKH6DQWD6DELQDSDQHOZLWKWKH7KUHH%R\VIUHVFRIURPWKH 6DQWD 3ULVFLOOD Velatio FKDPEHU UHYHDOV VWULNLQJ VLPLODULWLHV )RU LQVWDQFH WKH JHQHUDOFRPSRVLWLRQRIERWKLPDJHVFRQWDLQVWKUHHVWDQGLQJLGHQWLFDOO\FORWKHG PDOHÀJXUHVZLWKDUPVVWUHWFKHGRXWLQWKHKRUL]RQWDOorantSRVLWLRQ$SURPLQHQW GLIIHUHQFHEHWZHHQWKHLPDJHVLVWKHJUHDWHUVL]HDFFRUGHGRQWKH6DQWD6DELQD SDQHOWRWKHFHQWUDOÀJXUHRI&KULVWZKLFKFUHDWHVDYLVXDOGLVUXSWLRQDFURVVWKH LPDJHHVSHFLDOO\EHFDXVHWKHDUPVDQGKDQGVRIWKHÀJXUHVDUHQRZDWGLIIHUHQW OHYHOV HYHQ VR DV QRWHG DERYH DOO WKUHH ÀJXUHV LQ WKH FUXFLÀ[LRQ VFHQH ORRN UHPDUNDEO\DOLNH/RFDWHGLQWKHGDUNXSSHUOHIWFRUQHURIWKHGRRUDQGZLWKQR DFWXDOFURVVGLVWLQJXLVKDEOHLQWKHVFHQHWKH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQSDQHOFDQ HDVLO\EHPLVWDNHQIRUD7KUHH%R\VLQWKH)LHU\)XUQDFHLPDJHXQWLORQHQRWLFHV WKHODFNRIÁDPHV WKH6DQWD3ULVFLOOD&DWDFRPELVRQHRIWKHHDUOLHVWRIWKH5RPDQFDWDFRPEVKDYLQJEHHQFRQYHUWHG IRU&KULVWLDQXVHGXULQJWKHWKLUGFHQWXU\6SLHUPicturing the Bible 6HH -RVHI (QJHPDQQ ´=XU ,QWHUSUHWDWLRQ GHU 'DUVWHOOXQJHQ GHU 'UHL -QJOLQJH LQ %DE\ORQ LQ GHU IUKFKULVWOLFKHQ .XQVWµ LQ Akten des Symposiums früchristliche Sarkophage Marburg 30.6–4. 7. 1999 HG .DULQ .LUFKKDLQHU DQG *XQWUDP .RFK 0DLQ] =DEHUQ ² IRU DQ H[FHOOHQWVXPPDU\DQGHYDOXDWLRQRIWKHOLWHUDWXUHRQWKH7KUHH%R\VLPDJHV&DUOR&DUOHWWL´,WUH JLRYDQLHEUHLGLEDELORQLDQHOO·DUWH&ULVWLDQDDQWLFDµQuaderni di Vetera Christianorum SURYLGHVWKHPRVWFRPSOHWHFDWDORJRIWKH7KUHH%R\VLPDJHVLQFOXGLQJSDWULVWLFVRXUFHVDVZHOO DVSDLQWLQJVDQGUHOLHIV :H DFFHSW WKDW WKH FXUUHQW ORFDWLRQ RI WKH FUXFLÀ[LRQ SDQHO LQ WKH XSSHUOHIW FRUQHU RI WKH GRRUZDVFRQVFLRXVO\LQWHQGHGLQRUGHUWRUHGXFHLWVYLVLELOLW\7XPPLQHOORVXJJHVWVWKDWWKHFXUUHQW ORFDWLRQLVSUREDEO\QRWRULJLQDOEXWSURSRVHVQRDOWHUQDWLYH/DFURFLÀVVLRQH 6HH:ROIJDQJ
82
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
)LJD 7KUHH
)LJE 6DQWD6DELQD&UXFLÀ[LRQ3DQHO Photo Credit: William Storage and Laura Maish
SHECKLER AND LEITH
83
%RWKWKHFDWDFRPEDUWLVWDQGWKHVFXOSWRURIWKHGRRUSDQHOFKRVHQRWWRLQFOXGH DGGLWLRQDOQDUUDWLYHDWWULEXWHVWKDWZRXOGPRUHHDVLO\LGHQWLI\WKHVWRU\LQTXHVWLRQ )RUH[DPSOHZKLOHVRPHRWKHUFRQWHPSRUDU\LPDJHVRIWKH7KUHH%R\VLQFOXGH DSURPLQHQWIXUQDFHDQH[DPSOHRIZKLFKLVIRXQGLQWKHVDPH6DQWD3ULVFLOOD &DWDFRPE WKHVelatio FKDPEHULPDJHGRHVQRWLQFOXGHDIXUQDFHRQO\ÁDPHV VRWKDWWKHWKUHHER\VVWDQGRQWKHJURXQG6RWRRGRHVWKHVFXOSWRURIWKH6DQWD 6DELQDSDQHOGRZQSOD\WKHFURVVHVEHFDXVHVLPLODUO\&KULVWDQGWKHWZRWKLHYHV VWDQGRQWKHJURXQGOLQH )RUERWKWKH6DQWD3ULVFLOODVelatioFKDPEHULPDJHRIWKH7KUHH%R\VDQGWKH 6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQUHOLHIWKHDUWLVWVIROORZHGWKHELEOLFDOWH[WWRLOOXVWUDWHWKH 2OGDQG1HZ7HVWDPHQWVWRULHV7KHVelatioFKDPEHU7KUHH%R\VLPDJHVKRZV WKUHHIXOO\FORWKHGPDOHÀJXUHVVWDQGLQJLQÁDPHVWKHHVVHQWLDOVRIWKHVWRU\LQ 'DQLHO6LPLODUO\WKH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQLPDJHDOVRUHOLHVRQWKHELEOLFDO WH[WIRULWVYLVXDOLFRQRJUDSK\$OOWKUHHRIWKHV\QRSWLFJRVSHOVGHVFULEH-HVXV FUXFLÀHGEHWZHHQWZRFULPLQDOV0DWW0DUN/XNH² ,QWKH SDQHOKRZHYHUWKHDUWLVWVLPSO\VKRZVWZRFUXFLÀHGPHQÁDQNLQJWKHFUXFLÀHG FHQWUDO ÀJXUH RI -HVXV$W WKLV HDUO\ SRLQW LQ WLPH WKH DUWLVW KDV QR LQWHUHVW LQ GHSLFWLQJQDUUDWLYHGHWDLOVVXFKDVWKHGLVWLQFWLRQEHWZHHQWKHJRRGDQGEDGWKLHI WKHFHQWXULRQ0DU\DQG-RKQDWWKHIRRWRIWKHFURVVRURWKHUE\VWDQGHUV 7KH WUDQVODWLRQ RI WKH WKUHH orant ÀJXUHV LQ WKH ÀHU\ IXUQDFH LQWR WKH WKUHH FUXFLÀHGÀJXUHVKDVLWVURRWVLQHDUO\&KULVWLDQWKHRORJLFDOW\SRORJ\$VHDUO\DVWKH PLGVHFRQGFHQWXU\OHWWHUFRQFHUQLQJWKHPDUW\UVRI/\RQVDQG9LHQQH&KULVWLDQ ZULWHUVSHUFHLYHGDSDUDOOHOEHWZHHQorantSUD\HUDQGFUXFLÀ[LRQ,QWKHWKLUG FHQWXU\7HUWXOOLDQRI&DUWKDJHZURWHRIWKHorantJHVWXUH´:HKRZHYHUQRWRQO\ UDLVH RXU KDQGV EXW HYHQ H[SDQG WKHP DQG WDNLQJ RXU PRGHO IURP WKH /RUG·V
.HPSChristliche Kunst. Ihre Anfänge, ihre Strukturen0XQLFK6FKLUPHU0RVHO ² DQGIRUDFKDUWLOOXVWUDWLQJKLVSURSRVHGFRQÀJXUDWLRQRIWKHGRRUSDQHOV,Q.HPS·VFKDUWWKH FUXFLÀ[LRQLVPRYHGORZHURQWKHGRRUDQGWRWKHH[WUHPHULJKWRIWKHOHIWGRRUSDQHOPDNLQJLW PRUHUHDGLO\YLVLEOH-HUHPLDVDOVRVXJJHVWVDQRWKHUORFDWLRQDie Holztür der Basilika² ² $OVRVHH-HDQ0LFKHO6SLHVHU´/HSURJUDPPHLFRQRJUDSKLTXHGHVSRUWHVGH6DLQWH6DELQHµJournal des savants -DQYLHU-XLQ ² HVS ² ZKHUH KH VXJJHVWV WKDW WKH FXUUHQW ORFDWLRQ RIWKHSDVVLRQVFHQHPD\EHWKHRULJLQDORQH5HJDUGOHVVRILWVRULJLQDOSRVLWLRQWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQ·V UHOHJDWLRQWRRQHRIWKHVPDOOHUSDQHOVVXJJHVWVUHWLFHQFHZLWKUHJDUGWRWKHLPDJH 6SLHUPicturing the BibleFDWQRV$DQG%² 7KHVWRU\RFFXUVRQO\LQ/XNH² :HGRQRWDJUHHZLWK7XPPLQHOORZKRGHWHFWV LQGLFDWLRQVRIDJRRGDQGEDGWKLHILQWKHGRRUV·GHSLFWLRQ6KHLGHQWLÀHVWKHJRRGWKLHIDVWKHWDOOHU RIWKHWZRÁDQNLQJÀJXUHVWKHÀJXUHRQ&KULVW·VOHIW/DFURFLÀVVLRQH )pOL[0''DUV\DOVR SRLQWVRXWWKHJRRGDQGEDGWKLHIDQGLGHQWLÀHVWKHJRRGWKLHIDVWKHWDOOHURIWKHWZRWKLHYHVSanta Sabina5RPH(GL]LRQL5RPD $VZHDUJXHWKHDUWLVWRIWKLVSDQHOLVXQLQWHUHVWHGLQVXFK ÀQHGLVWLQFWLRQV,QDQ\FDVHWKHDUWLVWLFFRQYHQWLRQDVHDUO\DVWKHVL[WKFHQWXU\5DEXOD*RVSHOV ZDVWRSODFHWKHJRRGWKLHIDW&KULVW·VULJKW 7KHRULJLQDOOHWWHUGDWHVWR C.E(XVHELXVTXRWHVWKHOHWWHULQZKLFKWKHZULWHUFRPSDUHG WKHPDUW\U%ODQGLQDDVVKHSUD\HGLQWKHDUHQDRI/\RQVWRRQH´KDQJLQJRQDFURVVµHist. eccl. ²
84
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
SDVVLRQHYHQLQSUD\HUZHFRQIHVVWR&KULVWµ/LNHZLVH0LQXFLXV)HOL[DOVRWKLUG FHQWXU\ GHVFULEHVWKHFURVV´:HDVVXUHGO\VHHWKHVLJQRIDFURVVQDWXUDOO\LQ WKHVKLSZKHQLWLVFDUULHGDORQJZLWKVZHOOLQJVDLOVZKHQLWJOLGHVIRUZDUGZLWK H[SDQGHGRDUVDQGZKHQWKHPLOLWDU\\RNHLVOLIWHGXSLWLVWKHVLJQRIDFURVVDQG ZKHQDPDQDGRUHV*RGZLWKDSXUHPLQGZLWKKDQGVRXWVWUHWFKHGµ,QYLHZRI VXFKFRQVFLRXVFRPSDULVRQV RIorantÀJXUHVWR&KULVWRQWKHFURVVWKHERUURZLQJ RIWKH7KUHH%R\VLPDJHDVDSURWRW\SHIRUWKHÀUVWSXEOLF5RPDQFUXFLÀ[LRQVFHQH LVQRWVXUSULVLQJ 0RUHRYHUFRQVLGHUHGWKHPDWLFDOO\WKH7KUHH%R\VPRWLIOLNHWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQ VFHQHLVDQLPDJHRIVDOYDWLRQDQGWKXVWKHUHOLDQFHRQWKH7KUHH%R\VFRPSRVLWLRQ IRUWKHÀUVWSXEOLFLPDJHRI&KULVW·VFUXFLÀ[LRQPDNHVVHQVHERWKIRUPDOO\DQG LFRQRJUDSKLFDOO\7KHHDUOLHUSDLQWLQJKDVDOOWKHHOHPHQWVQHFHVVDU\IRUDFUXFLÀ[LRQ VFHQHDWRUWXUHPRWLIÁDPHV WKUHHPDOHÀJXUHVVWDQGLQJDQGIDFLQJIRUZDUGDQG orantDUPV,QDGGLWLRQERWKLPDJHVDUHEDVHGRQWKHELEOLFDOWH[WDQGZHNQRZ WKDWWKHHDUO\FKXUFKIDWKHUVXVHGWKHLPDJHRIWKH7KUHH%R\VDVDEDVLFW\SHRI &KULVWLDQPDUW\UGRPDQGVDOYDWLRQ 7KH 7KUHH %R\V DV D W\SH VFHQH RI &KULVWLDQ PDUW\UGRP DSSHDUV ÀUVW LQ 1 ClementODWHÀUVWFHQWXU\ ZKHUHWKHDXWKRUGHVFULEHVWKHRUGHDORIWKH7KUHH %R\VLQWKHFRQWH[WRI*RG·VVDYLQJSRZHU7HUWXOOLDQIROORZVWKLVWUHQGLQWKH WKLUGFHQWXU\ZKHQKHGHVFULEHVWKH7KUHH%R\V·UHIXVDOWRZRUVKLSWKHLGRORI.LQJ 1HEXFKDGQH]]DU´7KHUHLVQRQHFHVVLW\IRURXUPDNLQJDQVZHUWRWKLVFRPPDQG RI\RXUV)RURXU*RGZKRPZHZRUVKLSLVDEOHWRGHOLYHUXVIURPWKHIXUQDFH RIÀUHDQGIURP\RXUKDQGVµ,QGHHGLQWKHUHSUHVHQWDWLRQRIWKH7KUHH%R\V IURPWKHVelatioFKDPEHURI6DQWD3ULVFLOODWKHLQFOXVLRQRIDGRYHZLWKDSLHFH RIIROLDJHLQLWVEHDNFRQÀUPVDFFRUGLQJWR0DULO\Q6WRNVWDGWKDWWKHÁDPHVDUH LQFDSDEOHRIKDUPLQJEHOLHYHUV2Q&KULVWLDQVDUFRSKDJLWKHIUHTXHQWSDLULQJRI WKH7KUHH%R\VZLWK1RDKKHLJKWHQVWKHVLJQLÀFDQFHRIVDOYDWLRQIRUERWKLPDJHV 5RELQ-HQVHQVXJJHVWVWKDWERWKVFHQHVHPSKDVL]H´UHVFXHDVUHVXUUHFWLRQUDWKHU WKDQWKHVDOYDWLRQRIWKHULJKWHRXVDORQH7KHVWRU\RIWKHWKUHHFKLOGUHQLQWKH IXUQDFHLVDGHPRQVWUDWLRQRIWKHSUHVHUYDWLRQRUUHVXUUHFWLRQRIWKHSK\VLFDOERG\ DQGVHHQDORQJZLWK1RDKLQKLVDUNERWKLPDJHVVHUYHDVW\SRORJLHVRIEDSWLVP ZKLFKLWVHOIFRQWDLQVWKHSURPLVHRISK\VLFDOUHVXUUHFWLRQ µ 7KHVH WKHPHV RI VDOYDWLRQ FRPH WRJHWKHU LQ DQ H[WUDRUGLQDU\ H[DPSOH WKH VDUFRSKDJXV RI -XQLXV %DVVXV VHFXUHO\ GDWHG E\ LWV LQVFULSWLRQ WR C.E. ,Q WKH VSDQGUHOV RI WKH ORZHU UHJLVWHU DUH VPDOO ELEOLFDO VFHQHV EDGO\ GDPDJHG XQIRUWXQDWHO\ LQZKLFKODPEVVXUSULVLQJO\VXEVWLWXWHIRUKXPDQDFWRUV7KH´WKUHH
7HUWXOOLDQOr. 0LQXFLXV)HOL[Oct. 1 Clement 7HUWXOOLDQScorp. 0DULO\Q6WRNVWDGMedieval Art%RXOGHU&ROR:HVWYLHZ -HQVHQUnderstanding Early Christian Art (QJHPDQQ´,QWHUSUHWDWLRQGHU'DUVWHOOXQJHQµ ²DQG&DUOHWWL´,WUHJLRYDQLHEUHLµ²
SHECKLER AND LEITH
85
ODPEVLQWKHÀHU\IXUQDFHµDSSHDURQWKHRXWHUOHIWVSDQGUHODQGDUHPDWFKHGZLWKWKH VSDQGUHOVFHQHRQWKHRXWHUULJKWWKHUDLVLQJRI/D]DUXV%HFDXVHWKLVVDUFRSKDJXV GDWHVDIWHUC.E.ZHFDQVXUPLVHWKDWWKHODPEVDUHDV\PERORI&KULVWWKH/DPE RI*RGDQGPD\DOVRVWDQGIRUWKH&KULVWLDQFRPPXQLW\2QWKHVDUFRSKDJXVWKH SDLULQJRIWKHWKUHH\RXWKVODPEVZLWKWKHUHVXUUHFWLRQRI/D]DUXVFRPPXQLFDWHV VDOYDWLRQWKHPHVDQGXOWLPDWHO\OHDGVWKHYLHZHUWRXQGHUVWDQGWKHVFHQHVDVW\SHV RI&KULVW·VUHVXUUHFWLRQ$FFRUGLQJWR0DOERQWKHWKUHH\RXWKVDQGWKHUDLVLQJRI /D]DUXVV\PEROL]HIRU&KULVWLDQVWKH´VDOYDWLRQIURPWKHÁDPHVWKDWWKUHDWHQOLIH >DQG@SUHÀJXUHVDOYDWLRQIURPWKHWRPEWKDWPDUNVWKHHQGRIOLIHµ6XUHO\WKHQ WKH7KUHH%R\VLPDJHVHIIHFWLYHO\VHUYHDVDSURWRW\SHIRUWKHXOWLPDWH&KULVWLDQ VFHQHRIPDUW\UGRPDQGVDOYDWLRQ&KULVW·VFUXFLÀ[LRQ
Q7HFKQLFDO6LPLODULWLHV $QRWKHU VLPLODULW\ EHWZHHQ VRPH RI WKH 7KUHH %R\V VDUFRSKDJXV UHOLHIV DQG WKH 6DQWD 6DELQD FUXFLÀ[LRQ SDQHO OLHV RXWVLGH WKH IRUPDO LFRQRJUDSKLF DQG WKHRORJLFDO WLHV DOUHDG\ GLVFXVVHG ,W LV LQVWHDG D WHFKQLFDO RU IXQFWLRQDO OLQN :KHQ H[DPLQLQJ WKH FUXFLÀ[LRQ SDQHO ZH XQGHUVWRRG WKH DEEUHYLDWHG DOPRVW VKRUWKDQGZRRGHQVTXDUHVEHKLQGWKHKDQGVRIDOOWKUHHÀJXUHVDVVLPSO\DUHVXOW RIWKHDUWLVW·VUHOXFWDQFHWRVKRZDQHQWLUHFURVV:KLOHWKLVLVSUREDEO\WUXHDFORVH LQVSHFWLRQRIVHYHUDORIWKH5RPDQVDUFRSKDJXVUHOLHIVÀJD VXJJHVWHGWRXVD WHFKQLFDOUHDVRQIRUWKHVWUDQJH6DQWD6DELQDZRRGHQEORFNV7KHVFXOSWRUVRIWKH VDUFRSKDJXVUHOLHIVVROYHGWKHSUREOHPRIEULQJLQJWKHER\V·UDLVHGKDQGVIRUZDUG WRWKHVDPHSODQHDVWKHLUIXOOHUERGLHVE\OHDYLQJDVPDOOVWRQHEORFNEHKLQGWKH KDQGV%UDFHGLQWKLVPDQQHUWKHKDQGVZHUHOHVVOLNHO\WREUHDNRIIDQGWKH\ ZHUHPRUHUHDOLVWLFDOO\LQOLQHZLWKWKHÀJXUHV·ERGLHV 7KLVWHFKQLFDOVROXWLRQWRDVFXOSWXUDOSUREOHPIRXQGRQVRPHRIWKH7KUHH%R\V VDUFRSKDJLKDVSHUKDSVEHHQJUDIWHGRQWRWKH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQSDQHO,Q RWKHUZRUGVWKHVDUFRSKDJXVEUDFHKDVEHFRPHWKHLQGLFDWLRQIRUWKHFURVVÀJ E 3HUKDSVWKHVFXOSWRURIWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQUHOLHIDOVRVFXOSWHGVDUFRSKDJL(YHQ LIKHGLGQRWKHZDVVXUHO\IDPLOLDUZLWKWKH7KUHH%R\VVDUFRSKDJXVVFHQHVWKDW XVHGWKLVWHFKQLFDOPHWKRGWREUDFHWKHÀJXUHV·KDQGV
6HH(OL]DEHWK0DOERQThe Iconography of the Sarcophagus of Junius Bassus3ULQFHWRQ1- 3ULQFHWRQ8QLYHUVLW\3UHVV ²IRUDFRPSOHWHGLVFXVVLRQRIWKHVSDQGUHOVFHQHV ,ELG² ,ELG² ,ELG 6HHIRUH[DPSOH9DWLFDQ0XVHR3LR&ULVWLDQRDQG6HHDOVR´6DUFRSKDJXV /LGZLWK1RDKDQGWKH7KUHH
86
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
)LJD 'HWDLO7KH7KUHH
)LJE 'HWDLO6DQWD6DELQD&UXFLÀ[LRQ3DQHO Photo Credit: Bill Storage and Laura Maish
Q3DSDO3DWURQDJH" 1RWRQO\DUHWKHUHIRUPDOWKHRORJLFDODQGWHFKQLFDOUHDVRQVIRUWKHXVHRIWKH 7KUHH%R\VDVDWHPSODWHIRUWKH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQSDQHOEXWLWLVZRUWK FRQVLGHULQJ WKH TXHVWLRQ RI SDWURQDJH DV ZHOO 3RSH &HOHVWLQH GXULQJ ZKRVH SRQWLÀFDWH6DQWD6DELQDZDVFRQVWUXFWHGKDGFORVHWLHVWRWKHFHPHWHULDOEDVLOLFD HUHFWHGE\3RSH6\OYHVWHU,UHLJQHG² C.E. RYHUWKHFDWDFRPERI6DQWD 3ULVFLOOD ,Q IDFW &HOHVWLQH OLNH 6\OYHVWHU DQG WKUHH ODWHU SRQWLIIV /LEHULXV ²C.E.6LULFLXV²C.E.DQG9LJLOLXV²C.E. ZDVRULJLQDOO\ EXULHGDW6DQWD3ULVFLOOD7KHVDFUHGQHVVRIWKH6DQWD3ULVFLOODORFDWLRQSUHGDWHV HYHQWKHHUHFWLRQRI3RSH6\OYHVWHU·VFHPHWHULDOEDVLOLFDDW6DQWD3ULVFLOODEHFDXVH WZRHDUOLHUSRSHV0DUFHOOLQXV²C.E. DQG0DUFHOOXV²C.E. ZHUH DOUHDG\EXULHGKHUH%HFDXVHVRPDQ\HDUO\SRQWLIIVFKRVHEXULDOKHUHWKHHDUO\ H[FDYDWRUVSURSRVHGWKDW6DQWD3ULVFLOODKDGDFRQQHFWLRQWRWKHSODFHZKHUH6W 6HH2UD]LR0DUXFFKLLa basilica papale del cimitero di Priscilla ritrovata ed in parte ricostruita dalla Commissione di Archeologia sacra 5RPH/LEUHULD6SLWK|YHU HVS² 6HH LELG ² IRU GLVFXVVLRQ RI SDSDO LQVFULSWLRQV DQG ² IRU WRPE ORFDWLRQV 6HH DOVR)UDQFHVFR7RORWWL,O&LPLWHURGL3ULVFLOOD6WXGLRGLWRSRJUDÀDHDUFKLWHWWXUD 9DWLFDQ&LW\ 6RFLHWj´$PLFLGHOOH&DWDFRPEHµ ²DQGHVS²ZKHUHKHDUJXHVIRUWKHORFDWLRQ ² DQG HVS ² ZKHUH KH DUJXHV IRU WKH ORFDWLRQ RIWKHSDSDOEXULDOVLQDQRFWDJRQDOURRPRIWKHFDWDFRPEDQGQRWLQWKHEDVLOLFDRI6W6\OYHVWHU DV RULJLQDOO\ WKRXJKW E\ WKH HDUO\ H[FDYDWRUV RI WKH FDWDFRPE *LRYDQQL %HUQDUGR GH 5RVVL DQG 2UD]LR0DUXFFKL )RU0DUFHOOLQXVVHH2UD]LR0DUXFFKL´,O ,OVHSROFURGHO3DSD0DUFHOOLQRQHOFLPLWHURGL3ULVFLOODµ VHSROFUR GHO 3DSD 0DUFHOOLQR QHO FLPLWHUR GL 3ULVFLOODµ µ Nuovo Bulletino di archeologia cristiana DQGIROORZLQJ)RU0DUFHOOXVVHH'XFKHVQH /LEHU3RQWLÀFDOLV0DUXFFKLLa basilica papale del Cimitero di Priscilla²DQG7RORWWL Il Cimitero di Priscilla² ²
SHECKLER AND LEITH
87
3HWHUWUDGLWLRQDOO\WKHÀUVWSRSHZDVNQRZQWRKDYHSUHDFKHGDQGEDSWL]HGPDNLQJ WKLVFHPHWHU\DVXLWDEOHUHVWLQJSODFHIRUODWHUSRQWLIIV $GGLWLRQDO YLVXDO HYLGHQFH RI WKH SDSDO FRQQHFWLRQ WR 6DQWD 3ULVFLOOD DQG SUHVXPDEO\LWVGHFRUDWLRQLVDQRZORVWPLGIRXUWKFHQWXU\IUHVFRLQWKH6DQWD 3ULVFLOODFDWDFRPEWKDWGHSLFWHGWKHDSRVWROLFVXFFHVVLRQWKHtraditio legis&KULVW JLYLQJWKHODZWR3HWHUDQG3DXO7KLVIUHVFRZDVRIWHQFLWHGDVYLVXDOHYLGHQFH IRU6W3HWHU·VHDUO\WLHVZLWKWKLVORFDWLRQ,QDUHFHQWVWXG\/LQGD6XH*DODWH PHQWLRQVWKHORVWIUHVFRDQGWKHQVXJJHVWVWKDWWKHIUHVFRVFHQHVLQWKH Velatio FKDPEHU LQ 6DQWD 3ULVFLOOD LOOXVWUDWH HSLVRGHV IURP WKH VHFRQGFHQWXU\ Acts of Peter:KHWKHUWKHVHDWHGPDOHÀJXUHLQWKHVelatioIUHVFRLV6W3HWHURUQRW WKHÀJXUHLVVKRZQLQDSRVLWLRQRIDXWKRULW\VHDWHGRQDWKURQHOLNHFKDLU7KLVLV WKHVDPHFKDPEHUWKDWFRQWDLQVWKH7KUHH%R\VLPDJHGLVFXVVHGDERYHZKLFKVR VWULNLQJO\UHVHPEOHVWKHFRPSRVLWLRQRIWKH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQ,WLVFHUWDLQO\ FRQFHLYDEOH WKDW &HOHVWLQH D SRSH ZKR FKRVH WR EH EXULHG LQ WKH VDPH VDFUHG ORFDWLRQ³6DQWD3ULVFLOOD³ZKHUHSUHYLRXVSRQWLIIVZHUHLQWHUUHGZRXOGKDYHEHHQ IDPLOLDUZLWKWKHLPDJHVLQWKHFDWDFRPE$OWKRXJKQRDUFKDHRORJLFDORUDUFKLYDO HYLGHQFHH[LVWVWRVXEVWDQWLDWHWKLVSURSRVDOLWLVQRWXQUHDVRQDEOHWRLPDJLQHWKDW &HOHVWLQHKLPVHOI³LQWLPDWHO\IDPLOLDUZLWKERWKWKHFDWDFRPERI6DQWD3ULVFLOOD
0DUXFFKLLa basilica papale² 6HHLELGIRUDQH[WHQVLYHGLVFXVVLRQRI3HWHU·VFRQQHFWLRQWR3ULVFLOOD6HH7RORWWLIl Cimitero di Priscilla²IRUWKHORFDWLRQDQGGLVFXVVLRQRIWKHORVWtraditio ² IRU WKH ORFDWLRQ DQG GLVFXVVLRQ RI WKH ORVW legisIUHVFR /LQGD6XH*DODWHPHQWLRQVWKHORVWIUHVFRDQGVXJJHVWVWKDWWKHFKDPEHUDWWKHFDWDFRPERI 6DQWD3ULVFLOODZKHUHWKHVelatioLVORFDWHGLVDQRWKHULQVWDQFHLQZKLFKPLUDFOHVRI3HWHUQDUUDWHG LQ WKH VHFRQGFHQWXU\ Acts of Peter DUH GHSLFWHG 6KH SURSRVHV WKDW WKH WZR ÁDQNLQJ VFHQHV DUH GHSLFWLRQVRIUHVXUUHFWLRQPLUDFOHVSHUIRUPHGE\6W3HWHU$FFRUGLQJWR*DODWHWKHVFHQHRQWKH OHIWGHSLFWVWKHUHVXUUHFWHGVHQDWRUDQGKLVPRWKHUEULQJLQJRIIHULQJVWR3HWHUActs of Peter 7KHVXFNOLQJPRWKHUDQGFKLOGVFHQHRQWKHULJKWVKHLQWHUSUHWVDVWKHWDONLQJEDE\HSLVRGHLQWKH Acts of Peter ´7KH $SRVWOH 3HWHU LQ 5RPH"µ Archaeology Online News, -DQXDU\ KWWSZZZDUFKDHRORJ\RUJRQOLQHQHZVSHWHUKWPO )RURWKHULQWHUSUHWDWLRQVRIWKHVelatioLPDJHU\ VHH1LFROD'HQ]H\The Bone Gatherers%RVWRQ%HDFRQ ²DQGZKRVXJJHVWVWKDW LQWHUSUHWDWLRQVRIWKHVelatioLPDJHVDVHLWKHUDPDUULDJHFHUHPRQ\RUWKHFRQVHFUDWLRQRIDFKXUFK YLUJLQDUHLQFRUUHFW6KHSURSRVHVWKDWWKHLPDJHRQWKHOHIWVKRZVWKHGHFHDVHGZRPDQLQWKHDFW RIUHDGLQJEHIRUHDELVKRSDQDFWWKHZRPDQZDQWHGWRSRUWUD\EHFDXVHLWZDVERWK´OHDUQHGDQG SLRXVµ 'DJHQV LGHQWLÀHV WKH GHSLFWLRQV DV WKH ÀUVW UHSUHVHQWDWLRQ RI D &KULVWLDQ PDUULDJH 0DUXFFKL LGHQWLÀHG WKH VHDWHG PDOH FKXUFK ÀJXUH GHSLFWHG RQ WKH OHIW RI WKH YHLOHG orant ZRPDQDVDSRSHDQGXVHGWKLVLPDJHDVZHOODVRWKHULQFLVHGJUDIÀWLRID´FDWKHGUDµWRSURSRVH DFRQQHFWLRQEHWZHHQ3HWHUDFFRUGLQJWRWUDGLWLRQWKHÀUVWSRSHDQG6DQWD3ULVFLOODLa basilica papale del Cimitero di Priscilla² &HOHVWLQHKLPVHOILVNQRZQWRKDYHFRPPLVVLRQHGSDLQWLQJVGHSLFWLQJWKH&RXQFLORI(SKHVXV DW 6W 6\OYHVWHU·V FHPHWHULDO EDVLOLFD RYHU 6DQWD 3ULVFLOOD 'H 5RVVL ÀUVW PHQWLRQHG WKH SDLQWLQJV LQDQDUWLFOHSXEOLVKHGLQLQWKHBullettino di archeologia cristiana,,GVHU ² 6HH7RORWWL²ZKRGRHVQRWGLVFRXQWWKHH[LVWHQFHRISDLQWLQJVFRPPLVVLRQHGE\&HOHVWLQH LQ WKH FHPHWHULDO EDVLOLFD DQG UHFRUGHG LQ WKH OHWWHU RI 3RSH +DGULDQ WR &KDUOHPDJQH 6HH DOVR 0DUXFFKLGuida del cimitero Priscilla3DULV'HVFOpH 'DUV\SRLQWVRXWWKDWWKHÀUVW WZROLQHVRIWKH6DQWD6DELQDLQVFULSWLRQVHHQDERYH DOOXGHWRWKH&RXQFLORI(SKHVXVFDOOHG E\&HOHVWLQHDQGDWZKLFKKHVXFFHHGHGLQVHFXULQJWKHSULPDF\RI5RPHRYHUWKHRWKHUELVKRSV Santa Sabina²
88
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
DQGWKH&KXUFKRI6DQWD6DELQD³FKRVHWKHLFRQRJUDSKLFDOSURWRW\SHRIWKH7KUHH %R\VIRUWKH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQSDQHO
Q&RQFOXVLRQ 7KH VHDUFK IRU D VLQJOH LFRQRJUDSKLF SURWRW\SH EHKLQG WKH YDULRXV DQG TXLWH GLIIHUHQWUHSUHVHQWDWLRQVRIWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQRI&KULVW³ZKHWKHURQDPDJLFDODPXOHW IURP(J\SWDGRRUSDQHORIWKH&KXUFKRI6DQWD6DELQDLQ5RPHDVPDOOLYRU\ ER[RUWKH6\ULDQ5DEXOD*RVSHOV³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À[LRQLQWKHERG\RIZKDW$YHULO&DPHURQKDVFDOOHG ´&KULVWLDQGLVFRXUVHµWKHQWRSDUDSKUDVH&DPHURQZHPXVWDYRLGJLYLQJDIDOVH LPSUHVVLRQRI&KULVWLDQXQDQLPLW\LIZHZLVKWRGRMXVWLFHWRWKHVSUHDGRIWKDW GLVFRXUVH 7KHIDFWWKDWWKHHDUOLHVWVXUYLYLQJ&KULVWLDQDUWLVFRQFHQWUDWHGLQ5RPHFDQ DOVRFUHDWHDGLVWRUWLQJOHQVWKURXJKZKLFKWRFRQWHPSODWH&KULVWLDQLPDJHU\ZKHQ DUWLVWLFWUDGLWLRQVLQRWKHUDUHDVRIWKHHPSLUHKDYHQRWVXUYLYHGWRDQ\JUHDWH[WHQW ,QRWKHUZRUGVWKHUHZHUHSUREDEO\DQXPEHURIGLIIHUHQW´LQVSLUDWLRQVµUDWKHUWKDQ VRPHVLQJOH´ORVWµWUDGLWLRQIRUWKHLPDJHVRIWKHFUXFLÀ[LRQWKDWVWDUWWRDSSHDU LQWKHHDUO\ÀIWKFHQWXU\LQFOXGLQJWKH6DQWD6DELQDFUXFLÀ[LRQ(YHQLQ5RPH DVZHKDYHVHHQWZRÀIWKFHQWXU\FUXFLÀ[LRQVFHQHVKDYHGLIIHUHQWLQVSLUDWLRQV 7KH0DVNHOO,YRU\YHUVLRQSUREDEO\UHÁHFWVOHDUQHGWKHRORJLFDOUKHWRULFDERXWWKH FUXFLÀ[LRQSHUKDSVDKRPLO\WKDWGUHZDSDUDOOHOEHWZHHQ-HVXV·JRRGGHDWKDQG -XGDV·VEDGRQH2QWKHRWKHUKDQGWKHSURWRW\SHIRUWKH6DQWD6DELQDSDQHOZDV DZLGHO\NQRZQSRSXODULPDJHRIVDOYDWLRQWKH7KUHH%R\VLQWKH)LHU\)XUQDFH :LWK QR HVWDEOLVKHG ´FRQYHQWLRQµ IRU WKH FUXFLÀ[LRQ VFHQH DUWLVWV DQG SDWURQV ZHUH IDFHG ZLWK WKH FKDOOHQJH RI FUHDWLQJ D QHZ FRPSRVLWLRQ DOPRVW³EXW QRW TXLWH³IURPVFUDWFK
$YHULO &DPHURQ Christianity and the Rhetoric of Empire: The Development of Christian Discourse %HUNHOH\ 8QLYHUVLW\ RI &DOLIRUQLD 3UHVV 7KLV FRPPHQW LV j SURSRV RI WKH ÀUVWDQGVHFRQGFHQWXULHVEXWDSSOLHVWRWKHWKLUGWKURXJKÀIWKFHQWXULHVDVZHOO $VIRUWKHVL[WKDQGVHYHQWKFHQWXU\FUXFLÀ[LRQLPDJHVSUHVHQWHGE\7XPPLQHOOR9LNDQ·V ZRUNRQSLOJULPDJHDUWVXJJHVWVWKDW´(DVWHUQµ H[DPSOHVDURVHLQFRQQHFWLRQ ZLWK SLOJULPDJH WR WKH+RO\/DQG :K\WKH6DQWD6DELQDDQG0DVNHOO&UXFLÀ[LRQVDSSHDULQ5RPHZKHQWKH\GRLVDVXEMHFW ZHZLOOEHLQYHVWLJDWLQJIXUWKHU
Annihilation and DeiÀcation in Beguine Theology and Marguerite Porete’s Mirror of Simple Souls Juan Marin Harvard University
In 1309 ecclesiastical leaders condemned as heresy Marguerite Porete’s rejection of moral duty, her doctrine that “the annihilated soul is freed from the virtues.”1 They also condemned her book, the Mirror of Simple Souls, which includes doctrines associated decades earlier with a “new spirit” heresy spreading “blasphemies” such as that “a person can become God” because “a soul united to God is made divine.”2 In his study, The Heresy of the Free Spirit, Robert E. Lerner identiÀes these two doctrines of annihilation and deiÀcation as characteristic of the “free spirit” heresy condemned at the 1311 Council of Vienne. The council claimed that this heresy’s sympathizers belonged to an “abominable sect of certain evil men known as beghards and some faithless women called beguines.”3 Lerner found that this group was composed of a disproportionate number of women, including Marguerite Porete. Many of the men were also involved with the group of pious laywomen known as beguines.4 Lerner shows that among those charged with heresy, many sympathized with a “ ‘free-spirit style’ of affective mysticism particularly congenial to thirteenth century religious women.”5 He suggests that beguines in particular 1 Quod anima adnichilata dat licentiam virtutibus. “Paris Condemnation,” quoted in Joanne Maguire Robinson, Nobility and Annihilation in Marguerite Porete’s Mirror of Simple Souls (Albany, N.Y.: State University of New York Press, 2001) 109. 2 Bernard McGinn, The Essential Writings of Christian Mysticism (New York: Modern Library, 2006) 491. 3 McGinn, “Ad Nostrum,” in Essential Writings, 493. See also Robert E. Lerner, The Heresy of the Free Spirit (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1972). 4 Lerner, Heresy, 229, 35. 5 Lerner, introduction to Herbert Grundmann, Religious Movements in the Middle Ages: The Historical Links between Heresy, the Mendicant Orders, and the Women’s Religious Movement in
HTR 103:1 (2010) 89–109
90
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
radicalized affective spirituality into what he calls an “extreme mysticism.”6 Here I wish to follow Lerner’s suggestion that we ought to search for the roots of Porete’s doctrines among the beguines. I will argue that distinctive doctrines of annihilation and deiÀcation sprouted from a fertile beguine imagination, one that nourished Porete’s own distinctive and inÁuential ideas in the Mirror of Simple Souls.7 It is among the beguines that we Ànd the Àrst instance in Christianity of a women’s community creating an original form of theological discourse.
Q Annihilation and DeiÀcation in Beguine Theology Readers of Bernard McGinn’s massive multivolume opus on the history of Christian mysticism may have noticed something peculiar. Whenever he describes a mystical doctrine using adjectives such as “strong” or “daring,” either he is referring to a doctrine taught by a woman mystic or, if it is taught by a man, he somehow connects it to one taught by a woman.8 To mention one example, in the case of Johannes Tauler’s radical ideas about divine union, McGinn concludes: “Tauler’s rich teaching on the mutual abyss of love . . . is scarcely conceivable without the profound and daring teaching about union with God Àrst advanced by the women mystics of the thirteenth century.”9 Tauler was heavily inÁuenced by Meister Eckhart, who, as Amy Hollywood has shown, appropriated ideas from beguines the Twelfth and Thirteenth Century, with the Historical Foundations of German Mysticism (Notre Dame, Ind.: University of Notre Dame Press, 1995). 6 Lerner, Heresy, 61 [italics mine]. 7 In this I am revisiting some of the ground already covered by Robert E. Lerner in his “The Image of Mixed Liquids in Late Medieval Mystical Thought,” Church History 40 (1971) 403. Lerner’s focus is on blurring the line between orthodox and heretical uses of liquid imagery. I will extend the discussion to include beguine authors and their relation to Porete. For Porete’s relation to other medieval authors, especially concerning her nobility motif, see Robinson, Nobility and Annihilation, 1–26. 8 Among the many examples that I cannot discuss here we Ànd that “Jacopone da Todi’s daring formulations regarding overwhelming love, divine nothingness, and a state of sinlessness beyond all willing suggest interesting comparisons with Angela of Foligno (whose work he may well have known), as well as with the French beguine, Marguerite Porete, with whom he could not have been familiar” (Bernard McGinn, The Flowering of Mysticism: Men and Women in the New Mysticism [New York: Crossroad, 1998] 127). McGinn also Ànds “daring” expressions in the post-Eckhart fourteenth-century Theologia Deutsch, which brings the text close to “the radical mystical oneing found in mystics like Marguerite Porete and Meister Eckhart” (Bernard McGinn, The Harvest of Mysticism in Medieval Germany [New York: Crossroad, 2005] 402). I cannot argue for, but hope to indirectly illuminate here, how all these can be traced to the beguines’ inÁuence on Franciscan male “beguines” such as Jacopone da Todi and on the Theologia Deutsch via Eckhart. Two women I originally planned to discuss here are Angela of Foligno, whose language of annihilation McGinn describes as “radical,” and Na Prous Boneta, whose claim to divinization not only “must have astonished and horriÀed” her orthodox examiners, but was part of a “message more dangerous than anything found among the northern Beguines” (McGinn, Flowering of Mysticism, 124, 183). 9 Bernard McGinn, “The Abyss of Love: The Language of Mystical Union among Medieval Women,” in The Joy of Learning and the Love of God: Studies in Honor of Jean Leclercq (ed. E. Rozanne Elder; Kalamazoo, Mich.: Cistercian Publications, 1995) 113.
JUAN MARIN
91
Mechthild of Magdeburg and Marguerite Porete. All three mystics claim that “the soul herself can and must be reÀgured or reimagined, and as such become united without distinction in and with the divine. The radicalness of this claim . . . separates the beguines and Eckhart from most of their contemporaries.”10 Proponents of this radical theology—what Lerner calls “extreme mysticism”—include beguines such as Hadewijch, who described mystical visions and authored poems in which, as McGinn tells us, “strong expressions of identity with God occur.”11 McGinn discusses Hadewijch’s and other beguines’ distinctive expressions in essays on mystical images such as the abyss and the ocean.12 He Ànds that while these images originated in patristic sources, they reached a peak of profound and daring originality among the beguines. In the latters’ writing they are used as metaphors for both union with God and the immensity of the beguines’ desire for such union. Porete shares these traditional mystical images, but she is also acknowledged as the creator of a distinctive and original theology of annihilation. Joanne Maguire Robinson, in her study on Marguerite Porete’s theology of annihilation, tells us that “the doctrine of annihilation of the soul was never a mainstream theological doctrine before or after Marguerite Porete, yet it reveals profound insights into the possible relationship between God and the soul.”13 I will show that many of these profound insights about mystical annihilation are indebted to those beguine theological speculations that McGinn charts through the use of abyssal and liquid metaphors. If I am correct, beguine speculations also contributed to the formation of Porete’s doctrine of deiÀcation, thus supporting Kent Emery’s claim against Jean Orcibal that one “need not look towards the ‘glow of the Christian Orient’ to account for basic elements of Margaret’s doctrine of deiÀcation.”14 Emery, however, differs from Orcibal only in de-emphasizing Eastern inÁuence. Both see the doctrine as borrowed from patristic sources.15 While the terms may indeed have originated in these sources, Orcibal and Emery ignore the fact that beguine mystics were exploring, developing, and radicalizing these ideas on their own. We can Ànd the Àrst piece of evidence for this last claim in Sean Field’s essay, cited above, in which he locates the earliest medieval appearance of the term annihilation in a thirteenth-century sermon by Franciscan Gilbert of Tournai.16 10
Amy Hollywood, The Soul as Virgin Wife (Notre Dame, Ind.: University of Notre Dame Press, 2001) 24 [italics mine]. 11 McGinn, “Abyss of Love,” 108. 12 See ibid. and Bernard McGinn, “Ocean and Desert as Symbols of Mystical Absorption in the Christian Tradition,” JR 74 (1994) 155–81. 13 Robinson, Nobility and Annihilation, xii. 14 Kent Emery, “Margaret Porette and Her Book,” forward to Margaret Porette, The Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Edmund Colledge et al.; Notre Dame, Ind.: University of Notre Dame Press, 1999) xxiv. 15 See Jean Orcibal, “Le Miroir des simples âmes et la ‘secte’ du Libre Esprit,” Revue de l’histoire des religions 176 (1969) 35–60. 16 Sean Field, “Annihilation and Perfection in Two Sermons by Gilbert of Tournai for the Translation of St. Francis,” Franciscana (Centro Italiano di Studi Sull’Alto Medioevo Spoleto,
92
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
Field speculates about a possible remote and unintended inÁuence of this sermon among beguine communities or even Marguerite Porete speciÀcally.17 Yet he does not consider the possibility of the opposite direction of inÁuence, which is suggested by Gilbert’s writing around 1250: There are among us women called beguines. Some of them rejoice in new doctrines (novitatibus) and thrive in subtleties (subtilitatibus vigent). They have interpreted the mysteries of scriptures in the vulgar Gallic tongue . . . in a communitarian, irreverent, impudent manner in conventicles, in workhouses, in the streets.18
If, as I will suggest, the doctrine of annihilation is one of these novitates, then Gilbert’s use of the term annihilation can be read as his sanitizing the concept of beguine theological accretions. Gilbert uses “annihilation as a concept equivalent to [Franciscan] humility, poverty, and perfection.”19 Perhaps he is counteracting new doctrines, such as Porete’s call to liberation from the virtues through annihilation, and thus neutralizing the concept’s heretical potential. Whether or not this is the case, Gilbert’s passage is crucial to our topic because it is in this “vulgar” theology, developed in a communitarian manner by thirteenth-century beguines, that we Àrst Ànd a radical exploration of mystical union.20 McGinn has shown how these women explored such union through their metaphorical discourse, exempliÀed in abyssal and liquid imagery such as that of Hadewijch: My soul melts away In the madness of Love The abyss into which she hurls me Is deeper than the sea; For love’s deep new abyss Renews my wound.21
We should note here, for further elaboration later, that while today we can only work with written texts, the vernacular language of the poem and the sounds of its Dutch rhyming verses can make us aware of the oral theological tradition behind 1999) 248. My own more recent and extended search came to the same conclusion. 17 Ibid., 256. 18 Ibid. [translation mine]. 19 Ibid., 254. 20 For a beguine history that pays attention to signiÀcant linguistic elements see Hans Geybel, Vulgariter Beghinae (Turnhout, Belgium: Brepols, 2004). This “vulgar Gallic tongue” is a predecessor of Old French, the vulgar piccardo in which, as Guarnieri suggests, Porete wrote the lost original text of the Mirror (2004, 268). Guarnieri suggests that “French” beguines and Porete would have understood the dialects of beguines such as Beatrice of Nazareth and Hadewijch of Brabant. If Saskia Murk-Jansen’s assumption of mutual intelligibility between Dutch and Germanic languages is correct, then all beguine authors I discuss here could have shared a French-Germanic oral background without the need for translation. (Saskia-Murk Jansen, “Hadewijch and Eckhart: Amor Intelligere Est,” in Meister Eckhart and the Beguine Mystics [ed. Bernard McGinn; New York: Continuum, 1994] 17) 21 Hadewijch, The Complete Works (New York: Paulist Press, 1980) 145.
JUAN MARIN
93
it. I suggest that written texts are only auxiliaries to the oral communication needed for a theology done “in conventicles, in workhouses, in the streets.” We will see how aural elements are crucial for Porete, elements she inherits from traditions of oral beguine theology. For now we can extend McGinn’s claim and suggest that while the images exempliÀed in the poem are used to describe a mystical state of union, we can also read them as describing a mystical experience that goes beyond the stativity implied in “state of union” to encompass a dynamic process of unitive annihilation. It is not only that the Áuidity of movement involved in liquid imagery avoids the necessity of always restricting a mystical experience to a static state. In the poem above, Hadewijch’s mad desire to be hurled into the abyss of love is what leads to her soul being “engulfed” by the abyss and “brought to naught.”22 These ideas are not unique to Hadewijch, but characteristic of the beguine spirituality we Ànd in the later compilation of Hadewijch’s and other texts, Ruusbroec’s Vanden XII Beghinen.23 There we are introduced to beguines who speak about the desire “to be annihilated and melt together in love” (te vernieutene ende te versmeltene in minnen), which drives a soul “to become deiform and transformed into Christ” (godformich werden ende in Cristo ghetransformeert).24 While the terms translated as “annihilation” and “deiformity” are rare, they are connected to the more common “melting” imagery. These texts may be reÁecting patristic theology, but they can also be read as composed by those beguines who, as Gilbert complains, “interpreted the mysteries of scriptures in the vulgar Gallic tongue.” Connecting abyssal and liquid imagery from nature to the melting and unitive language of Paul’s Letter to the Philippians results in passages such as these. This is precisely what Hadewijch’s contemporary, Beatrice of Nazareth, did. We have the option of reading Beatrice of Nazareth, not in light of her beguine heritage, but as an orthodox interpreter of scripture in the tradition of the Cistercian order she later joined. This is how she was read by the author of her Latin biography, 22
Ibid., 90. Jan Van Ruusbroec, Van Den XII Beghinen (Turnhout, Belgium: Brepols, 2000). Ruusbroec appropriates the abyssal language but rejects annihilation in Vanden blinkenden steen, 10. McGinn argues that Ruusbroec qualiÀes the beguines’ radical language in order to mitigate its unorthodox potential. Mystical Union and Monotheistic Faith: An Ecumenical Dialogue (ed. Moshe Idel and Bernard McGinn; New York: Macmillan, 1989) 79. This leads me to disagree with Paul Verdeyen’s claim that Ruusbroec’s brothers collected his unpublished writings and published them as “The Twelve Beguines.” Ruusbroec and His Mysticism (Collegeville, Minn.: Liturgical Press, 1994). For Ruusbroec to be the author would require us to assume not only that he became more radical in his last years, but also that he picked up an interest in astrology. Verdeyen explains the latter as part of the medieval worldview, adding that Ruusbroec did not reject free will, but does not explain the superior’s objections to the text. If instead, as I assume here, the texts are from less orthodox beguine authors, it does explain his objections. For some views that Ruusbroec did not author this text see Teodoro H. Martin, “Notas,” in Juan Ruusbroec, Obras (Madrid: Fundación Universitaria Española, 1984) 10. For another perspective on the text’s authorship see Mikel M. Kors, “Ruusbroec en de crisis van de mystiek,” Ons geestelijk erf 75 (2001) 116–24. 24 Ruusbroec, Van Den XII, 63. 23
94
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
probably a male cleric or Cistercian.25 He included an earlier Latin translation of her Seven Manieren Minne, where in the last of the Seven Manners of Love the religious woman interprets Paul’s Philippians 1:23. Still, the passage could be an example of what McGinn describes as the beguines’ “intense desire” for union, expressed in both abyssal and liquid imagery, a trace of what we will see she inherited from her former beguine community. She expresses this desire as follows: The soul’s great sadness is to have to be so far away and to seem so alien. It cannot forget its exile; its desire cannot be calmed; what the soul longs for wretchedly vexes it and thus afÁicts and torments it beyond measure and without respite. . . . With afÁicted heart it then says with the apostle: I long to be dissolved and to be with Christ.26
Beatrice describes this desire for dissolution in Christ in her text’s seventh stage, in which “the soul is united to its bridegroom, and is wholly made one spirit in inseparable faithfulness and eternal love.”27 The hagiographer would have recognized all this as biblical language, but would have been unsure what to do when he read Beatrice’s statement that she was “so deeply immersed and absorbed in the abyss of love that it [the soul] is made wholly into love.”28 He decided to add to this distinctive beguine metaphor an orthodox one used by Bernard of Clairvaux, that of the drop of water in wine, yet with a variation crucial for our topic. In Bernard’s On Loving God, we Ànd a predecessor to beguine ideas about annihilation and deiÀcation, including liquid imagery, and the elements that they will challenge: It is deifying to go through such an experience. Just as a drop of water, infused in much wine, seems (videtur) to disappear completely . . . just as iron, ignited and burning, seems (videtur) similar to Àre . . . and just as air, pervaded by the light of the sun, is transformed into the same clarity . . . so all human affection in the saints must, in some ineffable way, liquefy by itself and be wholly transfused into the will of God (variant translation: and the will must be wholly transfused into God).29
Bernard describes the rare but orthodox understanding of deiÀcation using metaphors of two different substances, which seem to become similar yet really maintain their
25
Hollywood, Soul as Virgin Wife, 29. Beatrice of Nazareth, “Seven Manners of Holy Love,” in The Life of Beatrice of Nazareth (ed. Roger de Ganck; Kalamazoo, Mich.: Cistercian Publications, 1991) 325. 27 Ibid., 331. 28 Ibid., 305. 29 “Atque in Deo penitus transfundi voluntatem.” Bernard, De diligendo Deo 10.28, in Sancti Bernardi Opera (ed. Jean Leclerq et al.; Paris: Editiones Cisterciences, 1957–1977) 3:119. For a comprehensive history of these three metaphors see Jean Pépin, “ ‘Stilla aquae modica multo infusa vino, ferrum ignitum, luce perfusus aer’. L’origine de trois comparaisons familiaires à la théologie mystique médiévale,” ,” Divinitas (Miscellanae André Combès) 11 (1967) 331–75. 26
JUAN MARIN
95
separable natures.30 These metaphors can also be read in terms of what will later become the orthodox “traditional qualiÀcations . . . [insisting, Àrst,] that union does not involve a merging of essences; second, that union removes the consciousness but not the ontological reality of distinction; and third, that the soul becomes God by grace not by nature.”31 Referring to two different substances ensures that the essences of the human and divine nature are not confused and that the acquisition of divine attributes is understood as something that the solvent “grants” the solute, making it “seem” similar. Just as iron is not igneous by nature, we are not divine by nature but divinized by grace. This divinization does not mean that we become the sun, but that we acquire its clarity. Transfusion is of wills, not of the entire human being. We become aware only of God, just as when blinded by sunlight we can only see light. Everything may seem to disappear, but the sun remains distinct. The hagiographer has to add Bernard’s metaphor of the drop of water immediately after Beatrice’s abyss because her metaphor does not maintain this schema clearly. He writes: “All the affection of her heart took on, in some way, a celestial nature like a little drop of water running down into the vast expanse of the sea and immersed in the ocean of eternity.”32 His qualiÀer “in some way” (quodammodo) serves the same mitigating role as Bernard’s videtur, preserving the distinction of natures. Yet his metaphor of a drop of water in the ocean is the earliest instance I have been able to Ànd of a variant that distinguishes the beguines’ theological speculations from those closer to orthodoxy.33 We will see that Porete uses this same metaphor as a way of challenging the distinction between and separability of human and divine natures. Just as a drop of water is of the same nature as the ocean and once dissolved in it cannot be separated again, so is the annihilated soul of divine nature permanently one with God. If her hagiographer is being faithful to a tradition inspired by Beatrice, then we can ask whether Beatrice’s claim that “the heart melts” (hare herte versmeltendene) and “the spirit sinks away down into love” (hare geest altemale in minnen versinkende)34 is closer to her Cistercian tradition and Bernard or to her beguine legacy and Porete. Read in light of Bernard there is nothing unorthodox about Beatrice’s text. Indeed, her last stage remains true to Pauline language. But if her Dutch words, and her liquid and abyssal imagery, mean what they do in Hadewijch’s claim that the spirit
30
Richard of St. Victor is the other important Western example. For an introduction insisting on the orthodoxy of the doctrine see the chapter on deiÀcation in McGinn, Essential Writings. For the ingenious way in which church fathers would have been able to separate wine from water see Pépin, above. 31 McGinn, “Love, Knowledge and Unio Mystica in the Western Christian Tradition,” in Mystical Union and Monotheistic Faith, 79. 32 Beatrice, “Seven Manners,” 305. 33 That is, in Western Christianity. I am not taking into consideration Evagrius’s use of the image, for which there is no evidence of transmission (McGinn, McGinn, “Ocean and Desert,” t,” 158). 34 Beatrice, “Seven Manners,” 202. Quote in Hollywood, Soul as Virgin Wife, 31.
96
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
“sinks with frenzy in [the abyss] of Love’s fruition,”35 then we move away from Bernard’s doctrine of deiÀcation and closer to Porete’s doctrines. As Hadewijch tells us in one of her visionary accounts, Christ appeared to her once and entered into her with the result that both were annihilated. First, she tells us: “And I saw him become nothing . . . and dissolve” (Ende ich sahene al te niete wertene . . . ende al smelten). Later she says: “I melted into him and nothing of myself remained” (versmalt in heme ende mi mijns selues niet en bleef).36 At Àrst, she uses a qualiÀer: “To me it was as if at that moment we were one without difference” (Mi was op die vre ochte wi een waren sonder differencie).37 Then, the qualiÀer disappears. In Porete, too, we will Ànd two stages of union. Neither will be satisÀed with partial divinization. At the end of her text, Hadewijch reaches the goal she introduced at the beginning, the “highest” goal possible: “to be God with God” (god met god te sine). She is exploring new territory, yet no qualiÀer is used for safety. Nor is a qualiÀer used when in a letter she describes being “wholly in the Unity of Love. In this state one is the Father.”38 The letter and the vision do not form a coherent theology, but our objective is not to systematize Hadewijch. We are moving instead toward understanding how beguine abyssal and liquid imagery are joined to doctrines of annihilation and deiÀcation. These doctrines will not form a systematic beguine theology. Nevertheless, they will be born as conceptual siblings of the beguines’ natural metaphors and share their communitarian foster care. The metaphor of sinking in the ocean of love helped Hadewijch express her experience of being annihilated and deiÀed in God. Unfortunately, there is not enough evidence to claim that this metaphor expresses a similar experience in Beatrice’s writing. “Being wholly one with love” could have meant something different for her. Should we read her in light of her metaphors of sinking and dissolution or of her Àsh in water simile?39 The latter occurs both before and after images of liquefaction. It may serve as an analogy for the closeness yet nonidentity of humanity and divinity. Beatrice’s images certainly do not Àt a coherent or progressive pattern. Again, the main goal here is not to analyze her theology but to discern her beguine heritage. It is only when the same language arises not only in Beatrice, Hadewijch, and, as we will see later, Porete, but also among other beguines, that we can propose a shared theological pool of ideas. These ideas would then have been developed in each beguine’s individual theology. It is among these ideas that we will Ànd the seeds that in some fertile contexts grew to become radical doctrines of annihilation and deiÀcation.
35 36 37 38 39
Hadewijch, The Complete Works, 244. Hadewijch, Das Buch der Visionen (Stuttgart: Bad-Cannstatt, 1998) 97 [translation mine]. Ibid., 96. Hadewijch, The Complete Works, 118 Beatrice, “Seven Manners,” 317.
JUAN MARIN
97
A beguine who undergoes a process of annihilation and deiÀcation is the main speaker in the treatise known as Schwester Katrei.40 The dialogue between the beguine and her confessor expresses its own peculiar theology, but does so in language very similar to that of our beguines, especially Porete. Lerner identiÀes the treatise with the heresy of the free spirit because of its inclusion of this annihilative and deifying process. He summarizes it as follows: “[S]he rids herself of all desire and sinks into nothingness. Thereupon she is drawn into a divine light, ‘heaven and earth become too narrow’ for her, and she Ànally cries out ‘sir, rejoice with me, I have become God.’ ”41 What Lerner identiÀes as “free spirit” inÁuence has been interpreted by McGinn and Elvira Borgstadt as a not-necessarily-heretical appropriation of Meister Eckhart’s teaching. 42 Given that most manuscripts interpolate Eckhartian sermons into an earlier original, and given that recent work shows that beguines inÁuenced Eckhart, we cannot ignore the possibility that the treatise reÁects a spirituality originating in pre-Eckhartian beguinages.43 In the critical edition of the Schwester Katrei, the beguine “seczet sich jn ein blosheit.”44 Lerner translates the original Alemannic as “she sinks into nothingness” and Borgstadt as “she places herself into a state of emptiness.”45 Borgstadt reads the phrase in light of Eckhart, telling us that she is linking blosheit to Eckhart’s detachment (abgescheidenheit) and emptiness (luterkeit).46 But if we read it in light of beguine imagery and Porete’s nothingness and think of it as carrying the dual meaning of “sinking and/or placing herself in nothingness,” we have much more than an echo of Porete’s “mectre a nient.”47 The latter can be translated as “places her in nothingness,” or “reduces her to nothingness,” or “sinks her into nothingness.”48 We know this because Porete conÁates all of these locative, annihilative, and dissolutive connotations in a passage about the soul, in which God “seats her” and “makes her nothing” (la fait nulle) in a space that is both a “resting place” and an “abyss of wretchedness . . . Áood of sin.”49 I prefer Lerner’s Poretian translation because it solves a problem acknowledged in Borgstadt’s edition, that 40 “Schwester Catherine,” in Franz-Josef Schweitzer, Der Freiheitsbegriff der deutschen Mystik (Bern: Peter Lang, 1981). 41 Lerner, “Liquids,” 403. 42 “The ‘Sister Catherine’ Treatise,” in Meister Eckart: Teacher and Preacher (ed. Bernard McGinn; trans. Elvira Borgstadt; New York: Paulist Press, 1986) 10. 43 Lerner, “Liquids,” 403. See also the collection Meister Eckhart and the Beguine Mystics (ed. Bernard McGinn; New York: Continuum, 1994). 44 Schweitzer, Freiheitsbegriff, 337. 45 Borgstadt, “Sister Catherine,” 358. 46 Ibid., 385. 47 Marguerite Porete, Le Mirouer de simples âmes (ed. Romana Guarnieri and Paul Verdeyen; Brepols: Turnholti, 1986) 326. 48 Marguerite Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Ellen L. Babinsky; New York: Paulist Press, 1993) 192; eadem, The Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Edmund Colledge et al.; Notre Dame, Ind.: University of Notre Dame Press, 1999) 144 [last translation mine]. 49 Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinsky) 192.
98
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
is, how to interpret the text’s peculiar doctrine of establishment, one described as a permanent union.50 Borgstadt’s edition takes an Eckhartian stance, acknowledged as vague, and links establishment with the possibility that Eckhart’s conception of union could be permanent. But, as Ellen Babinsky brieÁy mentions, the other place where this peculiar doctrine of establishment appears is none other than Porete’s Mirror.51 Babinsky is referring to Porete’s radical claim that mystical union is permanent or, more likely, that Porete uses it to describe the annihilated soul’s authority to teach on her being “so well established” in God.52 McGinn, in his introduction to Borgstadt’s translation, also reads establishment as giving authority to Catherine, yet without mentioning Porete. This authority granted to a woman over a man is, in McGinn’s words, “one of the most daring aspects of this provocative text.”53 We do not need to claim that one of the authors read the other in order to interpret the doctrine of establishment or the texts’ daring aspects. Both authors do claim that their souls have been established in a place reached through a sinking or dissolving process. Still, I suggest merely that they both borrow from the same conceptual pool, establishment being but one of the concepts they both adapted and integrated into their texts. Porete’s ideas about establishment include what we will later identify as one of the original elements of her doctrine of annihilation, an atypical “reversion to a pre-creative state of being.”54 Catherine also says that the soul must Áow back to the place she reached by being established and/or annihilated: “I am where I was before I was created, there [blos] God and God is.”55 Since there are important differences between these texts, we should look Àrst for a common heritage rather than direct inÁuence. Catherine’s establishment is ““jn der blossen Gottheit da nie bild noch forme warrd.”56 Here she is closer to Eckhart’s neoplatonist idea that the Godhead is beyond images and forms, including Trinitarian ones. We will see Porete differing from Catherine in having her own theology wherein the annihilated soul moves beyond images yet retains the image and form of the Trinity. In this respect Porete is closer to the beguine Mechthild of Magdeburg than to Sister Catherine. We can now discuss how ideas about being planted and being given divine form link Mechthild and Porete to a source from which Catherine is more distant. On the other hand, ideas about establishment link Porete and Catherine directly, if not to each other, to a source from which Mechthild is more distant. All are linked together by liquid imagery and ideas about annihilation and deiÀcation. Eckhart 50
Borgstadt, “Sister Catherine,” 12. Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinsky) 223. 52 Ibid., 90. 53 McGinn, “Introduction,” 13. 54 Michael Sells, Mystical Languages of Unsaying (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1994) 131. See also Hollywood, Soul as Virgin Wife, ch. 4. 55 Schweitzer, Freiheitsbegriff, 337 [translation mine]. 56 Ibid., 337. 51
JUAN MARIN
99
may have borrowed these ideas too. They would later have been identiÀed by scholars as neoplatonic, but are in fact closer to Eckhart’s time.57 I do not deny that Porete and Catherine are somewhat indebted to Greek or Latin patristic sources. What I propose is that we ought to consider also the possibility of beguine sources less akin to neoplatonism than to Eckhart’s learned spirituality. We can strengthen this last claim if we study Mechthild of Magdeburg’s Flowing Light of the Divinity. As mentioned earlier, Hollywood shows that Mechthild differs from her contemporaries when she claims to achieve union without distinction. Mechthild’s claims are expressed not in scholastic language but in a cornucopia of liquescent images that merit the entire study that James C. Franklin devoted to them.58 Whether Catherine’s Áowing metaphors are indebted to Eckhartian neoplatonism, beguine spirituality, or both is unclear. But there is nothing to indicate that those apophatic elements which Hollywood Ànds in Mechthild owe much, if anything, to Greek sources. Hollywood introduces some of these elements when she discusses how Mechthild’s intense desire for God is so strong that she is willing to be annihilated: [T]he soul must become nothing in order to achieve union with God. A similar idea is expressed in God’s injunction that she should “love the nothing” and “Áee the something.” The soul’s willingness to suffer God’s absence for his honor also Ànds early expression when she claims that she would willingly go to hell to further the praise of God. This conception is most fully expressed, as Haas and Heimbach have shown, in Mechthild’s description of sinking humility, which hunts the soul “up into heaven and draws her again into the abyss.”59
We are here on familiar beguine ground. Mechthild is developing on her own a theology that will later integrate elements originating in the two most famous mystical female communities, the beguines and the monastery at Helfta.60 What Hans and Heimbach above found is a link to the spirituality of Mechthild’s beguine caretakers that she extends and elaborates in the book that will inaugurate a different mysticism at Helfta.61 Annihilating oneself, sinking into an abyss of nothingness in order to achieve divine union without distinction, is a beguine theme behind the images of Áow that permeate Mechthild’s book and give it its title. Frank Tobin compares these images to those of Eckhart, assuming that the text’s Áowing images
57
See Sells, above. James C. Franklin, Mystical Transformations: The Imagery of Liquids in the Work of Mechthild von Magdeburg (London: Associated University Presses, 1978). 59 Hollywood, Soul as Virgin Wife, 79. 60 For an introduction to the latter see Mary Jeremy Finnegan, The Women of Helfta: Scholars and Mystics (Athens, Ga.: University of Georgia Press, 1991). 61 Saskia Murk-Jansen, Brides in the Desert (New York: Orbis, 1998) 65–68. See also Caroline Walker Bynum, Jesus as Mother (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1984). 58
100
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
of light are indebted to a neoplatonism that Mechthild would not have recognized.62 This may be true, but all the images he discusses seem more at home in the liquid imagery of beguines. This is certainly the case for the image Tobin identiÀes as the one most frequently used to describe the Trinity. When he cites Mechthild’s description of her mystically experiencing the “heavenly Áood of the spring of the Áowing Trinity,” we are closer to abyssal beguine language than to neoplatonic emanation. Ideas from a “liquid theology” are among those that, as Tobin tells us but quickly forgets, Herbert Grundmann claims were present in women’s religious communities that then inÁuenced Eckhart.63 He attributes Eckhart’s liquid vocabulary to his drawing on theologian Abelard with “astonishing poetic intensity” and coming up with terms such as “pouring forth,” “spilling over,” “overÁowing,” and so on.64 His excellent comparison of Mechthild and Eckhart supports his claim that they shared a tradition; but the astonishing imagery moves Eckhart closer, not to patristic theology, but to the beguine heritage of which we Ànd evidence in Mechthild, Hadewijch, and even Beatrice.65
Q Annihilation and DeiÀcation in Marguerite Porete’s Mirror of Simple Souls We now understand better the legacy from which Porete extracted those elements that would form her theology of annihilation and deiÀcation. These inherited elements, together with original ones, appear in the following passage, where she challenges the orthodox account of the soul’s relation to God: [He] has transformed her of Himself for her sake into His goodness. And if she is thus encumbered in all aspects, she loses her name, for she rises in sovereignty. And therefore she loses her name in the One in whom she is melted and dissolved through Himself and in Himself. Thus she will be like a body of water which Áows from the sea, which has some name, as one would be able to say Aisne or Seine or another river. And when this water or river returns into the sea, it loses its course and its name.66
Here the soul already has followed Bernard and given her will to God, becoming transformed into his goodness. Her desire is still too intense, thus she is still encumbered. Not satisÀed with being united only in will by being transformed into a divine aspect, she is still to move higher. Dissolution is to be completed, a mutual melting where nothing remains of the human nature, not even its name. Annihilation leads to total deiÀcation. Porete foreshadows here what she later challenges explicitly. No metaphorical drop of wine will serve. By stretching 62
Frank Tobin, “Mechthild of Magdeburg and Meister Eckhart: Points of Coincidence,” in Beguine Mystics, 54. 63 Grundmann, Movements; Tobin, “Mechthild of Magdeburg,” 47. 64 Tobin, “Mechthild of Magdeburg,” 55. 65 For Beatrice see especially the seventh of her seven stages. 66 Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinsky), 158.
JUAN MARIN
101
Bernard’s metaphor to the point that it breaks down, changing it into one substance divided only in terms of magnitude, she sets the stage for her claim that it is the chasm between humanity and divinity that seems real. While in Bernard human consciousness of distinction is lost, in Porete divine consciousness of indistinction is regained. We can better understand this last annihilation into deiÀcation by focusing on one of the several uniquely Poretian concepts in which it inheres.67 I choose as an illustration Porete’s idea of “conformity” because it is so suggestive. She introduces this concept as follows: Love—It is Àtting, says Love, that this soul should be conformable (semblable) to the deity, for she is transformed (muee) into God through whom she has detained (detenue) her true form (forme), which is conÀrmed and given to her without beginning, from one alone who has always loved her from his goodness. The Soul.—Oh, Love, says this Soul, the meaning of what is said makes me nothing.68
This passage reveals the paradoxical process whereby the annihilated soul loses her form and acquires a new one while, simultaneously, she recognizes that she never lost her true form and is only regaining what she always had. We can best unpack this abstruse claim if we view it as the converging point of speculations already seminally present in both Mechthild and Hadewijch. The former I brieÁy mentioned in the beguine context of the Schwester Catherine. Mechthild reveals that God has taken the soul and has given her his form (hat si gebildet nach im selber), and has planted her in himself (er ha si gepÁanzet in im selber), and has [then] uniÀed himself with her, the most lowly of all creatures (er hat sich allermeist mit ir vereinet under allen creaturen), Áooding her so much with his divine nature that she cannot speak anymore (siner gotlichen nature so vil gegossen, das si anders nit gesprechen mag).69
Mechthild’s soul being Áooded by the divine nature reiterates metaphorically what Christ said to her earlier: “You are so strongly en-natured in me, that nothing can come between you and me.”70 Her understanding of the divine nature of the soul is so radical that she has to defend it from attack: “I said in one passage of this book that the Godhead is my Father by nature. You do not understand this, and say, ‘Everything that God has done with us is completely a matter of grace and not of 67 Elsewhere I intend to address in depth other uniquely Poretian concepts such as “grace,” which translators assume is the same as the scholastic concept. I brieÁy discuss grace here and, in more detail, the feudal context in which Poretian “grace” subverts scholastic gratia by becoming courteous “gracefulness.” 68 Verdeyen, Ruusbroec and his Mysticism, 150 [translation mine]. 69 Mechthild von Magdeburg, Das Áiessende Licht der Gottheit (ed. Hans Neumann; Munich: Artemis, 1990) 239. 70 Ibid., 30.
102
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
nature.’ You are right, but I am right too.”71 McGinn sees in this conformity, and in Mechthild’s doctrine of the “preexistence of all things in the divine enclosure before creation” the extreme language of nature that later in “Marguerite Porete, even more than [in] Hadewijch and Mechthild, shows that the germs of the new mysticism of unitas indistinctionis were present, especially among female mystics, prior to Meister Eckhart.”72 According to McGinn, Eckhart will reach a peak of radicalism which all his successors will mitigate without abandoning his radical language. Tauler comes close to the beguines’ language of union, but “he sought to qualify the more daring ways in which the Meister had expressed the union of indistinction.”73 Suso wrote about annihilation, continues McGinn “but must be interpreted in the light of the three traditional qualiÀcations Suso always insisted upon.”74 Ruusbroec wrote about union without distinction but “insists on the inÀnite distinction that must always accompany and succeed the experience of union.”75 This new mysticism, made famous by these northern European theologians, can be found in seminal form in the complex composed of gestating beguine ideas such as conformity, enclosure, and the preexistence of the soul in God. Mechthild appropriates the pool of ideas from which Porete will drink later in a distinct manner. Mechthild is the only thinker to radicalize Bernard’s metaphor of Àre while following him in insisting on the preservation of the two substances. In this passage we Ànd her saying that she cannot go against her nature just as “gold cannot be destroyed in Àre,” while insisting that “God is her Father by nature.” This is an insight revealed to Mechthild, not a union that is to be attained. For her, unitas indistinctionis does not involve losing consciousness of distinction but becoming conscious of indistinction. In this indistinction, Mechthild seems to equate implicitly the divine form given in an original state and the divine nature of the soul. Porete will explicitly equate the two. Recasting Aristotelian ideas, our beguines’ theologies revolve around a thematic kernel in which God’s form is nothingness, and his form is inseparable from his nature or essence. Since it is uncreated, divine nature will not need to acquire a form. Its form is that of formlessness. Conformity in human beings will involve being given God’s formless form; annihilative conformity will involve either being given or recognizing our divine form, that of formless nothingness. Since God’s nature is also nothingness, it is not only in form but in nature that we are divine. We already saw in Mechthild that conformity occurs in the precreated state; for her, annihilation involves awareness of this fact. Although she borrows from the same ideas we Àrst found in Hadewijch, the latter emphasis in her understanding of conformity is even more radical. 71 72 73 74 75
Ibid., 256. McGinn, Union, 78. McGinn, Harvest, 296. McGinn, Union, 79. Ibid., 79.
JUAN MARIN
103
Mechthild drinks from the same source as Hadewijch, but in the latter the emphasis is not on consciousness of indistinction regained. For Hadewijch, the goal is annihilation as attainment of the form and nature of nothingness. We saw her surpassing Mechthild’s daring in her extreme claim not only of being daughter of the Father by nature but of identity with him. She comes closer to Mechthild in her use of the Àre metaphor to propose the conforming of natures, even when not using Mechthild’s traditional language of two substances: O sublime nature, true Love, When will you make my nature so fair That it will be wholly conformed to your nature? For I wish to be wholly conformed If all that is other in me were yours Everything that is yours would be altogether mine I should burn to ashes in your Àre!76
Is Hadewijch implying here that something remains in the ashes, like Mechthild, or that everything is annihilated, like Porete? I suggested that Hadewijch wants to become nothing because God is nothing. While we can only speculate as to what might be behind Mechthild or Hadewijch, their language of conformity points toward an appropriation by Porete, in whose work the theologies of both beguines will converge. Our beguines converge in Porete not through their speciÀc texts, but in the oral theology we can recapture through them, the theology beguines preached “in conventicles, in workhouses, in the streets.” Part of my claim relies on showing that Porete’s doctrines, exempliÀed here by the idea of conformity that leads to annihilation and deiÀcation, are expressed in a series of inextricable metaphors, connected not only by their shared concepts but also by their form. Content consists not only of what is said, its nature or essence, but how it is said, in a spoken form scarcely captured in script. I want to recapture the Mirror’s aural structure by proposing its origin in an oral beguine theology, one unfortunately lost in translation. We can begin exploring this aural structure with the semantic aspects of the paragraph preceding the doctrine of conformity above. These semantics will help us unveil the original aural quality of the text. In it we Ànd Love declaiming: The Soul is engraved (emprainte) in God, and has her true imprint (emprainture) maintained (detenue) through the union of Love. And in the manner that wax takes (prent) the form (forme) of a seal, so has this soul taken (prinse) the imprint (emprainte) of this true exemplar.”77
A problem arises when the English translators inconsistently use “held,” “retained,” “preserved,” or “maintained” for both detenue and retenue. Although Porete is not 76 77
Hadewijch, The Complete Works, 252. Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinsky) 128.
104
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
consistent either, she does use detenue as the key that opens the listener’s mind to a complex of puns and metaphors we can capture if we translate detenue as “detained.” Edmund Colledge’s edition of the Mirror translates detenue as “preserved,” claiming that it appears in the French critical edition but not in the Latin one. Yet the Latin critical edition does, in fact, cite manuscripts in which in tenore appears. The fact that some manuscripts omit it may indicate that the medieval scribes had a translation problem as well. The version that translates detenue as in tenore offers the best solution by preserving Porete’s metaphorical structure. Of the multiple meanings Porete invokes, this scribe chose one that evokes Porete’s courtly imagery. This Latin translation presents detenue, correctly, as a French verbal form of the noun tenore, which it keeps in its original French. The Latin gives the French word tenore an ablative ending rather than translating detenue as an ablative of Latin tenura. The scribe read Porete as saying that she holds her true form as tenura, which unlocks the complex system of puns and metaphors of which only an audience of Porete’s original oral discourse would have been aware. Ellen Babinsky’s edition misses much of Porete’s system, especially in those passages that the edition acknowledges as problematic. Babinsky judges these passages as of “little weight,” because they seem to claim there is no real unitas indistinctionis of the soul and God, Porete apparently “maintaining that they remain two separate natures even while possessing one will.”78 An example is found when Porete presents her doctrine of conformity leading into deiÀcation in a dialogue between Reason and Love: Reason—To whom does she [the soul] belong then? Love—To my will, which transformed (muee) her into me. Reason—But who are you, Love? Are you not one of the virtues with us? How is it that you are above us? Love—I am God, for Love is God and God is Love, and this soul is God by the condition of Love. I am God by divine nature and this soul is God by droicture d’amour.79
We will see this problem dissolve when we re-translate several passages under the hypothesis that Porete’s detenue has “held in tenure” among the many meanings it attributes to being “detained.” Already a hint is given above, in the passage on the wax and seal, where detenue is given this meaning through the synonym that immediately follows: héritière. Babinsky correctly translates droicture as righteousness, an orthodox use found in William of St. Thierry.80 However, I prefer Colledge’s translation, “right of law,” because it preserves the structural complex of detenue, even though Colledge interprets it incorrectly, claiming that for Porete
78
Hollywood, Soul as Virgin Wife, 109. Verdeyen, Ruusbroec and his Mysticism, 82. 80 Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinsky) 104, 224. 79
JUAN MARIN
105
divine nature is received as a gift of grace.81 Already in Mechthild’s defense of her divine nature we Ànd a clue that can make sense of Porete’s apparent confusion. Porete does not receive divine nature as a gift of grace. She attains consciousness of indistinction when she learns that she holds divine nature in tenore, the way a feudal lady holds her land, by droicture, as a birthright. As she tells us at the beginning of the text, her Àrst love is for the faraway king, whom she loves as the king’s daughter. In the Mirror, Love praises the soul: “O very high born one, says love to this precious Pearl, it is well that you have [taken the path of Love and] entered the only noble manor.”82 When Love praises the soul who enters the manor she is not praising the fairytale peasant who marries the prince and becomes queen. Porete’s recurrent use of bridal imagery can obscure the soul’s status. When Porete enters the manor she is reclaiming her inheritance held in tenore. Medieval tenura consisted of property being held in absentia while the lord was at war. Italian vulgarizations of the Mirror, all based on the Latin, are aware of the connotation of what in modern Italian is having rights or duties a tenore, by law.83 We can understand this in terms of modern English “tenance.” A tenant holds a property in tenore for a period of time, after which it returns to its rightful owner. It can be said that both parties hold the property, for the landlord owns it and it is leased to the tenant. Porete holds the nature as its landlady. God, as king, holds it as a tenant and returns it, but not as a gift of grace. If a king should give one of his servants, who loyally served him, a great gift, by which gift the servant would be eternally rich, without ever doing any service again, why would a wise man be astounded by this? . . . [A] wise man is never astounded when another does what is Àtting for him to do.84
It is not that a wise man is not astounded, as Babinsky suggests, because “a truly courtly and gentle heart recognizes the largesse of a gift given.”85 No matter how generous a king is known to be, a servant who not only is released from expected servitude but also becomes eternally rich will certainly be astounded at such an unexpected gift. What “is Àtting” is better understood by the Latin translator who renders l’appartient as ad se spectat seu pertinet.86 The king is only doing what is expected of him, what pertains to his duty as a tenant returning something held in trust. Love is divine by nature, and so is Porete, through droicture d’amour, the bloodline that the king now reveals to be engraved in Love’s charter. We are now better able to understand why “it is fitting that the soul be conformable” in our opening passage and why her true form has been “granted and 81
Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Colledge) 41. Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinksy) 129. 83 Marguerite Porete, Lo specchio delle anime semplici (Classici del pensiero cristiano; Cinisello Balsamo, Milan: San Paolo, 1994). 84 Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinksy) 161. 85 Ibid., 228. 86 Verdeyen, Ruusbroec and his Mysticism, 244. 82
106
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
given to her without beginning.”87 If it has been granted to her without beginning, it is because it has always been hers; she never lost it. She does regain her true form in the sense for which Porete generally uses semblance rather than forme. She has to lose her semblable, as the iron or the river, in the sense of name or consciousness of distinction. In this way she will be conformable (semblable) and able to regain her true name or consciousness of indistinction. “Now this soul has her right name from the nothingness in which she rests” (son droit non du nient en que elle demoure).88 In this context, we can see how Porete puns on the word detenue. Not only does she now have her name, but she is imprisoned and “held (detenu) in the country of peace.”89 She is “detained” in a peaceful land because the king has “detained”—held in tenure—her name. Before, she was “detained” in the sense of being enclosed, as we saw preserved in the pool of ideas from which Mechthild appropriated the concept of enclosure. What was for Mechthild “enclosed” is present, but in an ironical sense. Porete says: I used to be enclosed In the servitude of captivity When desire imprisoned me In the will of affection.90
She used to be imprisoned like souls who serve the virtues are still imprisoned, captive of the desire for a virtuous life she once mistakenly assumed to be the equivalent of desire for God. Now she is imprisoned and/or dwells in a peaceful land (en paiz suis demouree), freer than “those still imprisoned (demouree) by virtue.”91 She urges the reader to annihilate the virtues along with everything else since they are an encumbrance that takes away peace of mind. If we could state with certainty that Porete knew of Mechthild, speciÀcally her concern about sin, we could read her here as subverting Mechthild’s claim that one should ignite God’s Àre and “fuel it with the wood of virtues.”92 In a few places in Mechthild’s text, saints burn happily and shine fueled by their virtuous life.93 Porete will happily annihilate in Àre the wood or iron of virtue, but as a way of getting rid of them forever. It is not only the sense of the terms used but also their sound that indicates that a complex of metaphors is being activated. We will return to the alliteration of the phoneme /pr/, which occurs in all the passages cited and connects, among other terms, the soul emprisonee to the emprainture of the doctrine of conformity above. This aural mechanism is barely discernible in the written prose, which conceals an 87 88 89 90 91 92 93
Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinksy) 125. Ibid., 156. Ibid. Ibid., 200. Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Colledge) 41. Mechthild, Fliessende Licht, 234. E.g., ibid., 236.
JUAN MARIN
107
original poetical or semi-poetical counterpart combining alliteration with rhyme. In one example of rhyme in prose we Ànd, if we rewrite it as verse: “les Vertuz / ont bien cegneau et aparceu / oians tous ceulx / qui l’ont voulu.”94 We can also rewrite as verse another passage combining rhyme and alliteration: Et porce peaut l’en bien dire Que cil est petit o pouvre qui souvent demande voire encore qui rien demande. Car tout estre quel qu’il soit N’est que ung jeu de pelote et jeu d’enfant envers le souverain estre de nient voulouir ouquel estre les francs demourent sans remouvoir car celui qui est franc en son droit estre ne pourroit ne refuser ne vouloir, ne rien promectre.95
The linguistic acrobatics of passages such as this would have kept the audience enraptured. Alliteration of sounds such as /p/ and /r/ here and /pr/ in the passage on the imprint of the soul help recall what was said in an earlier passage. In this way the audience is led to understand the multivocality of a later use of the sound, such as when it reappears in a context centered on the character of Mary Magdalene. The audience learns more about what receiving the imprint of the seal means when they listen to the story of Magdalene in the desert, where “Love overtook her, which annihilated her (Amour l’imprint qui l’adnientint).”96 The English translation obscures the original context, where the true form, that of nothingness, is conveyed by “overtaking,” “imprinting,” “embracing,” “enclosing,” “detaining”—all of these meanings at the same time. The teaching is then imprinted in the audience’s mind by a Ànal alliterative mnemonic: Love works in the soul “in her, through her, without her (en elle par elle sans elle).”97 The alliteration is extended when the soul is praised as well taught (aprinse), recalling the alliteration in the passage from which our Àrst example of rhyme was extracted. There annihilation is required of those who want to understand and learn/ teach (entendre et aprendre), something those still enslaved to Virtue cannot do.98 Virtues lack what is needed, so the soul asks: “[H]ow will they teach their pupils (comment aprendront les Vertuz a leur subgez)?” The pun here is that the virtues will forever imprison (aprendront) those under their control (subgez) unless they 94 95 96 97 98
Porete, Mirouer de Simples Ames (ed. Guarnieri and Verdeyen) 162. Ibid., 166. Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinsky) 168. Porete, Mirouer de simples âmes (ed. Guarnieri and Verdeyen) 260. Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinsky) 132.
108
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
are freed by Porete’s message. This freedom will be described later when the soul exclaims how she is enprinse in God, in contrast to how she used to be enclosed under the control of the Virtues.99 There the soul was embraced (emprinse), held (detenue) by Love in a freeing way that delivered her from being imprisoned (enclose), held (detenue). Here the way to be freed is through entendre et aprendre, understanding (entendre) Porete’s teaching and, through learning (aprendre), seizing (aprendre) what has always been held (detenue) in possession. This understanding allows us to conclude, with Bernard, by observing that the annihilated soul does not lose consciousness of distinction but rather attains consciousness of indistinction. The transition or imprint received in annihilation involves this consciousness of indistinction that in the following passage is to be acquired by the understanding of the intellect (entendement): [W]hat He possesses is more mine than what I possess or ever will possess. . . . I love better by far, one hundred thousand times to one, the abundant goodness which remains in Him than I do the gifts from Him which I have and will have in possession. Thus I love better what is in Him beyond my intellect than I do what is in Him and in my intellect. For this reason what He understands and what I do not understand is more mine than what I understand about Him and which is mine.100
Since the soul is divine by nature, we cannot claim that the annihilated soul receives anything by grace. Except, that is, the one thing she lacks, which is beyond her intellect. This last element is the consciousness of indistinction that she acquires now but will fully understand only in heaven. This knowledge is about something that is hers, not something that belongs to God. This is why the meaning of what is said, the awareness of what it implies, annihilates her and gives her the form (semblable) of nothingness. It transforms her into the Deity and makes her share his form (semblable) or understanding. What is revealed is that she has always retained her true divine form (forme). She must seize what she has always possessed, “detained” in tenore as owner, through the one who, “loving her,” held it for her. He “detained” it in tenore as tenant until the lady reclaimed what had always been under her dominion. This is why this possession is more valuable than anything else she has or will have. Annihilation is thus a process originating at that moment when a gift of consciousness is granted. The imprint of nothingness occurs in time, yet it also occurs in a pre-created state without beginning; she always possessed its form. The deiÀcation involved in annihilation shares annihilation’s temporality when both are seen as dynamic processes. Yet deiÀcation simultaneously escapes temporality when the soul discovers that it is an atemporal process, one that has never begun and shall never end.
99 100
Porete, Mirouer de simples âmes (ed. Guarnieri and Verdeyen) 344. Porete, Mirror of Simple Souls (trans. Babinksy) 113.
JUAN MARIN
109
Q Conclusion Until recently, historical research about free spirits and beguines has been conÀned to the late medieval period.101 Lerner tells us that he did not Ànd any evidence that would have led him to go much further than the fourteenth century, since, he claims, “by the end of the Àfteenth century the doctrines of the Free Spirit were known only to encyclopedists and antiquarians.”102 But if we follow Lerner in considering the free spirit movement, not as a distinctive sect, but as the “ ‘freespirit style’ of affective mysticism particularly congenial to thirteenth century religious women” we have been studying, then their history has a sequel. Recent work has uncovered evidence suggesting that their radical language of annihilation and deiÀcation spread in early modern Europe through an anonymous circulation of the Mirror.103 In the future we may be able to explain the doctrinal similarities between Porete and the seventeenth-century theological controversies that led to the modern “crisis of mysticism.”104 Thus our exploration of beguine theology helps us begin to approach an unresolved dilemma: How, and why, did the medieval language of annihilation and deiÀcation haunt Europe even during the throes that gave birth to modernity?
101 Romana Guarnieri, “Beghinismo d’oltralpe e Bizzochismo italiano tra il secolo XIV e il secolo XV,” Analecta tertii ordinis regularis sancti Francisci 17 (1984) 1. See also eadem, Donna e chiesa tra mistica e istituzioni (Rome: Storia e Letteratura, 2004). 102 Lerner, Heresy, 242. 103 Emery, “Margaret Porette,” xxiii; Guarnieri, Donna e Chiesa; Paolo Simoncelli suggests that a Catalan version of the Mirror may have once existed. He does so in his study of the circulation in the Catalonian region of a few extracts from Porete via Bartolomeo Cordoni’s Dialogue of the Union of God with the Soul. Paolo Simoncelli, “Il ‘Dialogo dell’unione spirituale di Dio con l’anima’ tra alumbradismo spagnolo e prequietismo italiano,” Anuario de l’Istituto storico italiano per l’ età moderna e contemporanea 29–30 (1977–1998) 565–601; Elena Botinas i Montero et al., Les Beguines (Barcelona: Abadia de Montserrat, 2003); La perle evangelique (ed. Daniel Vidal; Grenoble, France: Jerome Millon, 1997) 104 Hollywood, Soul as Virgin Wife, 263; McGinn, Flowering, ix.
Jews and Healing at Medieval Saints’ Shrines: Participation, Polemics, and Shared Cultures* Ephraim Shoham-Steiner Ben-Gurion University of the Negev, Israel
In an anonymous Jewish anti-Christian polemical tractate from the thirteenth century we Ànd the Hebrew formulation of what seems to be a common sneer by Christians at their Jewish neighbors: “Why do you not seek the aid of the great the way we do? (for they seek the aid of their saints).”1 The assumption behind this question is that medieval Jews indeed refrained from visiting the shrines of Christian saints and from beseeching them to heal the sick or mediate between the human and divine realms. In this paper I wish to question this assumption and suggest the possibility that some Jews did approach the shrines of the saints and seek their assistance, especially in healing physical disabilities. Given the strong appeal of the cults of healing saints in medieval European societies, it seems likely that Jews not only were well aware of this practice and displayed a measure of curiosity toward it, but possibly participated in the rituals as well.2 * This article stems from a lecture delivered at a session organized by Fiona GrifÀths and the Hagiography Society at the forty-third International Congress on Medieval Studies in Kalamazoo, Michigan in May 2008. I wish to thank Daniel Abrams, Judah Galinsky, Patrick Geary, Yuval Harari, Simcha Emmanuel, William C. Jordan, Katrin Kogman-Appel, Ora Limor, Kimberley Patton, Avraham (Rami) Reiner, Adiel Shremer, and Eli Yassif for reading earlier drafts of this article, discussing various aspects of it with me, and sharing their wise council and incisive comments. 1 David Berger, The Jewish-Christian Debate in the High Middle Ages: A Critical edition of Nizzahon Vetus: Introduction, Translation, and Commentary (Philadelphia: JPS, 1979) 210. 2 On magic as an intercultural agent from antiquity through the Middle Ages, see Gideon Bohak, “Greek, Coptic, and Jewish Magic in the Cairo Genizah,” BASP 36 (1999) 27–44; Naomi Janowitz, Magic in the Roman World: Pagans, Jews and Christians (London: Routledge, 2001); Dan Levene, “ ‘. . . and by the name of Jesus . . .’: An Unpublished Magic Bowl in Jewish Aramaic,” JSQ 6 (1999) 283–308; Peter Schäfer, “Jewish Magic Literature in Late Antiquity and Early Middle Ages,” JJS 41 (1990) 75–91; Shaul Shaked, “Medieval Jewish Magic in Relation to Islam: Theoretical Attitudes HTR 103:1 (2010) 111–29
112
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
Recognition of the popular lure of these rites can be found in the writings of Jewish learned elite in the form of anti-Christian polemical literature undermining the idea of mediation and advocating a direct appeal to the Almighty.3 Nevertheless, there is very little, if any, direct positive evidence of Jews actually engaging in this activity. In this article I wish to present some new evidence that will illuminate the issue and to suggest a methodological approach by which we may Ànd additional corroboration of this phenomenon.4 I will argue that one should look for traces of behavior of this kind in the writings of its possible opponents. When I say that there is little or no “direct positive evidence,” I refer to documentation such as a church record indicating that a Jew made a donation to the shrine of a certain Christian saint after being miraculously healed or a personal Jewish document that refers clearly to such an act. The absence of statements of this kind is not surprising, however. Jews who turned to the aid of Christian saints for healing but were not ultimately cured would not have been likely to share their failed efforts with others. They would probably seek this aid covertly in the Àrst place and attempt to hide their actions afterward. On the other side of the religious divide, Christian writers would be unlikely to speak of a Jew who was miraculously cured at a shrine unless the incident served their religious and polemical interests, for example, by resulting in a conversion. Such testimonies do exist, but they are highly suspect as records of actual events. Christian exempla recount stories of Jews who were cured from disabilities and ailments after having been involved in what modern scholarship has termed “interfaith dialogue.” These stories were designed to enhance belief in the miraculous powers of saints and often ended with the Jews’ conversion. In one such story, St. Severinus strikes a Jew dumb during a debate. The Jew is only cured after he realizes that his afÁiction was caused by his blindness to the Christian truth. In the end, he converts and is baptized.5 Another fascinating account is recorded in the Byzantine miracle tales of St. Damien. A Jewish woman visits St. Damien’s tomb in the hope of being cured of a cancerous tumor in her breast. The Saint advises the woman to eat pork. At Àrst she refuses and Genres,” in Judaism and Islam: Boundaries, Communication and Interaction (ed. Benjamin J. Hary, John L. Hayes, and Fred Astren; Leiden: Brill, 2000) 97–109; Eliot R. Wolfson, “Magic from Late Antiquity to the Middle Ages,” The Review of Rabbinic Judaism 4 (2001) 78–120. 3 On the nature of the Jewish anti-Christian polemics in Western Europe, see Samuel Krauss, Jewish-Christian Controversy from the Earliest Times to 1789 (ed. and rev. William Horbury; vol. 1; Tübingen: Mohr Siebeck, 1995); Daniel Lasker, “Jewish Philosophical Polemics in Ashkenaz,” in Contra Iudaeos: Ancient and Medieval Polemics Between Christians and Jews (ed. Ora Limor and Guy Stroumsa; Tübingen: Mohr Siebeck 1996) 195–214; and recently idem, Jewish Philosophical Polemics Against Christianity (Oxford: Littman, 2007). 4 In a previous paper I discussed the challenge that the cult of saints and its strong healing potential posed to medieval Jewry and pointed out possible devices constructed within the Jewish community as a result of this challenge. Ephraim Shoham-Steiner, “ ‘For a prayer in that place would be most welcome’: Jews, Holy Shrines and Miracles — A New Approach,” Viator 37 (2006) 369–95. 5 James Parks, The ConÁict of the Church and the Synagogue: A Study in the Origins of AntiSemitism (New York: Atheneum, 1981) 296–97.
EPHRAIM SHOHAM-STEINER
113
due to her adherence to the Jewish dietary laws, but she eventually follows the saint’s suggestion and is not only cured but decides to convert to Christianity.6 Although accounts that refer directly to Jewish reliance on healing saints are scarce and of questionable reliability, much can be inferred from available indirect evidence. Research has shown that both Jewish and Christian pious circles expressed concern over what seems to have been a rather widespread phenomenon, namely the interreligious exchange of domestic remedies, charms, and miracle cures. Attempts to limit and discourage this exchange Àt within the larger framework typical of certain pietistic trends in both religions. In the second half of the twelfth century pietists sought to minimize interreligious contact. Clear manifestations of this tendency can be found, for example, in the extensive correspondence of Pope Innocent III regarding the Jews. The Ànal outcome of his essays on the Jews, scattered throughout his extensive writing, eventually crystallized in the form of articles relating to the Jews in the resolutions of the Fourth Lateran Council of 1215.7 The limitations set by this document were a reaction to the perceived coexistence of Jews and Christians and relatively free exchange of ideas between the two groups during the two preceding centuries. Such interaction existed in the form of non-Jewish employees in Jewish homes, close commercial relations, partnerships between Christians and Jews, and Jewish and non-Jewish neighborly relations, manifested in, among other contexts, the realm of domestic medical interactions and the exchange of domestic medical knowledge.8 6
André Jean Festugière, Saint Thècle, Saints Côme et Damien, Saints Cyr et Jean (extraits), Saint George (Paris: Picard, 1971) 100–102. I wish to thank Gabor Klaniczay of the Central European University in Budapest for referring me to this miracle tale. The story of St. Damien reÁects the Christian understanding that Jews would not violate their dietary laws for medical reasons. Jews however did use “non-kosher” ingredients including lard and pork in medical recipes. Evidence of this phenomenon can be found in numerous documents in Judeo-European languages as well as in Hebrew medical remedies scattered in Jewish medieval manuscripts. See Ephraim Shoham-Steiner, “ ‘This should not to be shown to a gentile’: Medico-Magical Texts in Medieval Franco-German Jewish Rabbinic Manuscripts,” Journal of Early Medicine 2 (2009) (forthcoming). On this phenomenon see Sara Larrat-Keeper and Rolf H. Bremmer’s splendid collection of essays, Signs on the Edge: Space, Text and Margin in Medieval Manuscripts (ed. Sara Larratt-Keefer and Rolf H. Bremmer Jr.; Peeters: Leuven, 2007). 7 On this correspondence and the decisions of the Fourth Lateran council of 1215, see Solomon Grayzel, The Church and the Jews in the XIIIth Century (2 vols.; Philadelphia: Dropsie College for Hebrew and Cognate Learning, 1933) 1:9–83. For a translation of the text of articles 67–70 in the decrees of the Forth Lateran Council of 1215, see Norman P. Tanner, Decrees of the Ecumenical Councils (Original text established by Giuseppe Alberigo et al. in consultation with Hubert Jedin; 2 vols; London: Sheed & Ward, 1990). 8 For a survey of the vast network of Jewish-Christian relations in medieval Europe, see Jonathan M. Elukin, Living Together, Living Apart: Rethinking Jewish-Christian Relations in the Middle Ages (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2007). An example of this tight commercial connection can be found in Haym Soloveitchik, Principles and Pressures: Jewish Trade in Gentile Wine in the Middle Ages (Tel Aviv: `Alma, 2003) (Hebrew). In this book the author discusses the internal changes in Jewish ethical, religious, and legal reactions to the traditional approach to dealing with gentile wine in the Franco-German Jewish realm. The wine industry and trade as well
114
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
This last area of interaction is portrayed in two narrative exempla that seek to limit domestic medical exchanges, thereby testifying to their existence. The stories come from works which reÁect the views of pietistic elements in each society in the late twelfth and early thirteenth centuries. The Àrst exemplum comes from a Jewish religious ethical work known as the Book of the Pious (Sefer Hasidim);9 the other comes from a Christian monastic exempla collection. For devout Jews like Rabbi Judah the Pious of Regensburg (d. 1217), the co-author and editor of the Book of the Pious,10 such exchanges were especially objectionable when the methods of healing involved the use of ritually impure ingredients or typically non-Jewish (pagan or Christian) folk remedies. For their part, pious Christians objected to Jewish use of the healing powers of Christian saints. The account in Sefer Hasidim appears among other ethical rulings that express pietistic ideas about the relationship between Jews and the surrounding Christian society. In this story, the author praises a Jewish mother for rejecting her Christian neighbor’s offer to use a stone chip relic from no less then the ultimate Christian shrine — the Holy Sepulchre in Jerusalem. as the wine-crediting business became important elements in the regional economy and involved both Jews and non-Jews. 9 This extraordinary source of information on Jewish culture in the medieval Franco-German world has survived in a few manuscripts. The most extensive of these is MS Parma Palatina Heb. 3280. This manuscript was forgotten after the Middle Ages. In 1891 it was discovered, copied, and published by Jehuda Wistinezki in Berlin. A later printing of Wistinezki’s edition came out in Frankfurt am Main in 1924 with a long introduction by Jacob Freimann. Another, shorter, version of Sefer Hasidim survives only in an early printing from Bologna (1538). Unlike the Parma MS version, this version became rather popular and was reprinted many times after 1538. The most recent edition based on the Bologna printing was edited by Rabbi Reuven Margaliyot and published in Jerusalem in 1957. Three contemporary scholars — Alfred Haverkamp (Trier University), Peter Schäfer (Princeton University), and Israel J. Yuval (Hebrew University) — are currently leading a team of researchers (Saskia Dönitz, Avraham [Rami] Reiner, René Richtscheid, and others) working on a new edition of Sefer Hasidim entitled Juden und Christen im „Buch der Frommen“ (Sefer Hasidim). Edition, Übersetzung und Kommentierung ausgewählter Texte zur Geschichte der Juden und der jüdisch-christlichen Beziehungen im mittelalterlichen Deutschland. The team’s preliminary Àndings were published in Peter Schäfer’s “Jews and Christians in the High Middle Ages: The Book of the Pious,” in The Jews in Europe in the Middle Ages (Tenth to Fourteenth Centuries): Proceedings of the International Symposium held at Speyer, 20–25 October, 2002 (ed. Christoph Cluse; Turnhout, Belgium: Brepols, 2004) 29–42. Another important contribution by Peter Schäfer and Michael Meerson to our knowledge and research of Sefer Hasidim is the recent uploading of the PUSHDThe Princeton University Sefer Hasidim Database onto the World Wide Web: https://etc.princeton. edu/sefer_hasidim/index.php. Our story appears in the Parma MS (Wistinezki edition) § 1552. 10 Rabbi Yehuda himself was apparently a revered Jewish holy man during his lifetime and probably even more so posthumously. See She’elot U’Teshuvot MaHaRIL § 118 (ed. Yitzchok Satz; Jerusalem: Mekhon Yerushalayim, 1980) 214 [Hebrew]. Many hagiographical accounts mention Rabbi Yehuda as well as his father, Rabbi Shmuel b. Kalonymus “the Pious” of Speyer, as saintly Àgures. One of the largest collections of these hagiographical accounts is the Judeo-German (Yiddish) Ma’ase Buch. This collection probably circulated orally in both Hebrew and Yiddish for some time before it was recorded in writing and eventually printed in Basel in 1602. A Àne though somewhat archaic English translation of some of the tales can be found in Moses Gaster, Ma’aseh Book: Book of the Jewish Tales and Legends (2 vols.; Philadelphia: JPS, 1934).
EPHRAIM SHOHAM-STEINER
115
The Christian neighbor presented the stone chip relic in order to help the Jewish woman’s dying son, asserting that it had worked miracles in the past. From the Hebrew phrasing, it is clear that the Jewish woman refused because of the obviously Christian basis of the relic’s healing power. The story casts the woman’s reserve as a particularly impressive sign of piety by implying that her son may have died due to a lack of miraculous assistance attained outside the parameters of Jewish practice. Sefer Hasidim praises the mother in the conclusion to the story. This exemplum demonstrates that Jews, especially in dire need, did indeed consider employing Christian relics in domestic medical care or exploring non-Jewish methods of faith healing. The second exemplum comes from England and was quoted in the late nineteenth century by Joseph Jacobs.11 Although similar to the German-Jewish story, it describes the dilemma from a pious Christian point of view. A Jewess asks her friendly Christian neighbor, one Godeliva of Canterbury, to stop by her inn (hospitium) upon returning from the shrine of St. Thomas Beckett. Godeliva is described as “being skilled in charms and incantations” and the story mentions that she “was accustomed to charm the weak foot of the Jewess.” In this instance, Godeliva obtains a bucket of holy water at the saint’s shrine, which the Jewess wants her to use to heal her sore leg. No sooner does Godeliva cross the threshold of the Jewish home than the saint, angered by the sacrilegious intent to use his healing water on a nonbeliever, miraculously causes the bucket to break. The vessel splits in three, evoking a Trinitarian image, and all the water spills out, preventing either woman from using it. The story goes on to state that Godeliva “learned the wicked intuitions of her own mind and, understanding that she had committed a fault, she returned no more to that Jewess.” The very opposition expressed in these sources reÁects a reality in which Jews and Christians exchanged domestic medical cures as well as aspects of their respective cultures.12 Not surprisingly, all the characters in both stories are women. We are dealing here with the domestic side of medieval life, which was 11 Joseph Jacobs, The Jews of Angevin England: Documents and Records from Latin and Hebrew Sources (London: Nutt, 1893) 153. 12 Similar objections by religious authorities to the use of medical knowledge deriving from Jews can be found in the Latin East. See Benjamin Z. Kedar, “Jews and Samaritans in the Crusading Kingdom of Jerusalem,” Tarbiz 53 (1984) 387–408 (Hebrew), esp. 404. Kedar refers to the ruling of the Latin church council of Nicosia that objected to the use of medical assistance by Jewish and Muslim physicians. The reason for the ruling was that Jews and Muslims abstained from consulting Christian physicians and viewed it as a violation of their respective religious codes (Philippe Labbé and Gabriel Cossart, Sacrosancta Concilia, vol. 11/2 [Paris, 1621] col. 2379BC). Kedar dates these articles to the mid-thirteenth century and states that they originated in decrees made earlier by Latin Church authorities in the Latin Kingdom of Jerusalem in the Holy Land. The Christian preference for Jewish and Muslim medical practitioners, especially in the Latin Outremer, is corroborated by the testimony of William of Tyre, ca. 1180, which states that the Frankish princes look down upon Christian physicians and prefer to consult with Jews and Muslims in matters of health (Guillelmus Tyrensis, Historia 18.34 in Recueil des Historiens des Croisades. Historiens occidentaux (Paris: Beugnot, 1841–1843) 1:879.
116
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
typically considered by medieval male authors to be a women’s realm. Clearly, such exchanges took place at all levels of society and among both genders. They may indeed have been more common among women than men, but it is also possible that the focus on women in these stories is simply due to the male perspective of the authors.13 There is a substantial difference between the claim expressed above and the notion that Jews actually sought the aid of Christian healing shrines in full public view. Entering a Christian shrine for the purpose of approaching the tomb or reliquary of a saint is obviously more problematic from a Jewish perspective than using a domestic cure given by a neighbor. Thus, what evidence there is of Jews turning to the aid of saints at shrines comes from those who condemned such behavior rather then those who actually practiced it.14 This kind of evidence should be utilized with great care, for critiques of particular modes of religious behavior do not necessarily indicate that such behavior actually took place. We must bear in mind that, in many cases, such critiques were used as didactic devices by those who wished to shape their audiences’ mentality via argumentum ad absurdum. However, careful analysis of such evidence with special attention to credible details may serve as a tool for reconstructing a behavioral mode within a social group.
Q The Text’s Background To illustrate this point, let us examine the text of an exemplum that presents an argument against faith healing at the shrines of Christian saints. The text appears 13 A late-thirteenth-century responsum by Rabbi Haim Paltiel of Magdeburg refers to the possible confessional error inherent in the Jewish folk practice of praying at the gravesites of deceased rabbis or martyred Jews. R. Haim states that mistaking the dead for divine intermediaries is more likely to occur among those “who don’t fully understand the issues.” This may be a reference to the “uneducated masses” or to women. Rabbi Haim’s responsa appears in the Lemberg edition of the responsa collection of Rabbi Meir of Rothenburg, §164. A similar opinion is voiced in Sefer Hasidim (Wistinetzki edition) § § 669–70. It should be noted, however, that Jewish dignitaries and sages of Franco-German descent testify that they themselves went to pray at the graves of the righteous. In The Testament of Judah Asheri (the son of Rabbi Asher Ben Yechiel [Ha’RoSH], who emigrated from Germany to Spain in the early fourteenth century) Judah writes the following: “. . . Likewise my desire for children was not due to my love for them or my expectation of pride in them, my desire was to obey the divine precept and to raise up an offspring to Àll my father’s place in study and righteousness. For this I often prayed at the graves of the perfect and upright. God in his mercy gave me Àve sons and I considered myself through them as a live man among my people and brethren. . . .” See Israel Abrahams, Hebrew Ethical Wills (Philadelphia: JPS, 1926) 2:168. 14 We do Ànd evidence of Jews entering churches, although the exempla stories recounting such encounters usually describe them doing so in disguise. One such story tells of a Jew who attempts to steal a host from a church and is miraculously stopped (Das Viaticum Narrationum des Hermannus Bononiensis [ed. Alfons Hilka; vol. 3 of Beiträge zur lateinische Erzählungsliteratur des Mittelalters; Berlin: Weidmannsche Buchhandlung, 1935] no. 72, 100–101). On this matter see Miri Rubin, “Imagining the Jew: The Late Medieval Eucharistic Discourse,” in In and Out of the Ghetto: Jewish-Gentile Relations in Late Medieval and Early Modern Germany (ed. R. Po-Chia-Hsia and Hartmut Lehmann; Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995) 182–83.
EPHRAIM SHOHAM-STEINER
117
in MS Vatican Biblioteca Apostolica Heb. 285, a collection of many works bound together in one codex.15 This speciÀc homiletic collection on the Decalogue was recently analyzed by Anat Shapira in a comprehensive study.16 The text is constructed as a series of exempla arranged according to the order of the Decalogue, each with a concluding moral statement to underscore the importance of following the commandment to which it corresponds. The tale that most concerns us appears as the second story in the second cycle dedicated to the second commandment: “Thou shalt have no other gods before me” (Exod 20:2). The Àrst story in this cycle also deals with idol worship, though not in its pure biblical form. Its subject is, rather, demonology and the potential for gaining wealth through use of demonic powers The complete homiletic cycle of the Midrash on the Decalogue was probably constructed before the high Middle Ages.17 It was relatively popular and appears in several medieval manuscripts, though the texts are not identical and the stories do not always appear in precisely the same order.18 In addition to MS Vatican Heb. 285, the midrash can be found in several other medieval Franco-German manuscripts, among them a complete version of the work found in MS Paris BN Heb. 716, which served as the proof text in Shapira’s edition. As we shall see in our story, some of its main themes resonate 15 This is a Àne example of the eclectic nature of fourteenth-century medieval Hebrew manuscripts. Not only is it written in many different scribal hands, but paleographical analysis has shown that it contains a wide array of sources. Some of the manuscript’s Àles and dossiers are penned in a style typical of Jewish Byzantine manuscripts, while parts of it are written by scribes adhering to the Jewish thirteenth- and fourteenth-century Franco-German style. It is not the paleography alone that shows diversity. The nature and content of the assembled works is also immensely varied. It contains Jewish exegetical commentaries on sections of the Hebrew Bible, tractates of medieval scientiÀc knowledge in Hebrew, German Jewish ethical works, Jewish legal works, Hebrew homiletics, and a collection of exempla. The exempla collection belongs to the Franco-German portion of the manuscript and consists of almost two dozen tales. These tales are medieval Hebrew adaptations of older stories, some of which appear in earlier Jewish sources such as the Talmud. The entire cycle of stories is known as midrash aseret ha-dibrot (Homily on the Decalogue) and has been the subject of scholarly analysis since the nineteenth-century Wissenschaft des Judentums movement. See Adolph Jellinek, Bet ha’Midrasch. Kleiner Midraschim und vermischter Abhandlungen aus der älteren Jüdischen Literatur (Jerusalem: Wahrmann, 1967) 1:62–90. Jellinek originally published this collection in 1853 in Leipzig. Our story appears on page 71. Jellinek’s version of the story is slightly different from the version in MS Vatican Heb. 285. 16 Midrash Aseret Ha-Dibrot: A Midrash on the Ten Commandments Text, Sources and Interpretation (ed. Anat Shapira; Jerusalem: Mosad Bialik, 2005). Another recent thorough analysis of the text form a different point of view can be found in Eli Yassif’s monumental study of Hebrew folktales. (Eli Yassif, The Hebrew Folktale: History, Genre, Meaning [Jerusalem: Mosad Bialik, 1994] 380–99 [Hebrew]; trans. Jacqueline S. Teitelbaum [Bloomington, Ind.: Bloomington University Press, 1999] 351–70) 17 Shapira reinforces Jellinek’s assumption that the midrash was composed no earlier then the tenth century. 18 On this matter see the work of Myron B. Lerner, who has written extensively on the Midrash on the Decalogue. Among his works are “Liqutei Ma’asiyyot,” Quiryat Sefer 61 (1986–1987) 869–91 (Hebrew) and idem, “Al ha-midrashim le-aseret ha-dibrot,” Mehkerei Talmud (ed. Yaakov Sussman and David Rosenthal; Magnes: Jerusalem 1990) 1:217–36 (Hebrew).
118
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
with speciÀc concepts that were common in Franco-German Jewish anti-Christian polemical literature of the thirteenth century, indicating that although it may have emerged from an earlier version of the text, the story as we Ànd it in MS Vatican Heb. 285 was probably shaped to address contemporary audiences.
Q The Text I begin with a presentation of the main tale from the Vatican manuscript:19 There was a certain lame (VK]N) Jew who heard a rumor that in a certain idolatrous shrine somewhere lame people were being cured. That Jew said to himself: “I shall go there, for I might be cured.” He went there and spent the night in the shrine with the rest of the cripples that were assembled there. In the middle of the night, when they all were asleep, the Jew lay awake. Suddenly he saw a demon creeping out of the wall, holding a vessel of oil.20 The demon anointed all the sick people assembled there with the oil from the vessel — all but the Jew. The Jew turned to the demon and asked him: “Why have you not anointed me with the oil?” The demon replied: “Are you not a Jew? Since when do Jews go to an idolatrous shrine? Do you not know that these idolatries are false? I do this,” said the demon, “for I want to deceive these gentiles in order to cause them to continue to err and thus cause them to lose their share in the world to come. You, however, should deter yourself (¨[UP) from idolatry and instead you should stand and pray directly to the Almighty, the Holy One Blessed Be He, so that He will cure you.” “Know now,” added the demon, “that tomorrow was the designated date for your cure and because you have transgressed and did this (XE^X]p?p), you will never Ànd a cure.”
19
My translation. The Hebrew reads as follows:
ÞP[LL]LpVK]NPOpHNE[UQFLV^LH[F?L]LpVQ[E?QppVK]NHNE]H[L]FLp?Q VEp?XNELP]PpÚP[pPÞPL“ETVXE]P[EpÞPE”"]H[L][X[EVQEETVXQ%pP PX[OLÚQLE\]XNEH]pLEV[V?]H[L][X[E]Rp]P[O[]LpLP]PL]\NFL]L[Ú]Q[Q]P?F § EPLQ]RTQ]X[E[”"]H[L]L[PVQE]H[L]LXEN]RL[,]P[NLXEÞWL]L[ÚQpPpÞT[H]F[ LXEÚ]EÏLV^LH[F?PÞP[L]H[L]]O[ÏÚEOFXEFLQPÏLXE]H[L]EP]O[”"[PVQE“ÏXOW P[?PUPNLPL]L]EP[X[?JF[U^N]p]HOX[EL?JQ]REÞOEPEÏQQpLFÚ]E^?p?H[] VNQPp?HX.ÞETV]pE[LÞ[VFp[HUL]RTPPPTXLP[H[Q?P[^?F¨[UPF]]NLXEPFEEFL p[HUFHENJF]ÞOP[“P[?PLE[TVE\QXEPXE^X]p?pV[F?F[ETVXLPÞRQ^L]L ]]U[]NE[LpE[LÞ[VF 20
In the version recounted in Shapira’s study of the story the demon is replaced by a man.
EPHRAIM SHOHAM-STEINER
119
That is why a man should put his faith in the Holy One Blessed Be He, for He is a living and existing God.21
As noted above, this story was the exemplum selected by the compiler of Vatican to highlight the commandment requiring Jews to refrain from worshiping other gods. The story opens with a rumor that reaches the Jewish lame man about the powers of a speciÀc shrine and its saint who specializes in healing the lame. From the Hebrew phrasing, it is clear that the Jew has doubts as to whether he will indeed be healed at the shrine, yet it seems that since no other remedies have been successful, he goes anyway. This point, mentioned almost in passing, is of pivotal importance. It seems that because he lives on the margin of society and suffers from a debilitating condition, the lame Jew feels that he has little to lose. Sociologists have observed that individuals who suffer from a handicap tend to view their lives and social encounters through the prism of their disability.22 At times this viewpoint may cause some disabled people to think that society is unaware and unappreciative of their condition and their difÀculties. They therefore view their situation as a license to transgress social and religious norms. The author’s decision to make his point using a liminal situation as the crux of his moral teaching seems to reÁect an actual social conÁict that transpired within medieval European Jewish communities. The story does not describe how the Jew arrived at the shrine and how he managed to enter, but it is likely that he gained entrance by virtue of his disability. Like the other cripples assembled at the shrine, the Jew spends the night near the tomb of the saint in the hope that he will gain some relief from his ailment. This practice of spending the night at a healing shrine is typical of the pagan pre-Christian world and continued at some shrines into the Christian era.23 In the Greco-Roman cult of Asclepios (Greek) or Aesculapius (Latin), individuals who
MS
21 The author, compiler, or copyist’s decision to end the tale with an afÀrmation that the Jewish God is a “living and existing God” is highly polemical. Jews in the Franco-German sphere referred time and again to the “dead” Christian deity manifested in the Àgure of Jesus nailed to the cross, contrasting him with the living, eternal Jewish God. An illustration of this can be found in yet another Jewish exemplum recounted by the Jewish mid-thirteenth-century Viennese sage Yitzchak ben Moshe (nicknamed “Or Zarua” after his popular halakhic compendium). In the Ànal entry dealing with the details of the Jewish New Year, Or Zarua quotes the famous tale of the martyrdom of Rabbi Amnon of Mainz. For this text and a close analysis of it, see Ivan G. Marcus, “A Pious Community in Doubt: Jewish Martyrdom among Northern European Jewry and the Story of Rabbi Amnon of Mainz,” in Essays in Hebrew Literature in Honor of Avraham Holtz (ed. Tseviyah BenYosef Ginor; New York: Bet ha-midrash le-Rabanim be-Amerika, 2003) 21–46.
John J. Macionis, Sociology (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1995) 9. Owsei Temkin, Hippocrates in a World of Pagans and Christians (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1991) 80. On Pagan and Christian incubation, see Ludwig Deubner, De Incubatione Capita Quattuor (Leipzig: Teubneri, 1900); Claudine Dauphin, “From Apollo and Asclepius to Christ: Pilgrimage and Healing at the Temple and Episcopal Basilica of Dor,” Liber Annuus 49 (1999) 397–430, esp. 419–24. On Jewish incubation dreams in talmudic culture, see Haim Weiss, “ ‘Twenty Four Dream Interpreters were in Jerusalem . . .’ On Dream Interpreters and Interpretation in the Talmudic Dream Tractate,” Jewish Studies 44 (2007) 37–77. 22 23
120
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
sought the aid of the deity were asked, as in our tale, to spend the night at his shrine. This process of healing is known as incubation. The patient would stay in a dormitory and during the night he or she would be visited by the god in a dream. A priest would then interpret the dream and prescribe a remedy or offer advice based on the interpretation. In this story, the Jew has a vision while awake at night by the tomb, which I conjecture might be a product of his inner turmoil or guilt.24 In the vision, the Jew sees a demon. This may be a rhetorical device designed to underscore the moral of the story: the very encounter between Jews and shrines should, in the narrator’s view, be seen as a meeting with potent but harmful supernatural beings.25 The use of oil by the demon adds an element of verisimilitude. Holy oil is a well-known feature of medieval healing practices and was an agent of miraculous cures in both Eastern and Western Christianity.26 Its appearance in this narrative seems designed to evoke a sense of the authentic experience of visiting a shrine. 24 Another alternative for understanding the lame Jew’s insomnia is that this is the Àrst encounter with supernatural elements in the story. Eli Yassif describes the supernatural aspects of Hebrew folktales as a form of sign language, an indication that readers or listeners should pay special attention in anticipation of the story’s main argument. See Yassif, The Hebrew Folklore, 144–66, 351–70 for this and other functions of magical and demonological elements in Hebrew folklore. 25 As noted above, in a different version of the story used by Anat Shapira, the Jew is met by a man rather than a demon, who administers the oil cure at the shrine. The difference between the versions should perhaps be explained as a polemical touch. The appearance of a man rather then a demon suggests that there was no actual miracle taking place but rather that the healing, attributed by Christians to divine power, was in fact all machinated by the priests of the shrine. 26 In 1175 Burchard of Strasbourg (Burchardus Argentoratensis) traveled to the Outremer as Emperor Fredrick Barbarosa’s special envoy. In his account he reports on a prodigy he witnessed at the site of the Greek Orthodox monastery of Saidnaiya (Syriac for “Our Lady”) in the outskirts of Damascus. “On this panel a likeness of the Blessed Virgin had once been painted, but now, wondrous to relate, a picture on wood has become incarnate, and oil, smelling sweeter than balsam, unceasingly Áows from it. By which oil many Christians Saracens and Jews are often cured of ailment . . .” See Bernard Hamilton, “Our Lady of Saidnaiya: An Orthodox Shrine Revered by Muslims and Knights Templar at the Time of the Crusades,” in The Holy Land, Holy Lands and Christian History: Papers Read at the 1998 Summer Meeting and the 1999 Winter Meeting of The Ecclesiastical History Society (ed. Robert. N. Swanson; Woodbridge, Suffolk: Boydell, 2000) 206–14. A vivid depiction of how oil was used in faith healing at the European shrines of saints can be found in the Àfteenth-century stained glass windows of the York Minster, which houses a large collection of such windows. Some of these windows highlight the life and miracles of St. William Fitzherbert, the local archbishop from 1143–1154 and the city of York’s patron saint. His tomb was located in the nave of the Minster and later shrines in the choir were among the outstanding architectural elements in the medieval building, but these, unfortunately, have not survived. The most important surviving monument of this cult is the 78-foot high stained glass window in the choir, painted ca. 1414 and funded by the Yorkshire Ros Barony. One panel (#16a) depicts cripples collecting healing oil from the tomb of St. William. See Thomas French, York Minster: The St. William Window (Corpus Vitraearum Medii Aevi: Great Britain Summary Catalogue 5; Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999). Although it dates to the Àfteenth century, this artistic representation reÁects a practice common in the York Minster from the thirteenth century, when the cult of St. William became well known. The practices at St. William’s shrine were in no way unique. Similar scenes appear in shrines all over Western Christendom. It is apparent that Jews such as our author not only knew that such shrines existed but
EPHRAIM SHOHAM-STEINER
121
After the demon Ànishes anointing all the pilgrims asleep by the tomb, the Jewish protagonist, who has remained awake, observes that he has been overlooked. Disappointed by this turn of events, the Jew approaches the demon and demands an explanation. Here, the narrative’s moral reckoning with those who seek the healing aid of saints begins. The demon reveals his knowledge of the Jew’s true identity and bluntly asks him to explain his presence in the shrine. The demon states in an unequivocal manner that the shrines of saints are considered idolatry. His statement takes the form of a rhetorical question, a sign that it is intended for the ediÀcation of readers or listeners. During the high Middle Ages, the concept that worshiping or admiring saints is as much idolatry as Christian devotion to the image of Jesus was apparently contested by or at least unclear to some Jews. Evidence of such ambiguity and the rabbinic attempt to overcome it can be found in responsa by Rabbi Meir of Rothenburg regarding oaths that invoke the names of saints.27 This same ambiguity may have motivated the author of the present narrative to make a clear statement on the matter, which he placed in the mouth of the demon. Christian saints are representatives of idolatrous beliefs, says the demon, and Jews should not be present at their shrines seeking their mediation to the divine. Coming from a heavenly being — even a sinister one like a demon — gives this statement the force to eliminate any moral uncertainty in the hearts and minds of the audience. The demon’s next remark is no less important, although it is somewhat confusing. He questions the reality of the saintly presence at the shrine and the miracles that saints allegedly perform. “Do you not know that these idolatries are false?” he sneers. This last statement threatens to cast the entire scene into the realm of absurdity, for if the cult of the saints is indeed “false,” what is the demon doing at the shrine healing cripples? The demon then provides an explanation: “I do this . . . for I want to deceive these gentiles in order for them to further err, thus causing them to lose their share in the world to come.” This last remark clariÀes the demon’s role: he is an envoy of Satan whose prime function is to cause all people, Jewish and gentile, to believe in the healing powers of the shrine of the saint. Belief in these powers is misleading, however, for they only promise physical healing of the body, not true, spiritual health. The
were acquainted (if not quite intimately) with the practices that took place there, including visits by the disabled and the use of healing oil. 27 This response outlines Rabbi Meir’s and other rabbis’ concerns regarding Jews who encouraged Christians to swear oaths for commercial and monetary purposes and had them invoke the names of Christian saints. The same responsum mentions Jews who, in order to convince these same nonJewish business partners of their solemn intentions, swore similar oaths, again invoking the names of Christian saints. Rabbi Meir writes that he has reprimanded his Áock on this matter, but that his instruction was largely unheeded. See Rabbi Meir Ben Baruch of Rothenburg, Responsa, Rulings and Customs: Collected, Annotated and Arranged in the Order of the Shulchan Arukh (ed. Yitshak Ze’ev Kahana; Jerusalem: Mosad ha-Rav Kuk, 1960) 2:52–53 §57 (Hebrew).
122
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
ultimate heavenly reward comes to those who are not fooled by the saints’ power to heal the Áesh. In Jellinek’s version of the Midrash on the Decalogue, this notion appears in a preliminary discussion that is absent from the version in MS Vatican Heb. 285. The absent portion contains a reference to a passage from the Babylonian Talmud, tractate Avodah Zarah, which is dedicated entirely to encounters between Jews and non-Jews and to issues of Jews confronted by idol worship. The quotation is from what seems to be an interfaith discussion between the second-century C.E. Palestinian sage, Rabbi Akiba, and a man identiÀed by his Greek name, Zenon.28 Zenon asks R. Akiba how he explains the fact that individuals seeking the healing power of idols (probably referring to pagan shrines like the aforementioned Aesculapios) are actually healed. R. Akiba answers with a parable, which is quoted in thirteenthcentury Jewish polemical literature.29 As noted above, our author chose to omit this introduction and focus instead on the discussion between the demon and the Jew. The ethical message embedded in the demon’s statement is, therefore, a fundamental point of contention between Jews and Christians. According to the demon, although those who arrive at the shrine appear to leave healed, this is only a superÀcial, external healing, possibly even an optical illusion. The real reward — that in the world to come — is withheld from these misguided individuals. By allowing themselves to be led astray, they leave the righteous path and thus lose their promised heavenly reward. The demon thus makes a direct anti-Christian statement that seems designed to serve as a distorted mirror image of the Christian characterization of the Jews as Carnal Israel. Although the Jews might be corporeal misÀts and cripples and may not be physically healed, they do receive the true spiritual reward in the world to come by virtue of refraining from going to the healing shrines of the saints. Interestingly enough, the demon phrases his statement in a manner that suggests that Christians, too, should forsake the superÀcial healing offered at the shrines and return to beseeching the Almighty directly. This statement is by no means a novel one. It appears in Jewish works as early as the Talmud and is quoted in Jewish anti-Christian debate manuals from the medieval Franco-German world. Two well-articulated examples of this claim are found in Jewish Franco-German polemical works from the thirteenth century. The Àrst is from the aforementioned Sefer Nizzahon Yashan, known also by its Latin name Nizzahon Vetus (NV).30 The anonymous thirteenth-century author of NV collected a 28 Interestingly enough, the eleventh-century northern French Talmudic commentator Rabbi Shlomo ben Yizchak (Rashi) speciÀes that Zenon was not a gentile but an assimilated Hellenistic Jew. See his commentary on b. Avodah Zarah 55a. 29 Berger, The Jewish-Christian Debate, 210–12 and notes on 330. 30 The Hebrew word Ú[N\R means both victory and argument or debate. Preserved in a single manuscript in the University Library of Strasburg, this work was Àrst printed in 1681 by Johann Christoph Wagenseil (1633–1705), a German historian and Hebraist, in his Tela Ignea Satanae (=The Fiery Arrows of the Devil). See Johann Christoph Wagenseil, Tela Ignea Satanae hoc est arcane et horribiles Judaeorum adversus Christum, Deum et Christianam Religionem Libri (Altdorf: J. H.
EPHRAIM SHOHAM-STEINER
123
variety of Jewish counter-arguments to Christian polemics as well as commenting on pressing contemporary questions that were relevant in the Franco-German sphere. Structured according to the order of the Hebrew Bible and focused on verses which form the core of the Jewish-Christian controversy, NV was a handy manual for Jews confronted with Christian polemic. It served both as a tool for external use against Christian antagonists and as a reinforcement of internal dogma. The second section of the book contains a broad critique of the Gospels and of common Christian beliefs and customs, including the cult of Christian saints. The longest and most elaborate discussion focusing on the latter appears in NV § 217. Surprisingly enough, the Christian claim that miracles actually occur is not altogether discredited by NV. In the mind of the author or compiler, the miracles do indeed take place, but they are deliberately designed to mislead Christians and to mire them more deeply in their erroneous path of choice: The fact remains, that saint so-and-so does remarkable deeds such as curing the blind, strengthening the weak, and freeing the imprisoned. This is how you should answer him [the Christian]: . . . a sickness has a speciÀc time allotted to it, and it is faithful; it will not endure past its time and give the lie to its faithfulness even if it turns out that the sick man will be cured when he goes to some idolatrous practice. . . . He may then ask: Why didn’t the end of the disease come before he came to the saint? Why is it that he was cured at the very moment that he came to the saint? Answer him: this is done to mislead you, as Job said: “He misleads nations and destroys them, he spreads out for the nations and leads them [Job 12:23], i.e., he spreads out a trap and leads them into it to be caught. Moreover, Isaiah said: “I am sought by them that asked not for me; I am found by them that sought me not. I said ‘behold me’ to a nation that was not called by my name. I spread out my hands all day unto a rebellious people which walks in the way that is not good, after their own thoughts . . . who eat swine’s Áesh. . . .” [Isa 65:1–4]31
The author of NV makes use of this last verse to prove that those who receive a cure from God are not necessarily beseeching him in the proper manner, but may rather be approaching him through the false mediation of the dead saints.32 The essence of the detailed discussion in NV is expressed in the demon’s short explanation of why he has healed other cripples but refuses to heal the Jew.
Schönnerstaedt, 1681). The original manuscript that was copied by Wagenseil in his book was lost in the Franco-Prussian war of 1870 when the Strasburg library sustained a direct artillery shell hit and was set ablaze. In the late 1970’s David Berger published his invaluable bilingual annotated edition of the full text based on all the known sources. The quotes here are from this edition. 31 Berger, Jewish-Christian Polemics, § 217 (= English section pp. 210–11). 32 Jews had a special set of anti-Christian claims directed against the cult of the dead in Christianity and the Christian custom of church burials as well as burial within consecrated grounds. This practice seemed exceptionally counter-intuitive to Jews, for in Jewish law death is considered the most deÀling form of impurity.
124
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
A similar claim can be found in another anonymous Jewish polemical source, The Book of Debate: A Rebuke of the Minim.33 Among the many anti-Christian arguments set forth in this work are several concerning the alleged healing powers of Christian saints. In his argument, the Jewish polemist, much like the author of the above-quoted passage in NV, acknowledges the authenticity of the miraculous cures that take place at the shrines of the saints; however, he attributes them to the Creator (EV[FL) and not to the saints’ healing power. He also accuses Christian ecclesiastical authorities of deliberately misleading innocent people into believing that the saints are responsible for miraculous healing: And if the gentile asks you: why doesn’t the Creator work miracles on the Jews’ behalf as he does for us Christians, proving his claim from their saints where the lame and the blind and the dumb go and are healed . . . and he says to you: what cured the lame and the blind and the dumb? Answer him: All God’s loved ones are cured when the time comes, as we recite in prayer: “From bad and faithful illness [you deliver us].”34 What is faithful about illnesses? They are faithful in their mission, for when the time comes they leave. And when the gentiles go to their churches and shrines, they think that the miracle is on account of the saints, and this is not so, for the Creator has done it, as Scripture says: “He misleads nations and destroys them.” [Job 12:23]
This argument by the anonymous Jewish polemist uses similar contentions and the same biblical verse (Job 12:23) as NV, but with a different twist. Although the healing of the Christian is considered authentic, and although it appears to occur 33 This Hebrew word, literally translated “heretics,” is used as a code word for Christians as early as the second century C.E. This polemic manual can be found in MS Oxford, Bodleian Library 2289 fol. 30–58. I wish to take this opportunity to thank Prof. Israel Jacob Yuval for directing my attention to this manuscript. Paleographical analysis indicates that this short, never-published medieval Hebrew polemical tract should be dated no earlier than the Àfteenth century. The manuscript itself is something of a riddle. Most of the material found within it is of a rather eclectic nature, but it echoes medieval Jewish rabbinic material; some of the contents, including the polemical tract, have much in common with the writings of the Hasidei Ashkenaz (Jewish pietists of medieval Germany). The material in this manuscript is recorded in Hebrew in a standard European script. Although, as noted above, the manuscript itself dates to no earlier than the Àfteenth century, large portions of the text date to the thirteenth century, and most of the material is even older. Judah Rosenthal published a portion of this manuscript in Mehqarim u-meqorot (vol. 1 of Studies and Texts in Jewish History, Literature and Religion; Jerusalem: Rubin Mass, 1967) 368–72 (Hebrew), following an abridged version in MS Paris BN Heb. 1408. See Daniel Abrams, “The Boundaries of Divine Ontology: The Inclusion and Exclusion of Metatron in the Godhead,” HTR 87 (1994) 291–321. On Hasidei Ashkenaz and their prominent spokesmen, including the aforementioned Rabbi Judah the Pious, see Ivan G. Marcus, Piety and Society: The Jewish Pietists of Medieval Germany (Leiden: Brill, 1981); Haym Soloveitchik, “Three Themes in Sefer Hasidim,” AJS Review 1 (1976) 311–47 (here Soloveitchik discusses the role of “the Creator” in their theology); idem, “Piety, Pietism and German Pietism: Sefer Hasidim and the InÁuence of Hasidei Ashkenaz,” JQR 92 (2002) 455–93. The scholarly discussion on Hasidei Ashkenaz was recently updated in an entire volume of the Jewish Quarterly Review dedicated to this subject (JQR 96:1 [2006]). 34 Nishmat Kol Hai, Sabbath morning prayer, based on Deut 25:59.
EPHRAIM SHOHAM-STEINER
125
through the mediation of the saint, this is all an illusion. The illness would have terminated anyway, regardless of the appeal to the saint, since illness itself is a faithful servant of the Creator and disappears when the Creator wills it, and only then. Turning back again to the point at which we left the discussion between the demon and the disappointed Jewish cripple, the arguments should be understood in the context of the aforementioned concepts. After asserting that the Jew made a mistake in coming to the shrine, the demon provides the Jew (as well as the reader) with what can be characterized as the “proper Jewish way” to challenge a debilitating disease or physical condition. Rather then turning to the Christian shrines of healing saints, says the demon, “you should turn away (¨[UP) from idolatry and instead you should stand and pray directly to the Almighty, the Holy One, blessed be He, so that He will cure you.” The demon stresses that only a direct appeal to the Almighty, without the false mediation of the idolatrous saints, will bring a cure without compromising one’s heavenly reward. The author’s word choice in this last sentence is interesting. The Hebrew term ¨[UP (to turn away from, revile) is highly unusual. This phrasing is unique to the version of the Midrash on the Decalogue found in MS Vatican Heb. 285 and suggests a double meaning. It seems that the German Jewish author, copyist, or compiler of our version of the Midrash on the Decalogue may have chosen ¨[UP because of its similarity to the German word ketzer, meaning heretics. If a pun is indeed intended, it may constitute evidence that the appeal of the cult of saints among medieval Yiddish-speaking Franco-German Jewry was strong, especially during the time that MS Vatican Heb. 285 was written. Although the story appears in earlier versions, such a local alteration, as subtle as it is, may have been introduced to enhance the relevance of the text within a certain cultural context. Many exempla were constructed to help homilists convey what they regarded as important messages to their audiences.35 They may be entertaining, at times even funny, as long as they convey the moral message inherent in their purpose. The appearance of our story in this setting is telling, as are its connection to “idol worship” and what seems to be a linguistic pun in its concluding remark. While discussing the concrete implications of the second commandment of the Decalogue with his audience, the author or compiler could have easily brought up other issues relating to idol worship. Furthermore, he could have changed the setting and not mentioned the strong appeal of healing shrines, or he could have chosen a different main character, not necessarily a marginal lame Jew hoping to be healed. However, it was this version that he chose, and this was surely not without reason. With this in mind, let us analyze the demon’s Ànal remark. It is at this point that the demon strikes his Ànal blow at the lame Jew and discloses a very troubling 35 See Allan’s recent book on the construction of exempla in Middle English literature: Elizabeth Allan, False Fables and Exemplary Truth in Later Middle English Literature (New York: Macmillan, 2005) 1–27.
126
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
bit of information. The demon possesses knowledge of the divine world, a sphere of knowledge Jewish sources traditionally call “information from behind the curtain” (H[KVTL]VNEQ). The demon tells the lame Jew that his disability was destined to be healed on that very day. However, due to the lame man’s appeal to the saint, the disability will endure forever, never to be cured. Again, we see how this short exemplum evokes themes typical of Jewish polemical literature, in this case regarding the Ànite nature of situations which to the disbelieving eye seem chronic. The demon explains that had the Jew beseeched God properly, directly, and refrained from seeking the healing powers of the saints, he would have been cured from his debilitating condition, for “the designated date for your cure had arrived.” This notion is encapsulated in the word “for ever” (P[?P). By appealing to the aid of saints, the lame Jew therefore failed twice: he missed his window of opportunity to be physically healed, and he compromised his heavenly reward by transgressing in idol worship (LV^LH[F?
). The theme of a man who misses an opportunity to be healed due to his evildoing appears in a few other medieval Jewish exempla as well, one of which is the story of the “angry leper.” Although it is not an integral part of the Midrash on the Decalogue, Anat Shapira quotes this story in her appendix, since some of the versions of the midrash include it. The exemplum about the angry leper is a tale of the healing powers of the mythical Well of Miriam, a theme which demands scholarly scrutiny beyond the scope of this paper. The story appears in several medieval Franco-German Jewish sources, in both manuscripts and in printed editions. The following version comes from an addendum to a collection of responsa of the aforementioned Rabbi Meir of Rothenburg: There was once a man who was a struck with shekhin (a skin disease). When his wife went to draw water from the well on Saturday night, she was delayed for an hour or two. A miracle occured and he was cured. She chanced upon the miraculous Well of Miriam and Àlled her pitcher with its waters. Upon her arrival back home, her husband was furious with her and asked her angrily, “Where have you been?” Upon hearing this the wife was so upset and saddened that she dropped the pitcher and it fell from her shoulder and broke. Drops of water touched his diseased Áesh and, miraculously, wherever the water touched his Áesh he was healed. And regarding this the sages say, “Ultimately, all that an angry man gains is his anger.”38
At this point, the author explains the background to the miraculous cure:
36 See Ephraim Shoham-Steiner, “The Virgin Mary, Miriam and the Vicissitudes of Jewish Reactions to Marian Devotion in the High Middle Ages” (forthcoming). 37 In this version, the story is recounted as a quote from Sefer HaNachmani, one of the lost halakhic works of Rabbi Nachman, the son of R. Haym Hacohen, a twelfth-century Jewish sage from northern France. On the lost writings of the TosaÀsts see Simcha Emmanuel, The Fragments of the Tablets: Lost Books of the Tosaphists (Jerusalem: Magnes, 2006) 297–302 (Hebrew). 38 Qidd. 41a.
EPHRAIM SHOHAM-STEINER
127
The Well of Miriam was hidden in the Sea of Tiberias. It roams the springs and wells of the world every Saturday night and any sick person lucky enough to drink from its waters will be instantly cured, even if his entire body is leprous.39
In this story, we hear again of the ill fortunes of those of little faith who, due to their disbelief, miss the opportunity to be delivered from illness. The “angry leper” exemplum is, of course, not a direct parallel to the story of the demon and the lame Jew, but the two tales do share some common features. One such feature is the theme of idolatry. Although this theme is not concretely manifested in the “angry leper” exemplum, it is implicit in the moral about anger; a much-quoted phrase in the Babylonian Talmud draws a direct parallel between one who succumbs to anger and an idol worshipper. In the tale of the demon and the lame Jew, the Jew misses the opportunity to be healed due to his idolatrous attempt to take advantage of the healing power of a saint. In the “angry leper” story the leper misses the opportunity to be healed due to his anger, which according to some traditions is tantamount to idolatry. The logic behind this parallel is that succumbing to anger is capitulation to oneself instead of proper pious capitulation to divine will. From a literary point of view, both stories reinforce a common feature of the medieval understanding of illness. Physical illness in both stories is a bodily manifestation of a spiritual malfunction, either disbelief or covert heresy. *** This article has discussed a text that provides a possible answer to the question of whether or not Jews actually approached the shrines of the healing saints in medieval Europe in search of cures. As we have seen, there is little chance of answering this question by means of concrete positive evidence because source material on these matters is rare. If we look instead to the writings of those who critiqued this phenomenon, however, we can Ànd indirect evidence in exempla stories. These stories were probably designed for use in public sermons or as didactic texts. Members of the rabbinic elite who composed the stories, copied them, and altered them to Àt their purposes intended for them to deliver a warning. The story of the lame Jew in MS Vatican Heb. 285 proves that Jewish use of the cult of healing saints 39
The exemplum bares yet another interesting resemblance to the story of Godeliva and the Jewess discussed earlier in this article. In that exemplum too, anger (in that case St. Thomas Becket’s) prevented the use of potentially miraculous waters for healing. 40 B. Shabb. 105b. This notion is also strongly advocated by Maimonides in his exegesis on m. Avot 2:9. Maimonides’ halakhic and exegetical works began circulating among Jewish scholars in Europe in the late twelfth century. Unlike his philosophical works, which were at the center of much controversy and at times even rejected, works of this nature were accepted and quoted extensively all over Western Europe. 41 I discuss this issue at length in my book: Ephraim Shoham-Steiner, Involuntary Marginals: Lepers, Madmen and Disabled Individuals in Medieval European Jewish Society (Jerusalem: Merkaz Zalman Shazar, 2007) (Hebrew). An English version of this book is in preparation.
128
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
was a troubling issue for the Jewish community at the time that it was composed. Close analysis of the exemplum indicates that it was composed, or at least modiÀed, in Europe in the High Middle Ages. The story circulated among Judeo-German speaking Jews even though, like many tales of its kind, it was recorded in medieval Hebrew and not in the local vernacular. The ideas in the story draw upon and share phrases, religious claims, and lines of reasoning with the Jewish anti-Christian polemical literature of the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries, providing a possible time frame for its Àrst appearance. This literature functioned as double-edged sword, battling claims that came from outside the Jewish community while at the same time addressing internal issues resulting from the complexity of Judeo-Christian relations in medieval Europe. The story of the lame Jew and the demon at the healing shrine warns against the practice of seeking aid for physically debilitating conditions from Christian shrines of the healing saints. It is designed to instill in potential pilgrims fear of the negative supernatural consequences of such a heretical endeavor. Jews did not altogether discredit the healing miracles that took place in these shrines. The social phenomenon of pilgrimages to the shrines was too widespread and the propaganda originating from them was too powerful to plainly deny. In our story, as in other Jewish polemics against the cult of saints, the saints’ healing power is considered authentic. Jews did, however, discredit the miracles in a more subtle and sophisticated manner by interpreting them as caused by a heavenly force intended to mislead non-Jewish believers, drawing them further down the path of confessional error. In our story, which was designed for internal Jewish use, we hear the voice of the Jewish learned elite, which intended to instill in the populace the idea that seeking the aid of saints is not only objectionable from a confessional point of view, but may also be a detriment to one’s physical and spiritual health. In order to battle the appeal of the healing shrines, the story conveys, both explicitly and implicitly, the message that the shrines are demonic and dangerous. The healing that they bring is characterized as merely superÀcial, with the potential to result in great twofold loss. It seems clear that stories such as this did not circulate solely within the scholastic circles of those who read and wrote them. Their powerful and direct language, the possible plays on words, the precise articulation of their claims, and their connection to ideas that circulated in Jewish anti-Christian literature from the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries all suggest that these stories were designed to battle an existing social phenomenon and not merely a literary specter. Even if this phenomenon was present only in the margins of medieval Jewish society (among those handicapped individuals who relentlessly sought to overcome their misfortune), the Jewish learned elite could not ignore it. The battle against the appeal of the Christian healing shrines thus reÁects the Jewish elite’s concern for the spiritual wellbeing of its marginal individuals. These individuals were probably more tempted than healthier members of the community
EPHRAIM SHOHAM-STEINER
129
to explore this possibility because of their strong desire to reverse their fortunes. Furthermore, the narrator’s familiarity with the most intimate details of the events that took place at such shrines suggests knowledge of practices common on the “other side,” within the neighboring Christian religious culture. The story’s verisimilitude seems designed to instill the fear of God in those Jews who either contemplated seeking aid at these shrines or actually endeavored to do so. The whereabouts of these individuals are said to be well known, and their thoughts and deeds are thus compromised. In light of this story, Jewish attempts to discredit the miracles of the healing saints, reinterpret them, and show them for what they truly are, as well as to offer an internal Jewish mechanism for faith healing, seem all the more important for a more nuanced appreciation of Jewish medieval culture and the challenges it faced.
Books Received Barton, Stephen C. and David Wilkinson, eds. Reading Genesis after Darwin. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009. 254 pp. $24.95 pb. Bean, Jonathan, ed. Race & Liberty in America: The Essential Reader. Lexington, Ky.: University Press of Kentucky, 2009. 329 pp. $24.95 pb. BeDuhn, Jason David. Augustine’s Manichaean Dilemma 1: Conversion and Apostasy, 373–388 C.E. Philadelphia, Pa.: U. of Pennsylvania Press, 2009. 402 pp. $69.95 hb. Beilby, Jame K. and Paul Rhodes Eddy. The Historical Jesus: Five Views. Downers Grove, Ill.: InterVarsity Press, 2009. 312 pp. $26.00 pb. Berman, Eli. Radical, Religious, and Violent: The New Economics of Terrorism. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2009. 300 pp. $24.94 hb. Bevans, Stephen B. An Introduction to Theology in Global Perspective. Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis Books, 2009. 384 pp. n.p. pb. DaPonte, Paul J. Hope in an Age of Terror. Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis Books, 2009. 288 pp. $34.00 pb. De Carlo, Franco. “Dio mio, Dio mio, perché mi hai abbandonato?” (Mc 15,34): I Salmi nel racconto della passione di Gesù secondo Marco. Analecta Biblica 179. Roma: Gregorian & Biblical Press, 2009. 476 pp. Euro 35,00. pb. Elias, John L. and Lucinda A. Nolan. Educators in the Catholic Intellectual Trad-ition. FairÀeld, Conn.: Sacred Heart University Press, 2009. 336 pp. $28.95 hb. Franke, John R. Manifold Witness: The Plurality of Truth. Living Theology Series. Nashville, Tenn.: Abingdon Press, 2009. 152 pp. $18.00 pb. Goizueta, Roberto S. Christ Our Companion: Toward a Theological Aesthetics of Liberation. 179 pp. $30.00 pb. Greenspahn, Frederick E., ed. Women and Judaism: New Insights and Scholar-ship. New York: New York University Press, 2009. 268 pp. $21.00 pb. Hathaway, Mark and Leonardo Boff. The Tao of Liberation: Exploring the Ecology of Transformation. Ecology and Justice Series. Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis, 2009. 419 pp. $35.00 pb. Heck, Paul L. Common Ground: Islam, Christianity, and Religious Pluralism. Washington, D.C.: Georgetown University Press, 2009. 240 pp. $24.95 pb. Hendrix, Scott H., ed. and transl. Early Protestant Spirituality. The Classics of Western Spirituality. Mahwah, N.J.: Paulist Press, 2009. 338 pp. $29.95 pb. HTR 103:1 (2010) 131–32
132
HARVARD THEOLOGICAL REVIEW
Johnson, Roger A. Peacemaking and Religious Violence: From Thomas Aquinas to Thomas Jefferson. Princeton Theological Monograph Series 120. Eugene, Oreg.: Pickwick Publications, 2009. 251 pp. n.p. pb. Kelsey, David H. Eccentric Existence: A Theological Anthropology. Vol. 1. Louisville, Ky.: Westminster John Knox, 2009. 602 pp. n.p. hb; Vol. 2. 605–1092 pp. n.p. hb. Leithart, Peter J. Deep Exegesis: The Mystery of Reading Scripture. Waco, Tex.: Baylor University Press, 2009. 254 pp. n.p. pb. Long, Thomas G. Accompany Them with Singing: The Christian Funeral. Louisville, Ky.: Westminster John Knox, 2009. 224 pp. n.p. hb. Mandair, Arvind-Pal S. Religion and the Specter of the West: Sikhism, India, Postcoloniality, and the Politics of Translation. Insurrections: Critical Studies in Religion, Politics and Culture. New York, Columbia University Press, 2009. 516 pp. n.p. hb. Marchand, Suzanne L. German Orientalism in the Age of Empire: Religion, Race, and Scholarship. New York: Cambridge University Press, 2009. 526 pp. $60.00 hb. Median, Néstor. Mestizaje: (Re)mapping Race, Culture, and Faith in Latina/o Catholicism. Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis Books, 2009. 203 pp. $28.00 pb. Mitchell, Nathan D. The Mystery of the Rosary: Marian Devotion and the Reinvention of Catholicism. New York: New York University Press, 2009. 325 pp. $37.00 hb. O’Connell, Maureen H. Compassion: Loving Our Neighbor in an Age of Globalization. Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis Books, 2009. 242 pp. n.p. pb. Penyak, Lee M. & Walter J. Petry, eds. Religion and Society in Latin America: Interpretive Essays from Conquest to Present. Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis Books, 2009. 298 pp. $40.00 pb. Radde-Gallwitz, Andrew. Basil of Caesarea, Gregory of Nyssa, and the Transformation of Divine Simplicity. Oxford Early Christian Studies. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009. 261 pp. $100.00 hb. Rauser, Randal. Theology in Search of Foundations. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009. 313 pp. n.p. hb. Rubin, Miri, ed. Medieval Christianity in Practice. Princeton Readings in Reli-gions. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2009. 346 pp. $22.95 pb. Sachedina, Abdulaziz. Islam & The Challenge of Human Rights. New York: Oxford University Press, 2009. 248 pp. $35.00 hb. Schüssler Fiorenza, Elisabeth. Democratizing Biblical Studies: Toward an Emancipatory Educational Space. Louisville, Ky.: Westminster John Knox, 2009. 215 pp. n.p. pb. Spero, Shubert. Aspects of Rabbi Joseph B. Soloveitchik’s Philosophy of Judaism: An Analytic Approach. Jersey City, N.J.: KTAV, 2009. 235 pp. $29.50 hb. Takim, Liyakat Nathani. Shi‘ism in America. New York: New York University Press, 2009. 285 pp. $35.00 hb. Thurman, Howard W. The Papers of Howard Washington Thurman: Vol. 1 My People Need Me. June 1918–March 1936. Columbia, S.C.: University of South Carolina Press, 2009. 377 pp. $59.95 hb. Troll, Christian W. Clarity in Christian-Muslim Relations. Translated by David Marshall. Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis Books, 2009. 182 pp. $34.00 pb.
Outstanding Scholarship from Cambridge Homosexuality and the Crisis of Anglicanism
Christianity and Genocide in Rwanda
William L. Sachs
Timothy Longman
$90.00: Hb: 978-0-521-85120-6: 264 pp.
African Studies $90.00: Hb: 978-0-521-19139-5: 352 pp.
The Cambridge Companion to Christian Philosophical Theology
God and the Founders Madison, Washington, and Jefferson
Edited by Charles Taliaferro and Chad Meister
Vincent Phillip Muñoz $85.00: Hb: 978-0-521-51515-3: 256 pp. $24.99: Pb: 978-0-521-73579-7
Cambridge Companions to Religion $85.00: Hb: 978-0-521-51433-0: 288 pp. $27.99: Pb: 978-0-521-73037-2
New series:
Methods in Biblical Interpretation The Evidence for God Religious Knowledge Reexamined
Paul K. Moser $85.00: Hb: 978-0-521-51656-3: 289 pp. $24.99: Pb: 978-0-521-73628-2
Alternative Christs Edited by Olav Hammer $90.00: Hb: 978-0-521-88902-5: 316 pp.
The Methods in Biblical Interpretation (MBI) series introduces students and general readers to both older and emerging methodologies for understanding the Hebrew Scriptures and the New Testament. An MBI volume contains separate chapters from six different well known scholars. Each scholar first elucidates the history and purposes of an interpretative method, then outlines the promise of the method in the context of a single biblical book, and finally shows the method “in action”, by applying it to a specific biblical passage. The results serve as a primer for understanding different methods within the shared space of common texts, enabling real, comparative analysis for students, clergy, and anyone interested in a deeper and broader understanding of the Bible.
Methods for Matthew On Time, Punctuality and Discipline in Early Modern Calvinism Max Engammare $90.00: Hb: 978-0-521-76997-6: 270 pp.
The Origins of Christian Zionism
Edited by Mark Allan Powell Methods in Biblical Interpretation $85.00: Hb: 978-0-521-88808-0: 280 pp. $24.99: Pb: 978-0-521-71614-7
Future publications:
Methods for Exodus Edited by Thomas B. Dozeman
Lord Shaftesbury and Evangelical Support for a Jewish Homeland
Methods for Luke
Donald M. Lewis
Edited by Joel B. Green
$90.00: Hb: 978-0-521-51518-4: 384 pp. Prices subject to change.
Methods for the Psalms Edited by Esther Marie Menn
www.cambridge.org/us
Available for Adoption The Cambridge Introduction to Biblical Hebrew with CD-ROM Brian L. Webster “The inclusion of the Interactive CD-Rom is, in my opinion, worth the price of the book... Overall, I highly recommend The Cambridge Introduction to Biblical Hebrew whether for the person interested in learning first year Hebrew individually or for professors of Bible colleges or seminaries who are looking for a cutting-edge grammar to use in the classroom.” –Rob Kashow, Tolle Lege! A Canonical Perspective 1 CD-ROM, 1 Paperback | 978-0-521-71284-2 | 39.99 USD | 380 pages
The Cambridge Introduction to Biblical Hebrew is designed for anyone studying biblical Hebrew for the first time. It is well suited for students enrolled in introductory-level courses as well as clergy and laity engaged in self-study. The accompanying CD (suitable for Mac and PC) includes the workbook, answers, paradigms, and the interactive program TekScroll. Features: 8 Interactive program TekScroll illustrates important grammatical concepts with moving graphics and provides practice items for recognizing forms (parsing) and translation and studying vocabulary 8 Exercises and practice items build on vocabulary from previous chapters, allowing immediate in-class practice without the burden of learning new vocabulary first 8 Cross-referenced to the second-year textbook, A Guide to Biblical Hebrew Syntax by Bill T. Arnold and John Choi, with additional pointers on how to use reference works on syntax
www.cambridge.org/us/webster www.cambridge.org/us
Contents: Introduction 1. The signs and sounds of Hebrew: orthography and pronunciation 2. Syllables: the structural girders of Hebrew 3. The ‘state’ of noun morphology, and also gender and number 4. More noun patterns 5. Prepositions, conjunction, article and interrogative particle, direct object indicator 6. Pronouns: pronominal suffixes on substantives and prepositions 7. Adjectives 8. Participles: infinitive construct 9. Selected words: numbers 10. Introduction to verbs: qal perfect 11. Qal perfect weak verbs 12. Qal imperfect and preterite: strong verbs 13. Qal imperfect and preterite: weak verbs 14. Qal volitionals and infinitive absolute 15. Pronominal suffixes on verbs 16. Derived stems: participles and infinitives 17. I-class imperfect verbs: niphal, piel, hitpael, hiphil 18. I-class imperfects: r3 = weak, r2 = g, r1 = g, r2 = x, r1 = x 19. I-class imperfect weak verbs: r2 = y, r1 = y, r2 = r3, weak imv., inf., and ptc. 20. A-class imperfect verbs: pual, hophal 21. Derived stem perfects: strong verbs, r3 = weak 22. Derived stem perfects: r1 and r2 weak, r2 = r3, rare binyanim; Excursus A: Sorting through forms and alias profiles; Excursus B: A syntax sampler: introduction to chapters 23-32 23. Pauses and drama 24. Lexicography: semantic combinations and the meaning of z 25. Noun syntax 26. Verb syntax: the piel 27. Verb syntax: participles 28. Clausal syntax in narrative: movies in the mind; 29. Particles: s and t 30. Infinitives 31. Perfect and vav plus perfect 32. Poetry and time frame Appendix A: Additional vocabulary lists Appendix B: Glossary: words used 50+ times in the Hebrew Bible Appendix C: Paradigms: verb id badges and alias profiles
20% off these prices if you mention HTR in your order! FOR MACINTOSH® OR WINDOWS®:
LaserHebrew® in Unicode™
$99.95
Right to left with proper line wrap, full justification, automatic positioning of vowel points & accents in Word XP–2007 or on Mac in Mellel ($25) NewJerusalemU:
μyIm'`V;h' _ta´à μyhi–løa‘ _ar:∞B; åtyvi`a)rEB]
BHS in Unicode - 12 Formats $59.95 first, $20 add.
Hebrew Scriptures Professional - all 12 formats $99.95
LaserHebrew Converter -
ASCII to Unicode
$79.95
LaserGreek in Unicode $99.95 first, $50 add. ®
: ; < K ∏¶•‡ SymbolGreekU: À rkuvgÄ{o g∫t c÷v˛o ¢ygk h{˚o All fonts include underdots and sigla:
GraecaUBSU: hjgavphsen oJ qeo;" qeo;" qeo;" qeo;" OdysseaU: hjgavphsen oJ qeo;" qeo;" qeo; " qeo;" TeubnerLSU: hjgavphsen oJ qeo;" qeo;" qeo;" qeo;" HellenicaU: hjgavphsen oJ qeo;" qeo;" qeo; " qeo;" PayneU: hjgavphsen oJ qeo;" qeo;" qeo;" qeo;"
UncialLSU • GraecaU • GreekSansLSU • all 11 - $249.95
Greek NT or LXX in Unicode $59.95 (Tagged, call) LaserGreek Converter - Unicode or ASCII $79.95 LaserHebrew® or Greek (ASCII) $99.95 LaserCoptic $99.95 Unicode or ASCII peje I±ß je: Semitic Transliterator - Unicode or ASCII $99.95 ®
®
1:1 bér∑<¡ªt bårå< <éløhªm <∑t ha¡¡åmayim wé<∑t hå<åreß.
TransIndic Transliterator
®
- Unicode or ASCII $99.95
ÄÅÇÉÖ≠Üáàâºæø¿ÒÚŒœÛÙ‚„÷± LINGUIST’S SOFTWARE, Tel: (425) 775-1130 • Fax: (425) 771-5911 Web: www.linguistsoftware.com • E-mail: [email protected]
Cambridge Journals Online For further informaion about this journal please go to the journal website at: http://www.journals.cambridge.org/jid_htr